The URL can be used to link to this page

Prairie Park Cinema Project Manual 05252000YELM PRAIRIE DEVELOPMENT PRAIRIE PARK CINEMA YELM, WASHINGTON PERMIT ISSUE ~3~ REGISTERED 1 ~ ARCMITE LYNN E. HENDERSON STATE OF MIRSHHICTON PROJECT MANUAL MAY 25, 2000 PROJECT NO.: 99144 WPN ARCHITECTURE .~~ Si3 NW 13TH AVENUE 300 PORTLAND OREGON 97209 TEL 503 827 0505 ~A% 503 827 0506 ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ !^~ s ~ 99144 PRAIRIE PARK CINEMA -PROJECT DIRECTORY o..Te, Yelm Prairie Development Company teI 360 458 2352 700 Prairie Park Lane fax 360 458 6722 P.O. Box 5210 Yelm, Washington 98597 Margaret Clapp Jce Williams (Williams Group) 360 458 8533 John Thompson (Williams Group) 360 458 0834 R,oi~+Mo~uuar Olympic Associates tel 206 285 4300 701 Dexter Ave. North 11301, Seattle, WA. fax 206 689 8996 98109 tel 206 938 2415 cell 206 409 7753 Brenda Toole, Project Manager a-mail btoole@oac-intl.com Rick Fria (Fria Group), Project Manager 425 990 1793 Ar<hi+a, W PH Architecture inc tel 503 827 0505 513 NW 13th Ave. 300 fax 503 827 0506 PorNand Oregon 97209 Doug Walton. Principal cell 503 819 4835 Dave Schrom, Project Lead cell 503 538 0576 Greg Good, Project Manager Asso[ia,ed GGLO, LLC tel 206 467 5828 Archaeo 1191 Second Avenue, Suite 1650 fax 206 467 0627 Seattle, Washington 98101 Jim Moore, Principal in Charge tel 206 689 8966 Beth Dwyer, project Manager a-mail bdwyer@gglo.com fax 206 689 8996 Gvl SCA Engineering tel 360 493 6002 677 W ocxtland Square Loop SE 888 493 6002 Lacey, W A 98503 fax 360 493 2476 Marcy Gustafson, Project Manager e-mail mjgsca@scaengccom Jim Gibson Shuauml VLMK Tel 503 222 4453 Engineer 3933 SW Kelly Avenue fax 503 24$ 92&3 Portland, OR. 97201 Jim Knauf, Principal Chris Palmateer, Project Manager WPM ARCH'iECTURE ~~~ 1010-1 F~ieoon,,.,m~ ~~ oc as zs.ma W 051a MEJ Eng~ner MEJ and Associates tel 512 457 8771 811 Barton Springs Road fax 512 457 8743 Suite 700 Austin Texas,78704 Tommy Griffis Randy Deitrick Norton Herbst n9enn City of Yelm, Yelm Building Department teI 360 458 3244 City of Yelm, Yelm Building Department fax 360 458 4348 105 Yelm Ave West Yelm, Wa. 98597 Cathy Carlson, Planner Gary Carlson, InspectodPlans examiner Heo~ Thurston Co. Health tel 360 786 5490 Department ut,u>r Puget Sound Energy (PSE) tel 360 786 5996 fax 360 786 5975 Richard Mott Site Electrical Sparling Electrical Engineers tel 206 667 0555 fax Chris Peterson Concession: Proctor Companies tel 303 973 8989 10497 Centennial Road fax 303 973 8884 Littleton, Colorado 80127 Scott R. Morgan a-mail smorgan@proctorco.com Seahny Irwin Seating Company, Inc. tel 616 784 2621 3251 Fruit Ridge NW fax 616 574 7411 Grand Rapids Michigan 49504 Joe Hoy FF and E American Cinema Equipment, Inc. tel 503-285-7015 1927 North Argyle Street fax 503-285-6765. Portland, Oregon 97217-6752 Scott Hicks. a-mail scottl@cinequip.com Sound CS Acoustical Engineering tel 503 227 6233 833 SW 11°i #808 fax 503 227 4893 Portland, OR. 97025 Mail: PO BOX 3413, Portand, OR. 97208-3413 Cliff Soroka e-mail Gifford.sroka@worldnet.att .net WVX ~3CHITECTURE .. 10104 F ~~ rxx~,rt.x,~ ~~ o0 os zs ae o0 os xa Signoge tbd tel fax COnhocfcr Turner SPD tel 206 505 6614 800 Fourth Avenue South tax 206505-6701 Suite 400 Seattle Washington 98134-1301 Dallas Lewis Cell 206 396 8090 Cell djlewis@tcco.com Dave Quinn Pager 206 505 6700 206 541 0244 Reprogrophiu Reprographics NW tel 206 624 2040 Kathy or Joe Darrell emai darrell@repronw.com WPN i+RCHITECTURE ~M 1010.3 c~~a cwwmer~ ~~ oo as zs.aee roos xe 9g1~ PPC TABLE OF CONTENTS 05/25/00 90% Permk Issue 1 DMSION 0 -BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00001 Project Directory 00003 Table of Contents 00500 Construction Contract/Generat Condkbns 00320 Geotechnical Report 00800 Supplementary Conditions DMSION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - ------- 01 ~ 00 01110 01290 s 01310 01330 01400 01420 01425 01500 01580 01600 01630 01655 07700 01730 01785 DMSION 2 02200 02520 DIVISON 3 D3300 03365 Substitution Request Form Starting of System Contract Closeout Cutting and Patching Warranties and Bonds SffEWORK Earthwork Portland Cemen! Concrete Paving CONCRETE Concrete Surface applied concrete cdor MASONRY 04221 Concrete Masonry Units 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90°k Permit Issue 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joists 05300 Sleet Decks 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05510 Metal Stairs 05515 Metal Ladders 05520 Metal Handrails and Railings 05730 Ornamental Formed Metal DMSION 6 WOOD b PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06410 Custom Casework DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07180 Water Repellant Coatings 07210 Building Insulation 07462 Metal Siding 07515 SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing 07610 Sheet Metal Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07724 Roof Hatches 07810 Applied Fireproofing 07815 Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealers DMSION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08000 Door and Frame Schedule 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08305 Access Doors 08311 Special Doors 08380 Double Acting Doors 08410 Storefronts and Curtainwalls 08710 Door Hardware 08810 Glaang TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 99149 PPC TABLE OF CONTENTS 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09000 Room Finish Schedule 09001 Room Finish Schedule Notes Material and Finishes summary 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09300 Tile 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09545 Specialty Ceilings 09665 Resilient Sheet Flooring 09680 Carpet 09860 Anti-Graffiti Coating 09900 Paint 09950 Wall Covering DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments 10400 Signage 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10810 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11020 Building Access Key Cabinet DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12692 Floor Mats DIVISIONS 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISIONS 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 15015 15020 15060 15100 15120 15140 15240 15250 15300 15430 15440 15450 15451 15859 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 15890 Ductwork 15910 Ductwork Accessories 15930 Air Distribution Devices 15970 Automatic Temperature control System 15990 HVAC Operational Test-Adjust-Balance TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 16010 16110 16115 16120 16125 16130 16140 16420 16425 16440 16450 16460 16470 16475 16485 16510 16720 16740 16910 16920 APPENDIX A Geotechnicel Report END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 99144 PPC Geotechnical Report 00320 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A copy of a geotechnical report, with respect to the building site is included herewith and is located in Appendix A at the end of the Project Manual. B. This reports identifies properties of below grade conditions and recommendations for the design of foundation systems. C. The recommendations described shall not t>e construed as a requirement of this Contract, unless speclfkally referenced in the Contract Documents. D. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum aG7Uing to the Owner. PART2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF DOCUMENT ~. .~ s r ~ ~. ~. r ` ~. rr r ~ s s .~ . .r r 99144 PPC Constrvctlon Contract /General Conditions 00500 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The Contracts and Conditions shall consist of those listed in, or referenced to, in this section. These shall constitute the governing documents for the Project. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions PART 2 -MATERIALS 2.01 CONTRACT A. The Contract for this Project shall be A111 "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor Cost Plus Fee with a Guaranteed Maximum Cost" (1997 Edition as published by the American Institute of Architects). A copy of this AIA document can be found following this Section. 2.02 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT A. The General Conditions in force with this Contract shall be A201 "General Conditions of Contract for Construction" (1997 Edition as published by the American Institute of Architects). A copy of this AIA document can be found following this Section. 2.03 SUPPLEMENT TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Specification Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions modifies, changes, deletes or adds to the A201 "General Conditions of Contract for Construction' document. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ~ i^t s . ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ a a~ ~ s ~ ~ r ~ 99144 PPC Supplementary Conditions 00800 OS / 25 / 00 90% Permit Issue 1 The following supplements modify, change, delete or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or voided by these articles, the unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect. In case of conflict between these Spec cations and General Conditions, the Specifications govern. ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS Add the following articles: 1.1.8 PROVIDE The term "provide" means "furnish and install" or Yurnish labor and material required for installation, ready for use and under the terms of the Contract Documents." 1.1.9 AS SHOWN The terms "as shown, as noted, as Indicated", or words of similar import refer to the Drawings. 1.1.10 AS SELECTED, AS APPROVED The terms "as selected, as approved", or words of similar import means as selected or approved by the Architect. 1.1.11 PRODUCT The term "product" includes materials, systems and equipment. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 Add the following to the end of article 1.2.1: H the General Contractor finds a conflict, error, or discrepancy in the ConVact Documents, he will call k to the Architect's attention In writing before proceeding with the Work affected thereby. Figure dimensions on Drawings shall govern over scale dimensions, and detailed Drawings shall govern over general Drawings. Any Work that may reasonably be inferred from the Spec'fiications or Drawings as being required to produce the intended result shall be supplied whether or not it is specifically called for. Work, materials or equipment described in words which so applied have a well known technical or trade meaning shall be deemed to refer to such recognized standards. Add the following article: 1.2.6 Sections of Division 1 -General Requirements govern the execution of the work of all sections of the specifications. ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Add the following article: 3.3.4 The Contractor shall determine that dimensions of new work affected by existing conditions or work of other trades already in place be field verified prior to installation of new work. Notify Architect of discrepancies. 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 Owner to pay sales tax due on Construction conVact directly to state agency. 99144 PPC Supplementary Conditions 00800 05/25/00 90% Permft Issue 2 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Add the following to the end of artide 3.7.1: Plan check fee and building permit fee will be paid by the Owner directly to the Agency having Jurisdiction. Contractor shall not include the cost of these fees in its Bid. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES Add the following article: 3.11.1 Refer to Section 01700, Contract Closeout, for additional provisions on this subject. 3.12 SHOP DRAW INGS AND SAMPLES 3.12.2 Add the following to the end of article 3.12.2: Contractor to review product data for installation and assembly instructions. Notify Architect of any conflict with plans or spec cations in time to permit correction wthout interfering with scheduled installation. Add the following article: 3.12.11 Refer to Section 01330, Submittals, for provisions on this subject. ARTICLE 4 -ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Delete articles 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 in their entirety. 4.2 ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.5 Add the following to the end of article 4.2.5: The Architects' certificate of payment serves as a recommendation to the Owner. Final authority to authorize payment to the Contractor lies with the Owner. 4.2.9 Add the following to the end of article 4.2.9: The Architect will not grant final completion without the written expressed agreement of the Owner. 4.2.11 Delete words "and decide" from the first sentence. 4.3.3 Delete first sentence. 4.4.4 Delete words "final and" from the first sentence. 4.5.4.1 Delete paragraph in its entirety. ARTICLE 5 -SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARDS OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.3 Add the following to the end of artide 5.2.3: No increase in Contract value will be awardedrf the Contractor has not secured a written Bid from the rejected subcontractor prior to the public opening of bids by the Owner. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 Add the following to the end of artide 5.3.1: 99144 PPC Supplementary Condlt3ons 00800 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 Obligate each subconVactor to make payments promptly when due to all persons supplying to the subcontactor labor or materials for this contract. Obligate the subcontractor not to permit any lien or claim against the Owner, for any labor or material furnished to the subcontractor for this project. ARTICLE 7 -CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.3 Add the following to the end of artiGe 7.1.3: If a change order, construction change directive, or minor change in the work is ordered by the Owner and Architect, and a dispute arises concerning the value of the change, the Contractor will complete the changed work in a timely fashion. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2.2 Add the following to the end of article 7.2.2: Regardless of way cost or credit is determined, the amount for Overhead and Profit shall not exceed 10 percent on accumulation total nor 5 percent if the change is accomplished by a single prime contractor. ARTICLE 9 -PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.2 Add the following to the end of artiGe 9.3.2: Any materials stored off-site will be stored in a licensed and bonded warehouse. Such warehouse will hold a bond representing at least the total value of the goods and materials proposed for storage in the warehouse. A written document will be provided by the supplier or vendor which relinquishes title of the stored goods to the Owner. Any additional costs associated with the storage of goods off-site will be borne by the ConVactor. The Architect or his representative will inspect any proposed storage facility for suitability. The Architect will inspect any stored goods immediately prior to movement to the job site in order to assess any damage that may have occurred during storage. Add the following article: 9.3.4 Refer to Section 01290 Contract Considerations for additional provision on this subject. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT Add the following article: 9.4.3 Except as noted hereafter, the Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of the certified Contract Payments due until such time as the final acceptance of the work after correction of all deficiencies. Apart of such retained amount may be released earlier 'rf the resulting retainage will be not greater than the estimated value of the work that has not been completed. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 Insert after the word "payment" and prior to the word "Owner" the words "and the Owner has agreed,". 99144 PPC Supplementary Conditions 00800 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 ARTICLE 10 -PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.2 Add the following to the end of article 10.2.2: The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner and Architect for any damages incurred as a result of OSHA violations stemming from builder-caused conditions. ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1 Add the following to the end of article 11.1: Commercial Automobile Insurance Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 Commercial General Liability Insurance General aggregate $2,000,000 Products-Comp/Op Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal & Adv. Injury $1,000,000 Fire Damage $50,000 Medical Expense $5,000 All of the above policies to include at least the following coverages: (1) Premises/Operations Liability (2) Completed Operations and Product Liability (3) Blanket Contractual Endorsement (4) Personal InJury Liability Endorsement with Employee Exclusion removed. (5) Owners and Contractors Protective Liability (6) Broad Form Property Damage Liability (7) Broadening Endorsement, I.S.O. form or the equivalent (8) Coverage for "X"'C"and "U" Hazards (9) Waiver of subrogation endorsement All liability certificates of insurance shall specify that the insurance covers the hazards of underground explosion and collapse. ARTICLE 12 -UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 Add the words 'or Owner' after the words "Architect" or "Architect's." 12.1.2 Add the words "or Owner" after the words "Architect" or "Architect's." 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 Add the words "or Owner" after the words "Architect" or "Architect's." 12.2.2 Add the following to the end of article 12.2.2: The warranty period for electrically activated equipment shall start from the time equipment is used for Owner's benefit. 99144 PPC Supplementary Conditions 00800 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 5 ARTICLE 13 -MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Add the following to the end of article 13.5.1: The Owner will employ and pay for special inspections, testing and structural observation as required under Uniform Building Code Section 1701 and 1702, and as indicated in the Schedule at the end of Section 01400 Quality Control. ARTICLE 14 -TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1.3 Change: "or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certification for Payment within the time stated..." to "or because the Owner has not made payment on an Owner- approved Certification for Payment within the time stated...." 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE Add the following article: 14.2.1.5 Persisten8y fails to correct defective or poor quality work to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. 14.2.2 Delete the words "upon certification by the Archltect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action." 14.2.4 Change the last word in the first sentence from "Contractor" to "Owner." END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Summary of Work 01100 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01110 Work and Materials by Owner 1.02 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Contract shall include furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat utilities, transportation insurance, taxes, superintendence, wordination and miscellaneous services required for the construction and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated into the Work. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Project Description C. Coordination of Work D. Site Investigation E. Contractor Use Of Site And Premises F. Protection Requirements for New Construction G. Partial Owner Occupancy H. Protection Requirements for Existing Construction I. Replacement And Repair Of Any Structures 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The Project: 1. Prairie Park Cinema 2. Yelm, Washington B. Abbreviated Written Summary: Briefly and without force or effect upon the Contact Documents, the Work can be summarized as follows: 1. Approximately 25,000 s.f., 2 story mufti-theater cinema building. 2. UBC Type III construction, 1-hour fire rated and fully sprinkled. 3. UBC A3 occupancy ciass'fiication. 4. Sitework: surrounding hardscape, trash compactorlutility enclosure. Coordinate work with utility and site lighting by others. 5. Masonry walls, steel framing, building insulation, sheet metal flashings and trim, built-up roofing. 6. Steel doors and frames, aluminum entrance and storefront, gypsum wallboard and light gage framing, interior finishes. 7. Mechanical and electrical work. 99194 pPC Summary of Work 01100 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Z 1.03 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Coordinate Work of various trades to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. If Work of other trade is in any way interfering with the Contractor's Work, notify party sufficiently in advance to give reasonable time to make necessary adjustments. C. if the Contractors Work in any way interteres with the other party's Work, notify other party as soon as possible. The Contractor shall modify its schedule to accommodate the other partys work. D. Contractor recognizes that Owner is entitled, under the Contract Documents, to perform Work on site during the course of Contractor's performance, whether via Owner's forces, consultants, or separate contractors. 1.04 SITE INVESTIGATION ~ A. The Contractor acknowledges that the has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of tabor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather ,ground, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface at i l t m er a s o be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution of the Work and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work or the cost thereof under this contract. Any failure by the ConVactor to acquaint himself with all the available information concerning these conditions will not relieve him form responsibility for estimating properly the d~culty or cost of successfully performing the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Contractor shall limit his use of the premises for Work and for storage to allow for: 1. Work by other Contractors., 2. Owner Occupancy. 3. Public use. B. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by law ordinances, permits and Contract f Documents. C. Contractor shall confine construction operations including storage of materials and equipment to within the staging area established by the Owner. Use of Owner's property outside staging area will not be permitted except under unusual circumstances for limited periods of time as approved by Owner. Coordinate with work of subcontractors. D. Maintain clear access to project at all times for fire fighting equipment, and delivery of materials. ' E. Contractor shall make arrangements with city and county agencies for use of public property for construction purposes and pay all fees required for such use. F. Do not load structure, new or existing, with weight that will endanger structure. G. Contractor is responsible for necessary cleaning and repair of adjacent streets resulting from ' Contractor s operations. H. Allowable work hours are from - to weekdays and ,_ to Saturday, to - - - Sunday. - 1 06 P O , . R TECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION A. Exercise the utmost care to protect all existing utility lines from damage during the progress of the rk W . o , 99144 PPC Summary of Work 01100 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 B. Provide and erect before any work begins, and maintain during the progress of the Work, all necessary fences, warning signals, signs and lights. Extent of this work and details of constructbn shall be in accordance rnth the requirements of all state and local codes. 1.07 PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner reserves the right of partial occupancy or use of facilities, services, and utilities, prig to Substantial Completion, without implying completion w acceptance of any part of the Project. B. Prior to such oowpangr or use, procedures as outlined in Section 01700, 'Project Closeout' will be adhered to. C. The Contractor shall provide access to the building for the Owner's personnel plus provide the correct operation of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning, and electrical system, Provide for the correct operation of the elevator system for the Owner's use. E. The Contractor shall also permit the Owner fo place and install, or to have other Contractors place and install, as much equipment during the progress of the Work as is possible before the final acceptance of the various parts of the Work, and shall coordinate such placing and installation of the equipment, so that it does not in any way whatever interfere with the progress of the Work or any portion of it. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Work and Materials by Owner 01110 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 01210 Allowances 2 Section 01070 Unit Prices 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Owner furnished products. 1.03 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. The materials listed in the fallowing Owner Furnished Products Schedule are supplied by the Owner and installed by Owner or Contractor, as noted. The Contractor is responsible to receive, unload, and set in place Owner furnished items listed below, regardless of installation responsibilities. B. Contractor to provide Owner with additional miscellaneous installation time as indicated in Sections 01210 Allowances and 01070 Unit Prices. C. Contractor to provide an itemized material quantity list for each of the items marked Yes in the Take Off column in the following Owner Furnished Products Schedule. Submit the itemized list to the Owner two weeks after Bid Acceptance, and copy the archftect at that time. D. Owner Furnished Products Schedule Item Installed By Comments Take Off 1. Auditoriums Maskiny/Motors Owner Note a Screen CurtainslMotors Owner Note a Screens Owner Seats Owner Wall Curtains Owner Dimmers Contractor Note a Monaural Sound System Contractor Note a Projection Systems Contractor Note a Speaker/Sconce Mounting Brackets Contractor Note a Sconce Lighting Contractor Note a, c Yes Stereo Surround Sound System Contractor Note a Low Voltage Aisle Lighting and Stair Contractor Note a Yes Nosings 2. Concession Stand Butter Warmer Owner Cash Drawer Owner Cash Registers Owner Item Installed By Comments Take Off Counters and Cabinets Contractor 99144 PPC Work and Materials by Owner 01110 05/25/00 90% f~ermit Issue 2 Ice Machines Owner Note d Napkin Dispenser Owner Popcorn Popper Owner Sink Contractor Soft Drink Dispenser/Ice Bin Owner Soft Drink System Owner Straw Holder Owner 3. Lobbv Portable Ticket Stub Box Owner Floor Mounted Trash Receptacles Owner 4. Ticket Booth Cashier Stool Owner Ticket Machines Owner Electrical by Contractor Voice Ports Contractor 5. Flooring Carpet Contractor Yes Carpet Base Contractor Yes Floor Mats Contractor Yes 6. Sinae Neon Lighting Owner Note b Exterior Marquees Owner Note b Auditorium Marquees Owner Note b Ticket Booth Signage Owner Note b Concession Menu Boards Contractor Note b Yes Door Decals Contractor No Smoking Contractor One-Liner Sign Contractor Please Retain Ticket Stubs Contractor Poster Cases Contractor Field assembly Yes required and final electrical hookup by Contractor Exterior Poster Cases Contractor Note b 7. Notes a. All electrical wiring for projection, sound, sconce lights and curtain/masking motors furnished and installed by Contractor. Final connections and check-0ut by the Owner. b. Refer to project system drawings provided by Owner for material and layout specifications. Coordinate electrical drawings and contractor installation with Owner requirements. c. Contractor to provide 60 watt lamps for Audftorium wall sconces. d. The contractor installs the refrigerant lines, roof top condensers and electrical feed from the ice machine to the condenser. Upon the contractor's request, the concessions vendor can ship the condenser lines prior to the casework/equipment delivery. Upon delivery of the casework/equipment package, the concessions vendor will assemble the ice machines in place. The contractor is responsible for all electrical; and plumbing hookups, including drains. 99144 PPC WoMt and tNaterlals ty Owner 01110 05/25/00 90% Permit Iswe 3 The concessions vendor will arrange for a local service agency to perform final refrigerant line connections, installation inspection, start up and adjustment. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~^ r ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ 99144 PPC Contract Considerations 01290 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specficalion sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values. B. Application for Payment. C. Change procedures. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 -Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of ttus Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. D. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this Section, E. Include within each line Item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit four copies of each application on AIA Fonn G702 -Application and Certificate for Payment, B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: 10 days. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by Architects' supplemental instructions (Architect's form immediately following tftis section). B. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request (Architect's form immediately following this section) which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, achange in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate with 5 days. C. Construction Change Authorization -CCA': Architect may issue a directive, on Construction Change Authorization (Architect's form immediately folowing this section) signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. The CCA document will describe changes in the Work, and designate the method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor will promptly execute the changes in the work- D. The Contractor may propose a change in the work by submitting request for change to the Archdect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01630. 99144 PPC Contrail Considerations 01290 05/25/00 90% Permit Iswe 2 E Change Orders for a change In the contract sum will be based on one of the following methods: 1 Change Order Proposals: The Contractor may propose a change in the contract amount for changes in the work. Proposed changes will inGude itemized accounting and supporting information. A completed Change Order Proposal Summary Pricing Form (Architect's Form immediately following this section) will be included with each Change Order Proposal. 2 Pre-determined Unit Price: For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. 3 Stipulated Sum: Based on Proposal Request and Contractors fixed pace quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect and Owner. 4 Time and Material: Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents and approved by Owner. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Wank. F. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. G. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contrail. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 1 1 1 END OF SECTION , ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION Proiecr: Yelm Prairie Development A$I No.: 00 Prairie Park Cinema Project No.: 99144 paw. 00 To: ArcMtecr. WPH Architecture inc 513 NW 13th Ave. 300 Portland Oregon 97209 Conlroct Dole, Owner: b. mpJ b. meJ ^ ^ Owner ^ ^ Conrrocbr ^ ^ De~efop. ConsN. ^ ^ F~efd ^ ^ Architect ^ ^ FF&E ^ ^ Civil ^ ^ Concession ^ ^ $trvcturol ^ ^ $eoling ^ ^ Mechomcol ^ ^ Drapery ^ ^ ElecMCOI ^ ^ Signoge ^ ^ Sound ^ ^ File 99744 504 WPH The Work shop be carried out in accordanc e with the following suppiemenbl instruch'ons issued in accordance wish the Confrod Documents without change in Controcf Sum or Connoct Time. Prior fo proceeding m oaordance w ith t hese insln~chons, ivtdicoYe your acceptance of these instnxfions for minor change b the Work as consisrom with the Conlroct Documenh and re Nrn a copy ro the Architect. !!em: Reference: Description: 00.01 Issued Accepted 81': 9y: Archirec> Dore: Confroctor Dote: END OF ARCHRECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTION PROPOSAL REQUEST Protect: Yelm Prairie Development pRNo.: 00 Prairie Park Cinema Protect No.: 99144 Dore; 00 ro: Arch;rea: WPH Architecture inc 513 NW 13th Ave. 300 Portland Oregon 97209 Conhoct Dote: Owner b. n~ml IoF mat ^ ^ Owner ^ ^ Confrector ^ ^ D_welop. Consd. ^ ^ Field ^ ^ Mchirect ^ ^ FF&E ^ ^ G.+I ^ ^ Corxesr+on ^ ^ Sfrucfurol ^ ^ $eonng ^ ^ Mechonicol ^ ^ Drapery ^ ^ Elecfricol ^ ^ Signoge ^ ^ Sound ^ ^ Fiie 9cJ144 405 WPH Please su bmit an irernlzed quotation /or changes rn the Corxracr Sum antl/or Time incidental ;o pn~posed modifica@ons to Me Con6ac7 DOLUman15. THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER NOR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED HEREIN Item: Reference: Description 00.01 Issued Accepted ay: aY: Architect Dore: coon END OF PROPOS4L REQUEST ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~r ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION pnojecs; Yelm Praltie Development :r:A No.: 00 Prairie Park Cinema Proiecf No.: 99144 Dore: 00 To: a;r,.rKr: WPH Atchttecture inc 513 NW 13th Ave. 300 Portland Oregon 97209 Controu Dose. Owner: a, ... D D Owner <. ^ r.o+ D conlrocsor ^ D Develop. canssl, ^ ^ Fi.ld ^ ^ Architect ^ ^ FF6E ^ ^ Civil ^ ^ Concession ' ^ ^ Sinciural ^ ^ SeOb n9 ^ ^ Mechanical D ^ ~o~ry ^ ^ Elecsncol D D Sprroge ^ D Sound ^ D Fila 99144 505 WPH In order ro expedhe rM Work and ovoid or minimize debt's m the Work which mot' af fect Comroct Sum or Consroct Time, IFre Gannets Documents it act Time i t C an hwb y amended os described brsbw. Proceed with rhs Wnh prompdy. Submit on r . n firwl cosh for Work imohad and thongs orry, for i nclusion m a fubtequenr ClgnpC Order Ihm~ Rekroncs~ Deunonon_ ~0.~~ TM (allowing is bused on inbmrolion provided by the mntroctor Metfwd d pelerminirp Chorrpe in dre Connors Sum- (lump sum, uml prices, cos? Plus lee a gher; Chanpe in Connors $um o/ Change in Connatl ilme of. ^ fined ^ Fired ^ Es*imarod ^ Estimated ^ Maximum ^ Maximum fswsd AccePred er: et'. Architect Data: Conlrocfor ~' END OF CONSTiPUCiION CHANGE AUTHORI7ATION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL Project: Yelm Prairie Development COPNo.: 00 Prairie Park Cinema Project No.: 99144 ~~. 00 To: arch;fecl: WPH Architecture inc 513 NW 13th Ave. 300 Portland Oregon 97209 Confrocf Dote: Omar. Im mou M. mod ^ ^ Owner ^ ^ Conrmcror ^ ^ Develop- Consd. ^ ^ Field ^ ^ Architect ^ ^ FFBE ^ ^ Civd ^ ^ Concession ^ ^ $HOCfu~ol ^ ^ $eoh'ng ^ ^ Mechomcol ^ ^ Drapery ^ ^ Elecmcol ^ ^ $ignoge ^ ^ Sound ^ ^ File 99144 406 WPH Issued Accepted 6/ 6i' END OF CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 99144 PPC Project Coordination and Meetings 01310 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Preconstruction conference. C. Progress meetings. D. Preinstallation conferences. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. 8. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building uhlities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, duds, and conduk, as dosely as predicable; place runs parallel with Ime of buiding. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessiblity for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and dean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for final acceptance by Owner. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for corcection of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect will coordinate with the general contractor apre-construction conference after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Architect, Contractor and major subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Verify submission of executed bonds and insurance certlfkates to the owner. 2 Submit list of Sub-contractors, list of products. Schedule of Values, and progress sdtedule to the architect. 3. Verify curcent distribution of Contract Documents. (Addenda, accepted alternates) 99144 PPC Project Coordination and Meednys 01310 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue z 4. Project roles and responsibilities 5. Lines of communication 6. Procedures and processing of Project Status Reports, submittals, substitutions, Request For IMwmation, Architects Supplemental Instructions, Construction Change Auttwr®tion, Proposal Request, Change Order Proposals, Change Orders and Applications iw payment. 7. Special Conditions B. Contractor's Operations 9. Required Field Observations 10. Facilities and temporary controls 11. Testing. 12. Security and housekeeping procedures. 13. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 14. Requirements for start-up of equipment 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Contractor Progress Meeting: 1 The contractor shall conduct a progress meeting with all of the subcontractors and suppliers prior to the progress meetings with the Architect. The intent is to provide a coordination forum for construction issues that may be appligble to the progress meeting with the archtect. B Architect and Contractor Progress Meeting: 1 Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at scheduled monthly intervals. 2 Contractor to make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute the agenda as follows: a. Distribute a copy of the Progress Meeting Agenda to the architect 24 hours in advance of the scheduled Progress Meeting, for the Architect's review. InGude the RFI, COP and Submittal logs and product delivery concerns, old issues and new issues. b. Distribute copies at the Progress meetings to all participants. c. DisMbute copies of the revised Progress Meebng Agenda within two days of the Progress Meeting to the Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, job project manager, major subcontractors and suppliers, Architect, and consultants, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 4. Agenda: a Review minutes of previous meetings. b Review of Work progress. 1 99144 PPC Project Coordination and Meednys 01310 ' 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 c Feld observations, problems, and decisions. t d Identification of problems which impede planned progress. e Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. f Review of oN-site fabrication and delivery schedules. ' g Maintenance of progress schedule. h Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. ' i Planned progress during succeeding work period. j Coordination of projected progress. ' k Maintenance of quality and work standards. I Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. m Oth r b i l tin to W k e us ness re a g or . 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Conduct apre-installation conference at the site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. See the Schedule at the end of this section for a list of ' specified pre-+nstallation conferences. B Required attendance includes the installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and it's coordination or integration with other materials ' and installations that have preceded or will follow. C Coordinate pre-installation conferences to coindde with Progress Meetings. D. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination wdh related work. 1. Review the progress of the other construction actlvllies and preparations for particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including requirements for: ' a. Contract Documents D Opbons c. Related Change Orders d. Purchases e. DQINeneS t, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Quality conUd samples. ' g. Possible conflicts h. Compatibility problems i. Time Schedules j. WeatherLlmitations ' k. Manufacturers recommendabons I. Compatibility of materials m. Acceptability of substrates n Temporary facilities 99144 PPC project Coordination and Meetings 01310 05/25/00 90% Perntlt Issue 4 o. Space and access limitations p. Governing regulations q. Safety r. Inspection and testing requirements s. Required performance results t. Recording requirements u. Protection 2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, along with the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, promptly, InGuding the Owner and Architect. 3 Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Indiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 4. A schedule of Pre-Installation Conferences is included at the end of this section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain specfic requirements for Pre-Installaton Conference. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE OF PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Provide Pre-Installation Conferences as speed in the following sections. It is not the intent to identify all conferences that may be required: 04221 Concrete Masonry Units 07210 Building Insulation 07514 Buitt~p Asphalt Rooting 07810 Applied Fireproofing 08410 Storefronts 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09300 Tile Mechanical Electrical Stnictural END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Submittals 01330 05/25/00 90a/o Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.Ot RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submrttal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. 1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; reference pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and Specification Section number. Make reference to appropriate Specification Section Paragraph when applicable. B Number each submittal by Specfication Section number and sequential Rem number for identification. Retain numbering system throughout revisans with the addition of sequential letters for each revision to initial submittal. C. Submit items pertaining to only one Specification Section in each submittal. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialled certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent consWction Work, and coordinatpn of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contrail Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submission of related items. F. IdenCrfy variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be dethmental to successful performance of the completed Work G. Provide space for Contractor and ArchRect review stamps. H. Revise and resubmit submittals as noted, identify all changes made since previous submittal. I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply wNh provisions. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 14 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for Architect review. B. Revise and resubmR as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a computer generated or horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identfying first work day of each week. 99144 PPC Submittals 01330 05/25/00 90% Permitlssue 2 E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances. 7.05 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 30 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. unless specified otherwise in other Sections. B. For products specfed only by reference standards, glue manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency, and two opaque reproductions. Reproducible Vansparency will be returned to Contractor for reproduction and distribution. B. Show in detail, materials, dimensions, thicknesses, methods of assembly, attachments, relation fo adjoining Work, and other pertinent data information. In checking shop drawings, verify dimensions and field conditions, and check and coordinate shop drawings of any Secton or trade with requirements of other Sections or trades as related to Work of submittal, as required for proper and complete installation of Work, 1.07 PRODUCT DATA A Submit the number of copes which the Contractor requves, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Modify and supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project, and delete information not applicable to Work. C After review, distribute in accordance with ARide on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 -Contract Closeout. t.08 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate furxtional acrd aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfadng work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard wlors, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection, or as indicated in Individual specification Sections. C. Indude identification on each sample, with lull Project information. D. Submit the number or samples spedfied in individual specification Seciions; one of which wiU be retained by ArchUect. E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specHication Sections. 1.09 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual spec cation Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, Installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. 99144 PPC Submittals 01330 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 05/25/00 90% PermitISSUe 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, induding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specfication Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A Responsibilities B Quality Assurance and Control of Installation. C Submittals D Field Samples E Mock-up Requirements F Manufacturers' Field Services and Reports G Defered Submittals H Speciallnspections I Inspections and Testing J Structural Observation 1.3 REFERENCES A 1991 Uniform Building Code (UBC) Material, Testing and Installation Standards and the 1997 UBC where indicated in this section and/or on the drawings. B American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES A Contractor Responsibilities: 1 The Contractor shall provide, employ and pay for all inspections, tests and similar quality conhol services which are not Special Inspections under UBC Section 1701 and/or Structural Observation under UBC 1702. 2 The Contractor shall submit the qualifications of the Contractor's proposed Testing Agency for the Owner's review 14 days before the first required inspection occurs. Indude the Testing Agencys standard fee schedule and conditions and the laboratory fee schedule for services. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's proposed testing Agency without penalty. 3 The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all inspections, tests and similar quality control services. 4 The Contractor's responsibility includes the inspections and tests scheduled at the end of this section, and as specfied in individual sections, regardless of whether or not they are scheduled in this section. The inspections and tests Indude, but are not limited to, inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, local jurisdictions or agencies, plan approval authorities, and those which are made by a legally constituted authority. 5 The Contractor shall obtain all required deferred Submittals for submission as specked. 6 The Contractor shall cooperate with the owners selected testing laboratory and all others responsible for testing and inspecting the work. 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 7 Inspecting and testing performed exclusively for the Contractors convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. B Owner Responsibilities: 1 The Owner shall employ and pay for all Special Inspections required under UBC Section 1701 and shall employ the Architect and/or Engineer for Structural Observation under UBC 1702. 2 The Owner retains the right to initiate and pay for any inspections of the work for any reason. The Owner's inspector, or designated agent, shall have access to all portions of the site and work at all times without prior notice to the General Contractor. The Owner's inspector shall have no authority to direct the Contractor or request changes in the work except through the Architect. 3 Where no testing requirements are described, but the owner decides that the testing is required, the Owner may direct that such testing be preformed under current standards for testing. The Owner will pay for the owner initiated tests. C Architect or Engineer Responsibilities: 1 The Engineer shall provide structural observation of the work as required under UBC Section 1702. 2 The Architect, at the Owner's request, shall assist the Owner in obtaining a special inspection company. 3 The Architect and Engineer shall review the test and inspection report for the Owner. D Testing Agency Responsibilities: 1 The Testing Agency shall collect specimens and samples for testing, unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. 2 The Testing Agency shall deliver the specimens and samples to the testing laboratory. 3 The Testing Agency shall provide all equipment and personnel required for testing compliance. 4 The Testing Agency shall provide written reports and notifications as specified in this section. 5 Representatives of the Testing Agency shall have access to the work at all times. E Special Inspector Responsibilities: 1 As excerpted from UBC Section 106.3.5, 'The special inspector shall be employed by the owner, the engineer or architect of record, or an agent of the owner, but not the contractor or any person responsible for the work." 2 The Special Inspector shall collect specimens and samples for testing, unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. 3 The Special Inspector shall deliver the specimens and samples to the testing laboratory. 4 The Special Inspector shall provide all equipment and personnel required for testing compliance. 5 The Special Inspector shall provide written reports and notificatlons as specified in this sectlon. 6 Representatives of the Special Inspector shall have access to the work at all times. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, inGuding each step in sequence. ' l 99144 ity Control 01400 PPC Qua 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 C Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clamcation from ' Architect before proceeding. D Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specfied requirements indicate higher standards or more precise ' workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce vrorkmanship of specified quality. ' F Codes and Standards: Testing, when required, will be in accortlance with: 1 The most current version of the referenced American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and/or the Uniform Building Code (UBC) Material, Testing and Installation ' Standards. 2 The most current adopted Federal, State or local building codes and regulations. ' 1.6 SUBMITTALS A The Contractor shall submit a testing and inspection schedule to the architect. B Refer to the required submittals under 1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES. A, 2 in this Section. ' 1 7 A FIELD SAMPLES ecifi Install field sam les al the site a r ir individual s s Sections for review d b ti . p p . s equ e y ca on B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. ' C. Where field sample is specked in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect. ' 1.8 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A Assemble and erect specified items, with specified anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and ' G. finishes. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up has been accepted by Architect. ' g 1 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERV CES AND REPORTS . I A. When specified in individual specfication Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qual'fiied staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written insVuctions. t 1.10 DEFERED SUBMITTALS A Defered Submittals shall be considered to be those portions of work that are designed or engineered by vendors, suppliers, manufacturers and all work that involves bidder design. ' B The following list contains typical Deferred Submittals. Refer to the Structural drawings and the specifications in the Project Manual for Deferred Submittals. 1 Open Web Steel Joists and Girders rtairn 2 St f ont d C ll S t ore r an u ems va ys 3 Fire Protection System ' C Defered Submittals are regulated by 1997 UBC Section 106.3.4.2, excerpted as follows: 1 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 1 "Deferred submittals are defined as those portions of the design that are not submitted at the time of application and that are to be submitted to the building official within a specified period." "Deferral of any submittal items shall have prior approval of the building official. The architect or engineer of record shall list the deferred submittal documents for review by the building official." "Submittal documents for deferred submittal items shall be submitted to the architect or engineer of record who shall review them and forward them to the building official with a notation indicating that the deferred submittal documents have been reviewed and that they have been found to be in general conformance with the design of the building. The deferred submittal items shall not be installed until their design and submittal documents have been approved by the building official." 1.11 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A Special Inspections are regulated by UBC Section 1701. B. The Owner's Testing Agency will perform inspections, tests, and other services as required under UBC Section 1701. C. The Owner's Testing Agency will submit reports indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specked requirements shall be performed by the same Owners Testing Agency on instructions by the Architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum. E UBC SECTION 1701 1 The following subsection is excerpted from the 1997 Uniform Building Code: "1701.1 General. In addition to the inspections required by Section 108, the owner or the engineer or architect of record acting as the owners agent shall employ one or more special inspectors who shall provide inspections during construction on the types of work listed under Section 1701.5." "Exception: The building official may waive the requirement for the employment of a special inspector if the construction is of minor nature." "1701.2 Special Inspector. The special inspector shall be a qualified person who shall demonstrate competence, to the satisfaction of the building official, for inspection of the particular type of construction or operation requiring special inspection" "1701.3 Duties and Responsibilities of the Special Inspector. The special inspector shall observe the work assigned for conformance to the approved design drawings and specifications." "The special Inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the building official, the engineer or architect of record, and other designated persons. All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction, then, if uncorrected, to the proper design authority and to the building official." 'The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance to the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of this code.' "1701.4 Standards of Quality. The Standards listed below labeled a °UBC standard" are also listed in Chapter 35, Part II, and are part of this code. The other standards listed below are recognized standards. (See Sections 3503 and 3504.)" "1 Concrete." "ASTM C 94, Ready-mixed Concrete." 1 1 1 1 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 OS/ZS J00 90% Permit Issue 5 "2 Connections." "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts-Load and Resistance Factor Design, Research Council of Structural Connections, Section 170'1.5, Item 6." "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts-Allowable Suess Design, Research Council of Structural Connections, Section 1701.5, Item 6." "3 Spray-applied Fire-resistive Materials " 'UBC Standard 7-6. Thickness ahd Density Determination for Spray-applied Fire- resistive Materials:' "1701.5 Types of Work. Except as provided in Section 170'1.1, the types of work listed below shall be inspected by a special inspector." "1 Concrete. During the taking of test specimens and placing of reinforced concrete. See item 12 for shotcrete:' "Exceptions:" "1 Concrete for foundations conforming to minimum requirements of Table 18-f- C or for Group R, Division 3 or Group U, Division 1 Occupancies, provided the building official finds that a special hazard does not exist." "2 For foundation concrete, other than cast-in-place drilled piles or caissons, where the structural design is based on a fc no greater than 2,500 pounds per square inch (psi) (17.2 MPa)." "3 Nonstructural slabs on grade, including prestressed slabs on grade when effective prestress in concrete is less than 150 psi (1.03 MPa)." "4 Site work concrete fully supported on earth and concrete where no special hazard exists." "2 Bolts installed in concrete. Prior to and during the placement of concrete around bolts when stress increased permitted by Footnote 5 of Table 19-D or Section 1923 are utilized." "5 Structural welding." "5.1 General. During the welding of any member or connection that is designed to resist loads and forces required by the code:' "Exceptions:" "1 Welding done in a approved fabricator's shop in accordance with Section 1701.7." "2 The special inspector need not be continuously present during welding of the following items, provided the materials, qualifications of welding procedures and welders are verified prior to the start of work; periodic inspections are made of work in progress; and a visual inspection of all welds is made prior to completion or prior to shipment of shop welding." "2.1 Single- pass fillet welds not exceeding 5/16 inch (7.9mm) in size. "2.2 Floor and roof peck welding." "2.3 Welded studs when used for structural diaphragm or composite systems." "2.4 Welded sheet Steel for cold-formed steel framing members such as studs and joists." "2.5 Welding of stairs and railing systems." "5.3 Welding of reinforcing steel. During the welding of reinforcing steel" X144 FPC Quality Control 01400 05/25/00 90% Penntt Issue 6 "Exceptions: The special inspector need not be continuously present during the welding of ASTM A 706 reinforcing steel not larger than No. 5 bars used for embedments, provided the materials qualifications of welding procedures and welders are verged prior to the start of work in progress; and a visual inspection of all welds is made prior to completion os psios to shipment of shop welding" "7. Structural masonry." "7.1 For masonry, other than fully grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry, during preparation and taking of any required prisms or test specimens, placing of all masonry units, placement of reinforcement, inspection of grout space, immediately prior to Dosing of cleanouts, and during all grouting operations." "EXCEPTION: For ahollow-unit masonry where the Pm is no more than 1,500 psi {10.34 Mpa) for concrete units or 2,600 psi (17.93 Mpa) for clay units, special inspection may be performed as required for fully grouted open hollow-unit masonry specified in Item 7.2" "7.2 For fuly grouted open-end hollow-unit masonry during preparation and taking of any required prisms or test specimens, at the start of laying units, after the placement of reinforcing steel, grout space prior to each grouting operation, and during all grouting operations." "EXCEPTION: Special inspections as required in Items 7.1 and 7.2 need not be provided when design stresses have been adjusted as specified in Chapter 21 to permit non continuos inspection.." "10 Spray-applied fire-resistive materials. As required by UBC Standard 7-6" "13 Special grading, excavation and filling. During earth-work excavations, grading and filling operations inspection to satisfy requirements of Chapter 18 and Appendix Chapter 33.' "15 Special cases. work that in the opinion of the building official, involves unusual hazards or conditions' "1701.6 Continuous and Periodic Special Inspection" "1701.6.1 Continuous special inspection. Continuous special inspection means that the special inspector is on the site at all times observing the work requiring special inspections." "1701.6.2 Periodic special inspection. Some inspections may be made on a periodic basis and satisfy the requirements of continuous inspection, provided this periodic scheduled inspection is performed as outlined in the project plans and specifications and approved by the building official.' "1701.6.3Approved Fabricators. Special inspections required by this section and elsewhere in this code are not required where the work is done on the premises of a fabricator registered and approved by the building official to perform such work without special inspection. The certificate of registration shall be subject to revocation by the building official if it is found to that any work done pursuant to the approval is in violation of the code. The approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance that the work was performed in accordance with the approved plans and specifications to the building official and to the engineer or architect Of record. The approved fabricator's qualifications shall be contingent on compliance with the following:" "1 The fabricator has developed and submitted a detailed fabrication procedural manual reflecting key quality control procedures that will provide a basis for inspection control of workmanship and the fabricator plant." "2 Verification of the fabricator's quality control capabilities, plant and personnel as outlined in the fabrication procedural manual shall be by an approved inspection or quality control agency' 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue 7 "3 Periodic plant inspections shall be conducletl by an approved inspection or quality control agency to monitor the effectiveness of the quality control program." "4 It shall be the responsibility of the inspection or quality control agency to notify the approving authority in writing of any change to the procedural manual. Any fabricator approval may be revoked for just cause. Reapproval of the fabricator shall be contingent on compliance with quality control procedures during the past year.° 1.12 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A Inspections and testing shall be all inspections and tests that are not Special Inspections under UBC Section 1701. B The Contractor's Testing Agency will perform inspections, tests, and other services that are not Special Inspections under UBC 1701. C The Contractor's Testing Agency will submit reports indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D The Contractor shall notify the Architect 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring SBNICRS. E Retesting required because of nonconformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same Contractor's Testing Agency on instructions by the Architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Conractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the Contract Sum. 1.13 STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION A SVuctural Observation Is regulated by UBC Section 1702. B. The Engineer shall perform structural Observation when required by the UBC code. C UBC SECTION 1702 'A Structural observation shall be provided in Seismic Zone 3 or 4 when one of the following conditbns exists:" "1 The structure is defined in Table 16-K as Occupancy Category I,II or III." "2 The structure is required to comply with Section 403," "3 The sVucture is in Seismic Zone 4, Na as set forth in table 16-S is greater than one, and a lateral design is requtred for the entire structure,' "EXCEPTION: One- and two-story Group R. Division 3 and Group U Occupancies and one- and two-story Groups B, F, M, and S occupancies." "4 When so designated by the architect or engineer of record, or" "5 When such observation is specifically required by the building official.' "The owner shall employ the engineer or architect responsible for the sUuctural design, or another engineer or architect designated by the engineer or archtect respons~le for the structural design, to perform structural observation as defined in Section 220. Observed deficiencies shall be reported in writing to the owner's representative, special inspects, contractor and the building official. The structural observer shall submit to the building official a written statement that the site visits have been made and identifying any reported deficiencies that, to the best of the structural observers knowledge, have not been resolved." 9s>4a PPC Quailty contra 01400 05/25/00 90% Permlt Issue $ PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING AND INSPECTION A Establishing the Schedule 1 By advance discussion with the tesling laboratory selected, determine the time required for the labwratory to perform fts tests and inspections and issue each of its findings to the owner and the architect. 2 Provide required time for testing and inspection within fhe construction schedule B Revising the Schedule: When changes of construction schedule are necessary during construction, coordinate such changes of schedule wdh the testing laboratory as required. C. Adherence to Schedule: When the testing laboratory is ready to test according to the established schedule, but its prevented from testing or taking specimens due to incompleteness of the work, all extra charges for testing attributable to the delay may be back-charged to the Contractor and shall not be borne by the Owner. 3.2 ALTERNATIVE INSPECTION SCHEDULE A The Architect shall have the right to require alternative inspection procedure other than spec'rfied when, in the Architects judgement, other than inspections are required to demonstrate compliance with the Contract requirements. Costs of such alternative inspections will be home by the Owner i( products are found to comply, othervvise, costs shall be home by the Contractor. ~ 99T4~S~PC ~ A ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Q~ Cofi^'~I Ol~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 9 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 tMl21100 90% Issue Page 9 3.3 TESTING AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is intended as a guide to designate items to be tested and to define the area of responsibility for initiating and the follow- through and payment for such tests. Refer to the specific section in the Specifications for information regarding type and number of tests required. In all cases, where testing is to be paid for by the Owner, approval must be obtained from the Owner, through the Architect, prior to initiating the teslirtg, 1. Owner Paid Testing and Inspections ncrete 03300 • Three concrete test cylinders for every 150 or less cu ydS of GC Owner ete Flatwork each class of concrete placed each day. • One additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on the job site under same conditions. • One slump test for each set of test cylinders faken. In concrete See the Structural Drawings GC Owner onry 04221 See the Structural Drawings GC Owner ling 05120, 05300 See the Structural Drawings GC Owner 05300 See the Structural Drawings GC Owner ael welding See the Structural Drawings GC Owner `ing 07250 GC Owner 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 05/25/00 90a/o Permit Issue 10 9914A PPC Quality Controt 01400 04121100 90°>e tssue Page 10 2 Contractor Paid Testing and Inspections Description Specification Estimated Quantities o/ Testing and Inspections Achbn By: Paitl Dy.• Section _ Earthwork 02220 Per Specifications GC __ ___ GC Trenching 02225 Per Specifications GC GC Portland cement concrete 02520 Per Specifications GC GC paving Site water distribution 02667, Div 15 Per Spec~cations/ As per local jurisdiction GC GC Foundation drainage system 02712 Per Spec cations GC GC 3 Local Bu(Iding Code and Jurisdiction Testing and Inspections Description SpeGllcation Estimated Quantities of Testing and Inspections Action ey: Paid 6y: Section Stairs and railings 05500 As per UBC 1701.7 SUB SUB Building water service Div 15 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Building gas DIv 15 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Building sprinkler system Dlv 15 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Building sanitary line Div 15 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Building piping Div 15 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Fire protection system 15300 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Backflow preventor Div 15 As per local jurisdiction MC MC Building electrical Div 16 As per local jurisdiction EC EC Standby power system Div 16 As per local jurisdiction EC EC ~ i ~l ~ ~ ~ ii ~ ~ ~ r (r r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 9~PPC~ ~ ~1° ~"~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Qt~/~o1~ ~ a~ ~ r ~ ~^ 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 11 99144 PPC Quality Control 01400 04/21/00 90% Issue Page 11 4 Subcontractor andlor Manufacturer's Representative Testing and Inspections Hspnan roonng uraia Hs per manuracrurer requiremerns auomcr a~orrccr Heat recovery Div 15 As per manufacturer requirements MC MC Compressed Air Div 15 As per manufacturer requirements MC MC Ductwork testing and 15990 As required to meet performance standards MC MC balancing Voltage and Current Valu es 16120 As required to meet performance standards EC EC for Distribution and Equipment Feeders and Busducts Switchboard Insulation 16425 As per manufacturer requirements EC/REP EC/REP Resistance Test Grounding System Tests 16450 As per manufacturer requirements ECIREP ECIREP Ground Fault Protection 16450 As per manufacturer requirements EC/REP ECIREP System Tests Transformer Insulation 16460 As required to meet performance standards EC EC Resistance, Load, and Voltage Tests ABBREVIATIONS: EC =Electrical Contractor GC =General Contractor MC =Mechanical Contractor NIA =Not Applicable OWNER =Owner REP =Manufacturer's Representative SUB =Subcontractor END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ f ~ ~ f !~ ~ ~ A r r ~ ~ 99144 PPC Reference Standards 01420 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are r@quired by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. D. Maintain copy at jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the speck work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specked reference standards, and all applicable building codes, conflict, with the Contract Documents, the provisions of the most string~;nt will govern as determined by the Architect. Request clamcation from Architect before proceeding. F. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150, Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AtS1 Amerrcan Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 99144 PPC Reference Standards 01420 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1781 Tuliie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1776 Massachusetts Avenue, N. W. Sufte 500 Washington D. C. 20036 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison, White Lakes Professional Building Topeka, KS 66611 FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norvvood, MA 02062 FS Federal Specification, General Services Administration Spec cations and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) Washington Navy Yard. Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue Evanston, IL 60201 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 99144 PPC Reference Standards 01420 05/25/00 90% Pe rmtt Issue 3 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IMIAC Intemational Masonry Industry All-Weather Council Intemational Masonry Institute 815 15th Sheet, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 MIL Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Sheet Chicago, IL 60601 NCMA National Concrete MasonryAssocrairon P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 'L' Street, N. W . Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association 205 W. TouhyAvenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Otd Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 PS Product Standard US Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 SDI Steel Deck Institute PO Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 DeUoit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association i i 1 East Wacker arrve Chicago, IL 60601 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6960 S.W. Varns Road Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used Reference Standards 01420 4 ENO OF SECT4OP1 1 i r 99144 PPC Material References 01425 OS/25/OD 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drawing Tags PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAWING TAG SCHEDULE A The following Drawing Tags are representative of the material, component or system described within the spec cations. 8 Skips in the sequence are normal. C Ttte folfowrng schedule may not be inclusive of all Drawing Tags that are used on the project and may include items not used on the project. D Verffy each spec cation section for Drawing T ag usage. mark descripfron specification section AT-01 acoustical ceiling file 09511 CG-01 corner guard 10260 CM-01 Concrete Masonry 04221 CP-01 carpet 09680 CS-01 sealed concrete 03300 EM-01 entry mat 12692 GL-01 glazing 08810 GM-01 Glass Block 04221 GT-01 grout 09300 IFTF-Of sheet meta! flashing 07620 MP-01 metal panel 05730 MP-21 metal panel 05730 MR-01 metal roof 07610 MS-01 metal siding 07460 PL-01 plastic laminate 06410 PT-01 paint 09900 QT-01 quarry file 09300 RB-01 rubber base 09665 SN-01 stair nosing 09665 SP-01 solid polymer surfacing 06410 SV-01 sheet vinyl 09665 TL-01 ceramic file 09300 WC-01 wall coverings 09950 END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Temporary Fadlitles and Controls 01500 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES D. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location meter. E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. F. Provide adequate distribution equipment. wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 1000 sq ft of active work area. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 5 watUsq ft. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Progress Leaning and temporary buildings. 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source. B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed. C. Provide power outlets for construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required. D. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.05 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and wom or consumed parts. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.06 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 99144 PPC Temporary FaclliUes and Controls 01500 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1.07 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone and fax service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.08 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required for construction operations. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. 1.09 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. 1.10 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way. C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant Irfe. D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.11 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular gates with locks. 1.12 WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. 1.13 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual spec cation Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual spec cation Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. It traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 99144 PPC Temporary Facilitles and Controls 01500 05/23/00 90% Permit Zssue 3 F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.15 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.16 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean artd orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site. 1.17 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for project meetings, either in field office or at location within close proximity, with table and chairs to accommodate 10 persons. 1.18 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ i t~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ r 99144 PPC Project Identification and Signs 01580 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: 1 Cover Sheet in the Drawings for Firm names and addresses. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Identification Sign. B. Architect Ident~cation Sign C. Installation and maintenance. D. Removal. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design sign and structure to be self supporting. B. Sign painter: Experienced as a professional sign painter for minimum three years. C. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Show content, layout, lettering, colors, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of members. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: New, wood or metal, structurally adequate. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4-inch thick, standard large sizes to minimize joints. C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. D Lettering: Futura Medium, color white. E Lettering Height: 1. Project Name: 3 inch. 2. Owner's Name: 2 inch. 3. Architect and Contractor: 1-112 inch. 4. Consukrrrg Engineers: f inch. F Sign Dimension: 7'-6" x 4'-0". G Sign Height above Grade: 3 feet. H Sign Color: Juniper Berry No. SOt-6 as manufactured by Pittsburgh Paint Co., or approved. I Lettering: Centered, to read as follows: PPC Project Identification and Signs 01580 /00 90% Permit Issue 2 PROJECT NAME HERE OWNER NAME HERE ~LOgo} Architect: Cont2otor WPH ARCHITECTURE, inc FIRM NAME PoNand. Oregon Ciry, State Assodate Architect: Protect Management: Olympic Assoc. GGLO Seattle, wa. Wndscape Architect: Civil Engineer. FIRM NAME FIRM NAME Giry, state Ciry, State Mech./Elec. Erglneer. Shuctural Engineer: FIRM NAME FIRM NAME Giry, State Ciry, State PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to Proceed. B. Erect at designated location. G. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind loadings. D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely. E. Paint exposed surtaces of sign, supports, and framing. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Project IdentRcation Sign fumished and installed by Contractor as shown and specified in Section 01580, location designated by Architect. B. Architect Idenffiication Sign furnished by Architect, installed by Contractor, logtion designated by Architect. C. No other signs will be permitted, except those required bylaw. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. 3.04 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area. B Deliver the project signs to the Architect. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Material and Equipment 01600 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PAR71 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. This section specifies procedural requirements governing the contractor's selection of products, transportation, handling, storage and protection. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Products: ibfearts new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in swell-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. F, Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged antl are maintained under specified Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS Nat Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION r rr re ~r r r r . arr ^r a~ it ~r +re ~ r ~ . ~r SUBSTITUTIOfV REQUEST TO: PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description PROPOSED SUBSTlTUTlON; Attached data includes product description, spec cations, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of request including identification of applicable data portions. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents and proposeq substitution requires for proper installation. Undersigned certifies following items, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings. 2. Undersigned pays for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by proposed substitution. 3. Proposed substitution has no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts available locally or readily obtainable for proposed substitution. Undersigned further certifies function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to spec'rfied item. Undersigned agrees, if this page is reproduced, terms and conditions for substitutions found in Bidding Documents apply to this proposed substitution. Submitted by: Name (Printed or typed) Generai Contractor (if after award of Contract) Signature Firm Name City, State, Zip For use by A/E ~ Approved ~ Approved as noted ~ Not Approved ~ Received too late By Date Remarks The Construction Specifications Institute September 1997 Northwest Region ad~a++cem.m a co~an.oaan Ti~no~opr 99144 PPC Product Sut>stitutiott Procedures 01630 05/25/00 90% Permit Lswe 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made during the bidding period and after award of the contract. B The contractors Construction Schedule and the schedule of Submittals are included under Section 01330 -Submittals. C Standards: Refer to Section 01420 -Definitions and Standards for applicability of industry standards to products specified. D Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options are incuded under Section 0'1600 -Materials and Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor during the bidding process and after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1 Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 2 Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 3 The Contractor's determination of the compliance with the governing regulations and orders issued by the governing authorities. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Investigate proposed products and determine that they are equal or superior in all respects to products specified. B. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified. C. Coordinate installation of accepted substitutions into the Work, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. D. Waive all claims for additional costs related to substitutions that consequently become apparent. E. Provide engineering cert~cation of equivalence and adequacy of proposed structural component substitution. 1.05 CONDITIONS FOR SUBSTITUTION REVIEW A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1 Revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2 Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. ~. r .~ ~ ~. .. : .~. ire. .~ ~ r ~ ,^i . ~ w ~. w 99144 PPC Product Substltution Procedures 01630 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL t01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. A This section spedfies admimstrabve and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made during the bidding period and after award of the contract. B The contractors Construction Schedule and the schedule of Submittals are included under Section 01330 -Submittals. C Standards: Refer to Section 01420 -Definitions and Standards for applicablllty of industry standards to products specified. D Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options are included under Section 01600 -Materials and Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change or modAy the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. 6 Substihrtions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor during the bidding process and aRer award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions.' The following are not considered substitutions: 1 Revisons to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 2 Specified options of products and construction methods inducted in Contract Documents. 3 The Contractor's determination of the compliance with the governing regulatbns and orders issued by the governing authorities. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Investigate proposed products and determine that they are equal or superior in all respects to products specified. 8. Provide same guarantee for accepted substitutions as for products specified. C. Coordinate installation of accepted substitutions into the Work, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. D. Waive all claims for additional costs related to substitutions that consequently become apparent. E Provide engineenrg certification of equivalence and adequacy of proposed stnictural component substitution. 1.05 CONDITIONS FOR SUBSTITUTION REVIEW A. Conditions: The Contractors substitution request well be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditbns are satisfied, as determined by the Architect: otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record rroncompliance with these requirements. 1 Revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2 Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 99144 PPC Produd Substitution Procedures 01630 05/25/00 904/o Permit Fssue 2 3 The request is timely, fully documented and propedy submitted 4 The request is directly related to an "or equal' and/or "or approved" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 5 The specified product or mettwd of construction cannot be pronded within the Contrail Time. The request will not be considered A the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6 The specified product or method of consWdlon cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitutbn can be approved. 7 A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations of meat, after deducting any additional responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibNkies for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. B The specked product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9 The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 10 The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty. B The Contractor's submittal and Arch~tecfs acceptance of Shop Drawings. Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activibes not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does It constitute approval. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS NOT PERMITTED A. When indicated or implied on submitted shop drawings or product data without first requesting approval thereof in accordance with requirements of this Section. B. Where manufacturers, products, or systems listed in the Spec cations are not followed with "or equal", "or approved' or "Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630", it is intended that substitutions are not permitted. C. Acceptance will requve substantial revision of the Contrail Documents, except as allowed by Paragraph 1.04A above. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS DURING THE BIDDING PERIOD A. Submit two copies oT the following information with each request to the Architect: 1. CSI Substituton Request Form. 2 Identify the product, or the fabncaUOn or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance wdh the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a Product Oata, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b Samples, where applicable or requested. c A DETAILED, HIGHLIGHTED, MARKED and CROSS-REFERENCED comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance, visual effect, referenced standards and the criteria listed in the spermcations. 99144 PPC Product Substitution Procedures 01630 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 d Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. e A statement indicating the substitutions effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitubon. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any, in the Contract sum. g Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it wiff perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may be subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. Provide cert'rfication compliance by using the CSI Substitution Request Form. h Complete evidence including certified test results and supporting reports indicating compliance with referenced standards. i A statement from the Product Manufacturer stating that warrantee requirements specked are acceptable and that such a warrantee shall be issued upon successful completion of the project. B. All substitution requests shall be received in the Architect's office no less than f0 working days before Bid Date. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS REQUESTED AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT Substitutions will normally not be considered after the date of Contract, except when required, due to unforeseen circumstances. Within a period of 30 days after date of Contract, the Owner may, at his option, consider formal written requests for substitution of products in place of those specified, when submitted in accordance with the requirements stipulated herein. To receive consideration, orre or more of the following conditions must be documented in any such request. 1. The substitution is required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations. Provide written tlocumentation. 2. The substitution is required due to unavailability of a specked product, through no fault of the Contractor. Provide written documentation from the manufacturer, supplier, etc. 3. The substitution is required because subsequent information disclosed the inability of the specked product to perform properly or to fit in the designated space. 4. The substitution is required because it has become clearly evident, in the judgment of the Owner, that a substitute would be substantially in the best Interest of the Owner in terms of cost, time, Or other considerations. 1.09 ARCHITECTS ACTION: A Upon receiving the request for substitution, the Architect do one of the following: 1 If there is no response from the Architect, the contractor shall proceed with the specfed item as outlined in Section 01330 -Submittals. 2 If the Contractors substitution is received too late, as indicated on the Substitution Request form, the contractor shall proceed with the specified item as outlined in Section 01330 - Submiftafs. 3 If the Architects reply is negative, as indicated on the Substitution Request form, the contractor shall proceed with the specified item as outlined in Section 01330 -Submittals. 4 If the Architects reply is affirmative, as indicated on the Substitution Request form, the Architect will document the affirmative action by Addendum during the Bid Process, and by either a CCA or ASI after the award of the Contract. 99144 PPC Product Substitution Procedures 01630 05/25/00 90% Permit Iswe 4 PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Startlng of Systems 01655 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specfication Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: 1 Individual Product Spec~cadon Sections: 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specked electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. When specified in individual specrfication Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. G. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrete start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION a~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ r ~ ~. ~ r ~. ~ ~ ~r ~r ~ a~ ~ 99144 PPC Contrail Closeout 01700 05/25/00 9Q% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specrication Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Extra materials, spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Notify Architect when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. Accompany Architect on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's notice of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with Architect's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Cert~cates of Substantial Completion and for access to Owner occupied areas. C- Notfy Architect when Work is considered finally complete. Accompany Archtect on preliminary final inspection. D. Comply with Architect's instructions for completion of items of Work determined by the Architect's final inspection. E. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and chat Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Rrchitect's inspection. F. Provide submittals to Owner that are required by governing or other authorities. G. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.04 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean lantlscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 94144 PPC Contrdd Closeout 01700 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ' A Maintain on site, one record copy of: 1. Contract Drawings. 2 Spec cations. 3 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Keep in good order the above three items, marked currently to record all changes made during construction, incuding Addenda, Change Orders, CCA's, ASI's, Modifications to the Contract and all as-built conditions (Architectural, utility, mechanical, electrical, plumbing). B Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. , C Protect Record drawings from damage, reinforce sheet edges, etc. D Record information concurrent with Construction progress. E The Architect will periodically inspect these record drawings, and there proper maintenance shall be condition to approval of periodic payments and final payment. F Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: t . Manufacturer's name and product model and number. , 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. G. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: t. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. , 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, , referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. , 5 Details not in original Contract Drawings. H. Delete ArchitecVEnginees title block and saa4 from alt documents. I. Submit documents to Architect for approval prior to final Application for Payment. , 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit one (1) set prior of Operation and Maintenance data to be used during the demonstration of the starting of systems as specrfied in Section 01655 Starting of Systems. Bind in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three ring binders with durable plastic covers B. Submit Four (4) sets of the full Operation and Maintenance Manual within 4 weeks of the final completion date or the actual opening date of the facility, whichever comes first. bind in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three ring binders with durable plastic covers. C. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL', title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. p. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. E. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on white paper. , 99144 PPC Contract Closeout 01700 ' 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 F. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer, Con tractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. G. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. Identify fhe following: 1. Significant design criteria. ' 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. ' 4. 5 Operating instructions. i i t f t . enance instruct pmen Main ons or equ and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and ' materials and special precautions idenfrfying detrimental agents. H. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1 1. 2 Shop drawings and product data. Ai l d b rt . ance repo r an water a s. 3. Cert~cates. ' 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.06 A. EXTRA MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. ' B. Deliver to Owner's Representative: obtain receipt prior to final payment. C. Store extra material on site where directed at completion of work. ' D. Clearly label each material with color, type, room locations used, in addition to the manufacturer's label. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT U SED PART 3 EX TION ECU ' 3.01 SCHEDULE OF OPERATIONS AND MAINTENCE MANUAL MATERIALS A. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide warranties and bonds on products and installations as specified in the following sections, and as ' specified in sections not expressly listed here; 03300 Concrete 08710 Door Hardware 09300 Tile 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09665 Resilient Sheet Flooring 09680 Carpet 09860 Anti-Graffiti Coatings 09900 Paint 09950 Wall Coverings 99144 PPC Contract Gioseout 01700 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 10522 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets. , 15300 Fire Protection 15400 Plumbing 16000 Electrical 3.02 SCHEDULE OF EXTRA tv1ATERIALS A. Assemble extra materials from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers as specified in the , following sections, and in other sections not expressly listed below: 09300 Tile , 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09665 Resilient Sheet Flooring 09860 Anti-Graffiti Coatings ' 09680 Carpet 09900 Paint 09950 Wall Covering , 15300 Fire Protection 15500 Heating, Venting and Air Conditioning 16400 Service and Distribution ' END OF SECTION , 99144 PPC Cutting and Patching 01730 05/25/00 90% Permlt Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.Ot RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Spec cation Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: 1 Individual Product Specrfication Sections: a Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section b Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those Sections c Limitations on cutting structural members 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work. 7.03 SUBMITTALS A, Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. B. Include in request: 1. Identification of Project. 2. Location and description of affected work. 3. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used. 5. Affematives to cutting and patching. 6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor. 7. Written permission of affected separate contractor. 8. Date and time work will be executed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primary Products: Those required for original installation. B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution under provisions of Section 01630. 99144 ppC Cutting and Patching 01730 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Z PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, incuding elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work. C. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary supports to ensure structural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage. B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work. C. Maintain excavations free of water. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete work. B. Fit products together, to integrate with other work. C. Uncover work to install ill-timed work. D. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work. E. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work. 3.04 PERFORMANCE A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work. B. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. C• Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. p. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. E. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated or fire resistant material, to full thickness of the penetrated element. F. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Warranties and Bonds 01765 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the ConVact, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warcanties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 -Project Closeout. 3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Schedule: A "Schedule of Warcanties and Bonds" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule of Warranties and Bonds contain specific requirements for warranties for the work and products and installations that are specfed to be warranted. C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disGaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor from the warcanty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve the suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to counter sign special warranties with the Contractor, 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warcanties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the ConVact Documents. either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. 1.04 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Warranties must be Vansferable to subsequent building owner without penalty in time or coverage. B. Related Damages and Loses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. C. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. D. For items of Work delayed beynrtd date of Substantial Comptetrorr, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the work through the portion of it's anticipated useful service life. 99144 PPC Warranties and Bonds 01785 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 F. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Cnvner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to 4imft selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. H. The owner reserves the right to refuse to accept WorK for the project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such work or part of the work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date cert'fiied for Substantial Completion and prior to the release of retainage. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the Work. B. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and ident~cation, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for approval prior to the final execution. D. Refer to individual Sections of Division - 2 though - 16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. E. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based an the tab4e of costitents of She Project Manual. Refer to Section 01700 Contract Closeout for additional information on formatting the warranties and bonds into the Operation And Maintenance Manual. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used 99144 PPC Warranties and Bonds 01785 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 3.01 SCHEDULE OF WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Provide warranties and bonds on products and installations as specified in the following sections, and as apecified in sections nol expressly listed here: 07810 Applied Fireproofing 08410 Storefronts / Curtainwalls 08710 Door Hardware 00610 Glaang 09900 Paint 15300 Fire Protection 15400 Plumbing 16000 Electrical END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ 99144 PPC Earthwork 02200 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and genesat provisions of she Conlrac1, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Spec cation sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02110 -Site Clearing. 2. Section 02520 -Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 3. Section 03300 -Concrete. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Excavation for building foundations and slabs-on-grade. B. Cutting, grading, and rough contouring of planting areas. C. Building perimeter backfilling. D. Site filling and backfilling. E. Consolidation and compaction. F. Vapor barrier under interior slabs-on-grade. G. Aggregate base for asphaltic concrete paving. 4i. Aggregate base for Portland cement concrete paving. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C136 -Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ASTM 01557 -Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 fUlbflft3(2700 kN-m/m3))' C. ASTM D 2922 -Test Methods for Moisture-Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depthj 1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Type A -Engineered fill as described in Geotechnical Report, Section 5.3. B. Type B -Not used. C. Type C -Sand: Coarse River Sand: Graded in accordance with ASTM C136, free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble material or organic matter. D. Type D -Topsoil: Imported or approved on-site natural, fertile, friable, sandy loam with at least 10 percent humus; free of rock, Gay subsoil, clods, lumps, plants, roots, sticks, weeds, seeds and other deleterious material. 99144 PPC Earthwork 02200 05/25(00 90% Permit Issue 2 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric (Fitter Fabric): "Mlrafi 500-X", or approved. B Vapor Barrier Under Slab: "Tu-Tuf 4", or "Rufco 400SS6", or approved. C. Irrigation Sleeves: PVC pipe, Schedule 40; sizes as indicated. D. Sheet Membrane Waterproofing: "CCW-701" by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing or approved equal. E. Geotextile Drainage Sheet: "Miradrain 2000" by Miradri, °Sure-Drain-HD" by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofng or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. D. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. E. Protect plant life and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. F. Protect bench marks and fences from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. G. Install protection for existing storm drainage system to prevent silt laden water from entering the system. Provide in accordance with requirements of the local County that the project is located in, and as shown. 3.02 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped or re-graded. B. Stockpile in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Protect from erosion. Remove excess topsoil not being reused, from site. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Untlerpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including utilities and pipe chases. B. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building fountlations, slabs-on-grade, planting areas, and construction operations. C. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundation. D. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. E. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter. F. Remove lumped subsoil. Remove boulders larger than 1/3 cu yd using air-operated hammer when necessary. G. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until noted to resume work. H. Probe and proof-roll undisturbed native soils in excavations under stabs and building structures wkh a rubber-tired vehicle, or other acceptable method, to reveal any soft or weak unsuitable areas as determined by the Geotechnical Engineer. Scarify and recompact, at the direction of the Geotechnical Engineer, or excavate unsuitable areas and fill with new material compacted to requirements of this section. 99144 PPC Eattttwork 0220C ' 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue ~ I. Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost to Corner. J Correct areas over-excavated by error as directed by Architect. K. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site, and remove from site excess material not being reused. ' 304 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. B. Place irrigation sleeves where shown on Drawings prior to placement of fills. Extend sleeve 12 inches minimum past edge of paving with a minimum depth of 1&inches and maximum depth from finch grade of 24-inches. Stake ends to mark locations of sleeves. C. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Place geotextile fabric as scheduled, as shown, or as recommended by Geotechnical Engineer. ' E. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers as scheduled. F. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage utilities in trenches. ' G. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. H. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. ' I. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet, unless noted otherwise. J. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. K. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.05 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT FOR ASPHALTIC AND PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING A. Place coarse aggregate to the thicknesses indicated in the drawings and in not more than 6 inch ' layers and compact to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557 B. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. C. Add small quanities of fine aggregrate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. D. Use mechanical vibrating tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B Tests and analysis of fdl material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D-1557. C Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D2922. D If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. E Frequency of Tests: 1 Subgrade Material - A minimum of one test for every 500 CY of placed material or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. 2 Aggregate Materials -one test for every 2000 square yards of compacted sub base, or base course. F. Proof rdl compacted fill surfaces under slabs-an-grade and paving. 99144 PPC Earthwork 02200 05/25/00 90°h Pernik Issue 4 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect excavatbns by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavalbn. B. Protect sRe surfaces with granular working pads for operation of earthwork and other construction equipment during wet months of the year. C. Protect bottom of pavement and slab~on-grade exgvations, and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from surface water acwmulation and freeang. 0. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. FII Under Interior Slabs: 1. Type A -See Geotechnical Report, Section 5.3.2, for compaction criteria. 2. Cover Type A crushed rock fill with vapor barrier and a 2 inch course of Type C sand. B. Landscape Areas: Type D fill, 12 Inches thick, compacted to a density of not less than ti5 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D-1557. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02520 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 02200 -Earthwork: Compacted sub-base and backfill. 2 Section 03300 -Concrete 3 Section 07900 -Sealants: Sealant for joints 1.02 StlMfofARY A Concrete sidewalks, pavement, curbs, and steps. 1. Concrete hardscapes and auditorium exit doors. 2. Trash compactor pad. 3. Transformer pad. B. Supply adjacent to lobby only. Surrounding sidewalk and hardscape under separate contract. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADA, Americans with Disabilities Act -Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. ACf 304 -Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Trartsportirtg and P~acrng Concrete. D. ASTM 01751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. E. ASTM 01752 -Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers far Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. F. ASTM C94 -Ready Mix Concrete. G. ASTM C150 -Portland Cement. H. ASTM C260 -Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. I. ASTM C309 -Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. J. ASTM 02103 -Polyethylene Film and Sheeting 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301, requirements of Section 03300, and local and State Codes. B. Conform to applicable standards for paving work on public property. C. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet Or frozen. 99144 PPC Portland Cemerrt Concrete Paving 02520 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: As specified in Section 03300. 1. Curbs: Steel form material, profiled to suit conditions. B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751 type, or resin impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D1752. Provide precut pieces with a maximum thickness 1/2 inch by a nominal length of 10 feet and a nominal width 4 inches. "Flexcell" as manufactured by Celotex Corporation, or accepted equal. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel and Wire Fabric: 6 x 6, 1.9 x 1.9 welded flat wire mesh and type of deformed steel bars as specified in Section 03300 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: ASTM C150 (6 sack), Type 1A Plain gray cement, ready-mixed type, mixed in accordance with ACI 304 and delivered in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Compressive Strength: 3500 psl at 28 days, or as required by code. C. Aggregate: 3/4 inch; 3/8 maximum for extruded curbs. D. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. E. Ais Entrainment: ASTM C2ti0; 5 percent minimum air content, 4 inch maximum slump. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1. B. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 4 mil thick. C. Water: Potable and not detrimental to concrete. D. Water Reducing Admixture: 2 percent Pozzolan (322N) water reducer. E. Curb Adhesive: High modulus epoxy adhesive, specfically designed for purpose. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted base is acceptable and ready to support paving, Curbs, and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. 3.03 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in posftion, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 99144 PPC Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02520 OSJ25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 3.04 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement as indicated in Section 03300. 3.OS PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete as specified in Section 03300. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.06 JOINTS A. Place expansion joints as noted in drawings. Align sidewalk joints. Score construction joints at 5 foot intervals, or as otherwise shown. B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. 3.07 F1N)SH1NG A. Sidewalk Paving: Fine bristled stiff broom, alternate directions 0 ea square. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement and curbs from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian or vehicular traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after fihishing, or until 75 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. END OF SECTION ~ ^i^~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 99144 PPC Concrete 03300 ' 05/25/00 90% Permit issue 1 PART1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, shoring, bracing, reinforcing, mix design, anchorage, placement procedures and finishes. B. Slabon-grade C. Fill for steel decks ' D. Equipment pads and bases E. Fill for steel pan stars 1 t.02 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Secion 01700 -Contract Closeout B. Section 02200 -Earthwork: Fill, compacted aggregate base, and vapor barrier under slabs. ' C Section 02520 -Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Materials specified under this Section for exterior concrete sidewalks, curbs, and steps. D. Section 05510 -Metal Stairs: Concrete fill for treads provided under Work of this Section. ' E. Section 09300 -Tile: Floor fmish affecting of Work of this Section in finishing and curing of floors. F. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Floor finish affecting of Work of this Section in finishing and ' curing of Floors. G. Sector 09680 -Carpet: Floor finish affecting of Work of this Section in finishing and curing of floors. H. Structural Drawings -Notes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI301 -Structural Concrete for Buadings. B. ACI 302 -Guide for Concrete Floor and Sfab Construction. t C. ACI 304 -Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 305R -Hot Weather Concreting. ' E. ACI 306R -Cab Weather Concreting. F. ACI347 -Recommended Practice for Concrete Fonnwork. G. ASTM A185 -Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Reinforcement. H. ASTM A307 -Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. I. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ' J. ASTM A706 -Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. K. ASTM C31 -Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. L ASTM C33 -Concrete Aggregates. M. ASTM C39 -Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. N. ASTM C94 -Ready-Mixed Concrete. ' O. ASTM C143 - Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 99144 PPC Cona+ete 03300 os/zs/oo 90~ Permit Iswe 2 P. ASTM C150 -Portland Cement. Q. ASTM C173 -Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. R. ASTM C2fi0 -Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. S. ASTM 0494 -Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete. T. ASTM C618 -Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Poaolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture In Portland Cement Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories, and admixtures. Provide data on concrete hardner, and sealer compatibiliq/s and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate reinforcement bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. D. Manufacturer's Installation InsWCtions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. E. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. F. Concrete Mix Designs: Submft three copies of qual~ed laboratory testing agency approved mix designs for each type of mix specified. Clearly label all mix designs as to proposed area of usage. G. Submit Qualification Data for firms or persons spepfred in the 'Quality Assurance' section for the concrete Floor hardner/sealer coating application. H Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submd under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALfTY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 302, and Chapter 19 of current Un'rfonn Building Code. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Acgwre cement and aggregate from same source for all work. D. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. E. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. G General Contractor has responsibility for providing a concrete floor meetlng industry standards far installation of flooring. 1. Test and submit resuRs of calcium chloride tests conducted on concrete floors stabs for moisture as required under provisions of Section 09650 and Section 09680, to determine that concrete floor slabs are acceptable for installation of resilient and carpet floor finish. H Installer Qualifications: Affirm that has at least three years experience in the application of the concrete floor hardner/sealer coating, and that is factory authorized by the manufacturer. 1 Employ an independent testing agency acceptable to Owner to design concrete mixes and to perform material evaluation tests. Provide 7 and 28 day cylinder tests. Comply with ASTM C31, C39, C143 and C173. 99144 PPC Concrete 03300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL AND FIELD TESTING A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with the UBC 1905.6.1, ACI 301 and as indicated in this Sedion. C. Submit proposed mix design of each doss of oorxrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with spedfied requirements. E. Frequency of Testing: 1 'Samples for sVength tests of each doss of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, or not less than once far each 150 cubic yards of concrete, or not less than once for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls." 2 'On any given project, if the total volume of concrete is such that the frequency of testing required b~ Item 1 above 'Would provide less than five strength tests for a given Gass of concrete, tests shall t>e made from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch 'rf fewer than five batches are used. 3 When total quantity of a given class concrete is less than 50 cubic yards, strength tests are not required when evidence of satisfactory sVength is submitted to and approved by the building offidal." 4 "A sVength test shall t>e the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of condete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of Pc' 5 One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on Job site under same conditions as concrete rt represents. 6 One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken- 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01400. B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Coordinate reinforcement with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. 1.09 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENCE MANUAL A. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At the discretion of the ConUactor. B. Form Ties: Removable or snap-oN type, metal, adjustable length, cone type, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1-114 Inch in concrete surface. C. Form Release Agent: Chemical release agent which will not stain concrete, or impax natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork In place while placing concrete. 99144 PPC Cortcrebe 03300 05/25/00 90% t~erntft Issue 4 2.02 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, plain finish. B. ReiMorcing Steel, Weldable: ASTM A706. 60 ksi yield grade: deformed low-alloy steel !rats; plain finish. C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric (W W F): 6 x 6 - W 1.4 x W 1.4 ASTM A185 Plain Type; in flat sheets. D. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. E. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions irrduding load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. F. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces Plastic coated steel; size and shape as required. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, Normal and Type 1A -Air-Entraining, Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Use 1 t/2" aggregate for all slabs on grade. Do not use 314" aggregate for slabs. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. E. Chemrcal: ASTM 0494, Type F -Water Reducing, Type C -Accelerating- 'Potytreed' or approved at 6 oz per 100 Ib. of cement. F. Fly Ash: ASTM 0618, Type F or C. G. Drilled Anchor Botts: Wedge type for anchorage to concrete. Threaded rod portion of anchor to conform to ASTM A307 or greater capacity. "Trubatt Wedge Anchor" by ITW RamseflRed Head, 'Kwik-Bolt II' by Hilo, Inc., 'Power-Stud- by Poers Rawl, or approved. H. Bonding Agent: latex emulsion. 1. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2200 psi in 48 hours and 5000 psi in 28 days. J Vapor Barrier Under Slabs: As specified in Section 02200. K. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel formed to tongue and groove profile. L. Sealant and Primer: As specked in SeUion 07900. M Waterstops: Dumbbell shaped, rubber or PVC. N. Non-Slip Finish: Aluminum oxide grit. O Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, for exterior exposed concrete, foundations exposed to freeze-thaw, and tilt-up wall panels P Accelerating Admixture: Pozzotec 20 (PT20). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.04 COMPOUNDS -HARDENER AND SEALERS A. CS-Ot Liquid Hardener, Sealer, and Dustproofer: 1 'Seaihard' by L8M ConsWcbon Chemicals, Inc 2 'Sonnebom 30' , by Sonnebom 3 Or approved. 99144 PPC Corwete 03300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue S 2.05 COLOR HARDENER A. Bomanite Color Hardener, Regular Grade. 1. CC-01: 8-16, Brick Red 2. CC-02: B-9, Harvest Amber 3. CC-03: B-14, Franciscan Red 2.06 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordarcee with ACI 304. Deliver oorxxete in accardarxe with ASTM C94. B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301. C. Concrete Strength: Typical 3000 psi at 28 day days, plus increase depending on plant standard deviation as specified in ACI 318: 3500 psi at 28 day days for interior slabs on grade. 1. Cement Content per Yard: Refer to schedule in Drawings. 2. Maximum Water to Cement Ratio: Do not exceed water-cement ratio of 0.48 (48 pounds of water per 100 pounds of cement) for all concrete slabs. 3. Slump: Rater to schedule in Drawings. 4. Air entrainment: Exterior slabs in accordance with ACI; Add 4 - 6 percent air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix. 5. Admixture: Water reducing agent, and reduce water by 10 percent minimum for all slabs; Pozzolith, or approved. D. Concrete Fill for Steel Pan Type Stabs: Typical concrete mixture with 2 x 2 x 14 inch gauge galvanized wire reinforcement. E. Use accelera~g admixtures in cold weather oMy when approved by Architect. Use of admixtures v~nll not relax cold weather placement requirements. F. Use of calcium chloride is not acceptable, except up to 1-1/2 percent calcium chloride is allowed during cold weather, subject to approval by Architect. There will be no exceptions for use of calcium chloride in concrete placed on metal deck. G. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK ERECTION A. Examination: Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimertsgns agree with Drawings. B. Formwork Erection: 1. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 347. 2. Provide bradng to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. 3. Arange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete durng stripping. 4. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. 5. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated. C. Application, Form Release Agent: 1. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 99144 PPC Concrete 03300 05/25/00 90a/o Permit 2ssue 6 2. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. 3. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes which are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with dean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Inserts, Embedded Parts, and Openings: 1. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete. 2. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. 3. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other Inserts. 4. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure terns are not disturbed during concrete pk~cement. 5. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where regwred to facilitate deaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. 6. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. E. Form Clearnng. t . Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds. 2. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 3. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through dean-out ports. F Formwork Tderences: t:onsWd formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 347. G. Field Quality Control: 1. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 2. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for corraete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. H. Form Removal: 1. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. 2. Loosen forms grefuly. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or cods against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. 3. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. 3.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Placement: f. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. 2. Do not displace or damage vapor barier. 3. Reinforcement shall not be welded or heated in the field. 4. Accommodate placement of formed openings. 5. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Field Quality Control: Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 99144 PPC Concrete 03300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 7 3,03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Notify Architect minimum 24 tours pear to commencement of operations. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers and joint devices are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Install Joint fillers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturers instructions. F. Install construction Jomt device in coordination with floc slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. G. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor finish. H. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. I. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, contrd, and construction joints. J. Do not interrupt successive placemenC do not permit cold joints to occur. K. Contraction Joints: Tool or Saw cut as soon as possible after placing. Using 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. L Screed Moors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed, or to receive stain, resilient flooring, carpet, or other thin finish material. B. Fine broom finish surfaces to receive mortar setting beds or cementitious flooring materials. C. Provide non-slip finish for interior exposed concrete stairs and ramps. After trowel finishing, uniformly trowel 25 IbsH00 SF of damp non-slip aggregrete into surface. Cure, then rub lightly to expose aggregate. E. Apply hardener in accordance with manufacturers instructions for exposed interior concrete floors. F. In areas with floor drains, maintain Floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 118 inch per foot nominal. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHES A Stained: 1. See Section 03350 B Sealed 1. Steel trowel finish for surfaces to be exposed to view. 3.06 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT A. Apply hardener and sealer in accordance with manufacturers instructions for exposed interior concrete Doors, and Door surfaces to receive carpet and resilient flooring materials. Verify sealer is compatible wdh carpet and resilient floor adhesives poor to application. B Exclude any curing agents on floors to receive ceramic floor tile. 99144 PPC Concrete 03300 05/25/00 90% Perrnlt Issue t3 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than seven days. C. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least seven days in accordance with ACI 301. Avoid rapid drying at end of final wring period. D. Curing Methods: Perforn curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist wring, by moisture-retaining cover wring, and by combinations thereof. E. Moisture Curing: 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2 Continuous water fog spray. 3. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. F. Moisture-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for wring concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches amd sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during wring period using cover material and waterproof tape. G. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and verbs, as follows: t. Apply specified wring and sealing compound to concrete slabs within 2 hours after final finishing operations are complete- Apply uniformly in continuous operatbn by power-spray Or roller in accordance with manufacturers directions. Recoat areas subjected to heary rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directy to concrete, Ipuld floor hardener, waterproofing, dampprooflng, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tie, glue-down carpet. painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. H. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full wring period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods speed above, as applicable. I. Curing Uniform Surfaces: 1. Cure uniformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing method. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.09 PATCHING A. Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 99144 PPC CoinCrete 03300 05/25/00 90% Per~nlt Issue 9 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A, Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 3.11 FIELD TESTING A Field inspection and testing wil t>e performed in accordance with the UBC 1905.6.1, ACI 301 and as indicated in Part 1 of this Section, and as specified in Section 01400, and as indicated on the structural drawings. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC 03365 Surface Applied Concrete Color OS/25/DD 9D% Aermit Issue page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface applied chemical stain colored concrete finishes. B. Top coat sealer. 1.02 RELATED SEC7fONS: 1. Section 03300 Concrete 2. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Colored sealants for joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C979 -Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturer's instructions for: 1. Color additives. 2. Release andlor curing compountls. B. Samples: 1. Samples for Color Verification: a. Submit sample chip[s] of specified color[s] indicating color additive number[s] antl required dosage rate[s]. Samples indicate general color and may vary from concrete finished in field according to Spec cations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain each material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project. B Installer Qualifications: Concrete work shall be by firm with five years experience with work of similar scope and quality. C Colored Concrete Mock-Up: 1. Provide full-scale mock-up under provisions of Section 01400. Construct at least one month before start of other concrete work to allow concrete to cure before observation. 2. At location on Project selected by Architect, demonstrate methods of obtaining consistent visual appearance, including each forming and finishing condition required on Project using materials, workmanship, joint treatment, form ties, curing method, and patching techniques to be used throughout Project. 3. Retain samples of cements, sands, aggregates, and color additives used in mock-up for comparison with materials used in remaining Work. 4. Accepted mock-up provides visual standard for work of Section. 5. Mock-up may remain as part of Work. D Preconstruction Conference: 99144 PPC 03365 Surface Applied Concrete Color OS/25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 2 1. Comply with Section 01040. 2. Review procedures required to produce specked results. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Color Additives: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver color additives to job site or batch plant in original, unopened packaging. Store in dry conditions. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from hatching until discharge. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Comply with all Federal and Local Environmental Quality VOC compliance regulations. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Colored Additives for Surface Applied Colored Concrete: 1. Chemical Stain Color Manufacturers: a. "Lithochrome Chemstain" as manufactured by LM Scofield Company b. "Semco" stained concrete (800-33 SEMCO) c. "Bomanite Chemical Stain" as manufactured by Bomanite Corporation. d. Substitutions that comply with Section 01600, and that match the "Chromix" colors specked above may be accepted by the architect. 2. Mates4a4s~. a. Colored additives shall contain pure, concentrated mineral pigments specially processed for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C979. b. Color additives containing carbon black are not acceptable. 3. Packaging: If color additives are to be added to mix at site, furnish color additives in premeasured bags to minimize job site waste. 2.02 CONCRETE COLORS A. Chemical Staln Concrete Colors are as follows: 1. CC-01 and CC-02: Manufacturer: Semco Stained Concrete Colors: TBD 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Release and/or curing compound for Colored Concrete as recommended by the manufacturer. B Clear iopcoat sealer as recommended by the manufacturer. 99144 PPC 03365 Surtace Applied Concrete Color OS/25/D0 90% Permit Issue Page 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A Provide floor protection where the integrally colored concrete will be placed, using an underlayment of 4 mil plastic sheeting with an overfayment consisting of 2 layers 1/2" thick CDX plywood. Stagger the top layer of plywood to overlap the seams on the bottom layer and fasten the two layers together with screws that do not penetrate into the concrete slab. B Monitor vehicle traffic carefully and dean up oil or other associated machinery stains or marks immediately. C Protect the plywood system from exterior or interior water damage that may accumulate under the system. 3.02 COLOR APPLICATION A. Chemical Stain Application 1 Apply the chemical stain andlor color hardener according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2 Apply the manufacturers standard sealant topcoat. END OF SECTION ~ ~ r ~ ~ f ~^^ s r ~c r ar ~ ~ s ~ ~ r ~ 99144 PPC Concrete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01400 -Quality Control: Testing laboratory services. 2. Section 05500 Metal Fabrications: Steel lintels, wall panels, and metal gates set in masonry. 3. Section 07180 -Water Repellent Coating: fnferror and exterior application. 4. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 5. Structural Drawings 1.02 SUMMARY A. Mortar and grout for masonry. B. Concrete masonry units. C. Factory glazed concrete masonry units. D. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C5 -Quicklime for Structural Purposes. B. ASTM C90 -Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. C. ASTM C94 -Ready-Mixed Concrete. 0. ASTM C144 -Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. E. ASTM C150 -Portland Cement. F. ASTM C207 -Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. G. ASTM C270 -Mortar for unit Masonry. H. ASTM 0404 -Aggregates for Masonry Grout. I. ASTM C476 -Grout for Masonry. J. ASTM A615 -Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. K. ASTM E514 -Water penetration and Leakage through Masonry. L. IMIAC -International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. M. Uniform Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01330. 6. Submit documentation confirming compliance with the latest adopted Uniform Building Code for the specified compressive strength of masonry (composite masonry design of fm value of t800 psi at the age of 28 days), as follows: 1. Acceptable documentation: 99144 PPC Cona~ete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% PermitISSUe 2 a. UBC Section "2105.3.2 Masonry prism testing" is acceptable if the documentation for the 28 day aged samples are submitted for approval 10 days prior to ordering or purchasing the masonry for the project. The compressive strength of masonry determined in accordance with UBC Standard 21-17 for each set of prisms shall equal or exceed fm. The "prism testing" includes, but is not limited to, the testing of five masonry prisms for each type of block specirfed, as taken from materials that are specked for the project. Prisms shall be canstwcted and tested under the observation of an independent testing agency approved by the architect prior to testing. The masonry contractor to bear all expenses of this testing. b. UBC Section "2105.3.4 Unit sVength method" is acceptable. It incudes, but is not limited to compliance with Table 21-B and Table 21-D. 2. Unacceptable documentation: a. UBC Section "2105.3.3 Masonry prism test record" is not acceptable and will be rejected. C. Samples: 1. Submit two ribbons of mortar color, illustrating color and color range. 2. Submit two samples of each type and color concrete masonry unit specified to illustrate color, texture and extremes of color range. D. Submit premix mortar manufacturers installation instructions. E. Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, wall flashings, Dreformed control joint materials and the water repellent mortar admixture. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated masonry construction. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up under provisions of Section 01400. B. Construct a masonry wall panel of size and characteristics as indicated in the Drawings, including mortar and accessories, and water repellant application. C. Locate where directed on site, where mock-up will not interfere with Work of other construction. D. Do not order masonry products for remainder or Work until mock-up has been approved. E. Approved mock-up will be standard of quality for masonry Work in the Project. F. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work. Remove mock-up only after remainder of masonry Work has been completed and accepted. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 99144 PPC Concrete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain mortar and grout materials and surrounding air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC -Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of Work of other sections. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.Ot MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer's include the following: 1. Westblock Pacfic 2. Mutual Materials 2.02 COMPLETED ASSEMBLIES A. Minimum compressive strength of fm = 1800 psi at the age of 28 days. See subsection 1.04 SUBMITTALS, item B in this specification section for additional compressive strength information and requirements. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type V when in contact with soils, elsewhere Type I; white or gray color as required to produce mortar color. B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM 0404; 3J8 inch minus. F. Water: Clean and potable. G. Mortar Color: Standard gray, except as noted in drawings. H. Integral Water-Repellent Admixture: Integral liquid polymeric admixture for mixing with mortar mix; Class E rating for water permeance when tested in accordance with ASTM E514; `Dry-Block" Mortar Admixture by Forrer Industries iW. R. Grace & Co. -Conn.). 2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING A. Mortar Mixing: 1. ASTM CZTO, Type S using the Property Method; minimum sVengih of 1,800 psi. 2. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. 3. Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. a. Add integral water-repellent admixture to mortar used for exterior applications. 4. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 99144 PPC Concrete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 5. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within two hours of mixing. , 6. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or B two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. G t Mi i ' . rou x ng: 1. Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 2000 PSI at 28 days, proportioned in accordance with UBC Table 21-B, course grout. ' 2. Mix concrete in acX:ordance with ASTM 0476; pre-mixed type in accordance with ASTM C94. 3. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 2.05 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I -Moisture Controlled, with integral water-repellent admixture; medium weight, type, nominal size, and color as follows: ' B. Glazed (Prefaced) Concrete Masonry: ASTM C-90, Grade N, type I; "Astra-GIazeSW" as supplied by Trenwyth IndusUies, Inc., South Beloit, IL, or approved; nominal size and color as follows: C. Speciat Shapes: Provide where spawn and where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, cap block, and other special conditions. D. Integral Water-Repellent Admixture: Integral liquid polymeric admixture mixed with concrete during production of concrete masonry units; Class E rating for water permeance when tested in accordance with ASTM E514; passing ASTM E96 for water vapor transmission; fully dispersible in water; "Dry-Block" Water-Repellent Admixture by Forrer Industries (W. R. Grace 8 Co. -Conn.). 99144 PPC Corrvete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% Permk Issue 5 E. Concr ete Masonry Units Reference Color Texture/ Finish Size' Location CM-01 Natural Std. 8x8x16 Where indicated and fully concealed locations. CM-02 Cocoa SpIIt 8x8x16 Columns, as indicated on drawings CM-03 Khaki Honed Bx8x16 Exterior wall panels CM-04 Khaki Honed 8x10x16 Beveled Columns as indicated. CM-05 Not used. CM-O6 Black Honed 8x8x16 As indicated. GM-01 Clear Glass (ice) Sx4x8 As indicated. 'Size noted is generic extend finishes to all exposed areas depending on installation. 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 deformed bars, Grade 60 billet steel bars; web type; uncoated finish. B. Well Flashings: "Perm-A-Ramer by W. R. Grace & Co.; Use only in concealed locations. C. Composde Thru-Wall Flashings: Copper fabric laminate sheet of 5 ounce weight per square foot. bonded with asphalt beM1veen 2 layers of glass fiber cloth; 'AFCO Copper Fabric` by Afco Products, Inc.; 'H88 C-Fab Flashing" by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Copper Fabric Flashing" by York Manufacturing, Inc, or approved equal. E, Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials; "Sure-Klean" products, type as recommended by manufacturer to suit application, by ProSoCo, Inc., or approved. F. Preformed Control Joints Nominal 2 1!2" length extruded rubber material for use with standard sash block; `Rapid ConVOI Joint" by Dur-O-WaI, Inc., '#RS Series' by Hohmann and Bamard, Inc., or approved. Provide with corner and tee accessories, cement fused joints. G. Water-Repellent Coating: Specked in Section 07180. H. Drilled Anchor Bolts: 'Kwik-Bolt II by Hitti, Inc, meeting requirements of LC.B.O #4627, or approved. Cast anchors may be used only with approval of Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. B. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to r~eive work. C. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are property sized and located. D. VerHy that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 99144 PPC Concrete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 6 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. B. Plug cleanout holes with block masonry units to prevent leakage of grout materials Brace masonry for wet grout pressure or stack bond as shown. C. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections. D. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond or stacked bond as shown in drawings and schedule. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. D. Mortar Joints: Form concave double strike mortar joints at exposed horizontal joints and exposed vertical joints. Steel toil, not trowel cut, inlerxx sides of exposed walls. Coordinate mortar joints depth in masonry control joints with Execution requirements in Section 07900 -Joint sealers. E. Tool joints as required to receive flashing and sealant where indicated. F. Tool "Feature Joints" as indicated on drawings. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay twllow masonry units wNh face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furcowing of mortar joints are not permitted. C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. D. Inledock intersections and external comers. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units wRh proper toils to provide straight, clean, unshipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. G. Cut mortar joints flush where interior wall file is scheduled. H. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. I. Use smooth block to receive embeds, arrtairwvall, and attachments as indicated on drawings. 3.05 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Install wall flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in concealed locations only. B. Extend flashings under veneer, turn up minimum 8 inches and seal to steel stud back-up. C. Lay end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. D. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and sealer. 1 >~ 1 t 3.06 LINTELS A. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are nat scheduled 99144 PPC Concrete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue 7 B. Openings Up To 48 Inches Wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforang bars 1 inch from bottom web in 8 inch deep lintel. C. Openings From 48 Inches Up To 72 Inches Wide: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web In 16 Inch deep lintel. D. Openirgs Over 72 Inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. E. Use single piece reinforang bars only. F. Support and secure reinforcing Dars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned posftlon. G. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. H, Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. 3.07 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar. B. Reinforce bond beam as shown in the Drawings. C. Reinforce pilaster as shown in the Drawings. D. Lap splices minimum 54 bar diameters. E. Support and severe reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within t/2 inch of dimensioned position. F Place and consolidate grout fill wfthout displacing reinforcing. G. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores as shown. 3.08 ENGINEERED MASONRY A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned Gear of mortar and unobstructed. B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed fonts back 1/4 inch from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel bads and upward. C. Reinforce masonry unR cores with reinforcement bars and grout as indicated. D. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters. E. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement. F. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine gout using low lift grouting technques. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with course grout using high or low lift grouting techniques. G. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1-112 inch below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. H. Low Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of 48 inches and mechanically vibrate for grout consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 48 inch increments and mechanically vibrate for grout consolidation. 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal reinforcement through control and expansion joints except where shown on Drawings. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance wNh manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance wdh Section 07900 for sealant performance. D. Form expansion joint as detailed. 99144 PPC Concrete Masonry Units 04221 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue 8 3.10 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, build in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames, and other items furnished by other Sections. B. Provide a full standard mortar joint above all door frames. Do not eliminate this horizontal mortar joint by raising the door frame head to meet the CMU coursing above. C. Build In items plumb and level. D. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fiil frame voids slid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. E. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. F. Install anchor bolts in fully grouted cells, minimum 3 inches from edge of masonry unit and minimum 1-112 inches to the center of the cross web. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1132 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1!4 inch m 10 feet. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 114 inch per story noncumulative. D. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 Inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet. E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. 3.12 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for conduit, sleeves, and ductwork. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain Architect approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or sVength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears. Acid wash when required for removal. Test first for effects on color. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Goan salad surfaces with deaning sdution. E. Use non-metallic toils in cleaning operations. 3.14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construdlon activities. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Strudursl Shed 05120 05/25/00 90% Permk Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provrsions of the Contrail, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisiorrl Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05210 Steel Joists 2. Section 05300 Steel Decks: Support framing for small openings in roof and floor decks. 3. Section 05500 Metal Fabrications: Non-framing fabrications affecting structural steel work. 4. Section 07810 Applied Fireproofing. 5. Section 09900 Painting: Finish painting. 6. Structural Drawings 1.02 SUMMARY A. Structural steel iramrtg members. B Baseplates and shear stud connectors. C. Grouting under baseplates. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 -Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53 -Hot-Dipped. Znc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A108 -Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Ouality. D. ASTM A123 -Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A153 -Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A307 -Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. G. ASTM A325 -High Strength Brits for Structural Steel Joints. H. ASTM A490 -Quenched and Tempered Alby Steel Batts for Structural Steel Joints. I. ASTM A500 -Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. J. ASTM A501 -Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. ASTM A572 -High Strength Low Alloy Cdumbium-Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality. L AWS A2.0 -Standard Welding Symbols. M. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. N. AISC -Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. O. SSPC -Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submft under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: 99144 PPC Structural Steel 05120 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Cambers. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 4 Indicate which members do not receive shop primer. 5 Submit documentation verifying that the shop primer is compatible with the painted steel and with intumescent mastic fireproofing. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Submit under provisions of Section 07400 certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements inducting ASTM A572 for steel and ASTM A325 for bolts. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC -Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Maintain one copy of document on site. B. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. C Erector. Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Venfy that field measurements are as shown. 1.07 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Discuss areas that are exposed structure and Importance of clean connections and cross bracing placement. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A572, GR 50 for wide flange sectbns, unless noted otherwise. ASTM A36 for plates, angles, channels etc. B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A501, Grade B or ASTM A53, Type E or S. Grade B. D. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015, forged steel, headed, uncoated. E. Nuts and Washers: ASTM A490 or A325 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized members. F. Bolts: ASTM A325N, unless noted otherwise, for steel to steel connections, and ASTM A307 for anchor bolls and connections to wood. G. Welding Materials: AWS Dt.t; type required for materials being welded. H. Grout: Non-shrink type, premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plastidzing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days; 'Euco N.S.' manufactured by Euclid Chemical Co.. "Cryste~' manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, 'Masterflow 713' by Master Builders, or approved. I. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc chromate type. J. Adjustable Yoke: Cleveland City Forge, Part No. 53241. K. Turnbuckle Cleveland City Forge, Part No. 32013. 99144 PPC Structural Steel 05120 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 2.02 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6. B. Shop prime structural steel members, as follows: 1 Verify primer compatibility with painted steel and with intumescent mastic fireproofing. Submit documentation showing Compatibility. 2 Do not prime surfaces that will receive applied fireproofing. In the event that structural steel members are primed, submit additional documentation showing compliance with the Underwriter Laboratories guidelines for primed steel. 3 Do not prime surfaces that will receive field welding, or are in contact with concrete, or that have high-strength boltetl connections. C. Exterior structural steel members to be shop primed with a zinc rich epoxy primer, minimum 85% zinc in dry finish. Provide a 4 mil dry film thickness. D Interior structural steel members to be shop primed with the fabricator's standard rust inhibitive primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP PAINTING A All structural steel that is not galvanized or that receives applied fireproofing shall receive one coat of shop applied paint, as specfiied in this section, after all fabrication is completed. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.03 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Field weld components and shear studs indicated. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Engineer. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and other damaged surfaces, except surfaces to be In contact with concrete. E. Grout under baseplates. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Provide tolerances in accordance with AISC -Specification for the Design, Fabrication and €reciion of Structural Steel for Buildings. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ S ~ ~ r ~ ~ t ~ s ! S ~ i ~ 99144 PPC Steel ]oists 05210 1)3/23/1]0 90°.6 Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and ocher Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120 Structural Steel: Grouting base plates, connections and accessories. 2. Section D530D Steel Decks: Support framing for small openings in roof and floor decks 3. Section 07810 Applied Fireproofing 4. Section 09900 Painting 5. Structural Drawings 1.02 SUMMARY A. Open web steel joists with bridging, attached seats, and anchors. B. Loose bearing plates and anchor bolts for site placement. C. Framed floor and root openings grealer than 18 inches. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 -Structural Steel. B. ASTM A108 -Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished. Standard Quality. C. ASTM A307 -Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners. D. AWS 41.1 -Structural Welding Code. E. FS TT-P-636 -Primer Coating, Alkyd, Wood and Ferrous Metal. F. SJ1-Sleet Joist Institute, Standard Specifrcations for Open Web Steel Joists. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings and Deferred Submittals: Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, loading, bracing, locations of joists and joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, attachments, and cambers. Include calculations. Calculations and shop drawings shall be stamped and signed by an Engineer registered in the State the project is located in. C. Welders' Cert~cates: Submit manufacturer's certficates under provisions of Section 01400 that welders employed on the Work have met AWS verfiication within the previous 12 months. D. Indipte which members do not receive shop primer. Submit documentation verifying that the shop primer is compatible with the painted steel and with intumescent mastic fireproofing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience and member of Steel Joist Institute. 99144 PPC Stee( Joists 05210 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect joists from distortion or damage. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that fabrication drawings reflect true field measurements.. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists Members: SJI type as shown. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. C. Primer: FS TT-P-636. D. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated. 2.04 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6. B. Shop prime structural steel joists, as follows: 1 Verity primer compatibility with painted steel and with intumescent mastic freproofing. Submit documentation showing compatibility. 2 Do not prime surfaces that will receive applied fireproofing. In the event that structural steel members are primed, submit additional documentation showing compliance with the Underwriter Laboratories guidelines for primed steel. 3 Do not prime surfaces that will receive field welding, or are in contact with concrete, or that have high-strength bolted connections. C. Exterior structural steel members to be shop primed with a zinc rich epoxy primer, minimum 85% zinc in dry finish. Provide a 4 mil dry film thickness. D. Galvanize exterior structural steel members to ASTM A123. Provide minimum 1.25 ozlsq ft galvanized coating. E. Interior structural steel members to be shop primed with the fabricator's standard rust inhibitive red oxide primer. 99144 PPC Steel Joists 05210 05/25/00 90aib Permit Issue 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP PAINTING A. Atl structural steel that is not galvanized or that receives applied fireproofing shall receive one coat of shop applied paint, as specified in this section, alter all fabrication is completed. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field condkions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installaton means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.03 ERECTION A Erect and bear joists on supports. B- Allow for erection loads. Provide wffx;ient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe. plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent budging and bracing. C. Coordinate placement of anchors in masonry construction for securing bearing plates or angles. D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seat to bearing plates or angles. E. Position and fieb weld joist chord extensions and waU attachments. F. Frame floor and roof openings greater than 18 inches with supplementary framing. G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced and secured. H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist fabricator. I. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 114 Inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 114 inch. END OF SECTION . . ~ . . . . . . . . ~ . ~^ r . ~ . ^~ 99144 PPC Steel Decks 05300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel roof and floor decks, and accessories. B. Formed steel deck end forms to contain wet concrete. C. Shear stud connectors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03.300 -Concrete: Concrete reinforcement and topping slab over metal floor deck. B. Section 05120 -Structural Steel. C. Section 07514 -Built-Up Asphalt Roofing D. Structural Drawings -Notes: Special Inspections. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A108 -Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. B. ASTM A446 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. C. ASTM A924 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process. D. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code. E. SDI -Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof becks. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate decking plan, support locations, projections, openings and reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. Indicate temporary shoring of decking where required. C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics and dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate speck installation sequence, and special instructions. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B, Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C, Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. 1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements areas shown. 99144 PPC Steel Decks 05300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Verco. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A or B Structural Quality; with G60 galvanized coating conforming to ASTM A924, G90 where exposed to weather. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.3. C. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108 steel, Grade 1015, forged steel, headed, uncoated; sizes as shown in Drawings. D. Touch-Up Primer: Zinc chromate type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Metal Roof Decking: 20 gauge minimum: 1 1!2 inch fluted profile; sheet steel of size and configuration as shown in Drawings. 'Type HSB-36" by Verco, or approved. B. Metal Roofing (Lobby): 18 ga. 3" minimum, type N-24. C. Metal Floor Decking: 22 gauge minimum, formed sheet steel, width as shown in Drawings; 1 %z inch fluted profile; lapped side joints; diagonally ribbed flute sides for improved concrete bond. 'Type ER Formlok" by Verco, or approved. D. Floordecking: 22 ga BR Formlock Deck (Mezzanine Structural Slab). E. Floordecking: 20 ga W2 Forrnlock (12'-0" Mezzanine). F. Metal Riser Floor Decking: 22 gauge minimum, formed sheet steel, width as shown in Drawings; 1 1/2 inch fluted profile; lapped side joints: diagonally ribbed flute sides for improved concrete bond. "Type B Formlok" by Verco, or approved G. Metal Closure Strips, Wet Concrete Stops, Cover Plate, and Related Accessories: Galvanized sheet steel; of thickness, profile, and size required. H. Fabricate roof sump pan and floor drain pan of t4 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight. I. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, seH-tapping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal decking in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and manufacturer's instructions. B. Metal roof decking (lobby): 18 ga., 3" min, type N-24. B. Decking to span Dues a minimum at 3 stee4 supports at aft locations where framing will allow. Align and level. 99144 PPC Steel Decks 05300 05/25/00 90% Per'mft Issue 3 ' C. Bear decking on steel supports with 2 inch minimum bearing. Align and level. D. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with fusion welds as ' indicated on the Drawings. E. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.3. F. Weld or mechanically clinch maleHemale side laps as shown and as required to achieve design loads. G. To contain wet concrete, install stops at floor edge upturned to top surface of slab. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion. ' H. Reinforce steel deck openings as shown. I. Install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as decking, where deck changes direction. Fusion weld t2 inches oc maximum. ' J. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings. ' K. Position roof sump and floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute. L. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below. See Drawings for ' number of studs required. M. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up prime paint. ' N. Finished work shall be ready to accept concrete where shown. ' END OF SECTION I 1 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ 99144 PPC Cold Formed Metal Framing 05400 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05300 -Steel Decks 2. Section 07210 -Building Insulation: Insulation within framing 3. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Light-gage wall framing and sheathing 4. Structural Drawings 1.02 SUMMARY A. C-shaped load bearing steel studs and U-shaped steel tracks B. C-shaped load bearing steel joists. C. Formed steel headers, bracing, furring, and bridging components. D. Framing accessories and fasteners. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) -Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. B. ASTM A653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality. C. ASTM A924 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process. D. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. E. Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association specrfication. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each item of cold formed metal framing and accessories. 1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements areas indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Light Gauge Framing: 1. 16 gauge and heavier, ASTM A653, Grade D, Fy = 50 ksi. 2. 18 gauge and lighter; ASTM A653, Grade A, Fy = 33 ksi. B. Studs and Joists: ASTM A653, formed C-shape, solid web, knurled faces, web height as shown in Drawings. C. Purlins: ASTM A653, formed to "Z' shape, solid web; 16 gauge thick minimum. 99194 PPC Cold Formed Metal Framing 05400 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 D. Track: Formed steel; channel shaped; sized for a tight fit to the studs or sized indicated in the In Drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. B. Plates, Gussets and Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A924, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft. B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated as detailed or approved, unless shown otherwise. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Detail and fabricate light gauge steel in accordance with AISI Standards and Metal Stud Manufacturer's Association specification. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. C. Finishes Galvanize to G60 coating class. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Verfy that building framing components are ready to receive work. 3.02 ERECTION OF STUDDING A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with fasteners or welding at maximum 16 inches oc. Coordinate installation of sealant with tracks. C. Place studs at 16 inches) C, unless noted otherwise on the drawings; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door and window jambs. E. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. J. Attach cross studs and furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 1 i 1 1 99144 PPC Cold Formed Metal Framinq 05406 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 M. Complete framing ready to receive exterior work. 3.03 ERECTION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructwns. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Place joists and purllns at 12 inches maximum o.c.; not more than 2 inches from abutting wall. Connect joists to supports using fastener or welding method. D. Set joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and brxiging. E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of stud track. F. Provide web stiffeners at reacfion points. G. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. H. Complete framing ready to receive metal roof and wall assemblies. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Metal 3talrs 05510 05/25/00 90% Pernik Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 Concrete: Placement of metal fabrigtions in concrete, concrete fill and reinforcement for metal stair treads, and concrete sealer if scheduled. 2. Section 04221 Concrete Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. 3. Section 09260 Gypsum Board Systems: Placement of support backing in stud walls 4 Section 05520 Metal Handrails and Railings 5, Section 09900: Paint 1.02 SUMMARY A. Shop fabricated steel stairs with concrete filled metal pans. B. Shop fabricated steel stairs with metal grating treads. C. Strop or field fabricated metal grating landings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36: Specifiption for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A123-89: Specifiption for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM A153: -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A570 -Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality. E. ASTM A792: Standard Specification for Sheet Steel, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Aloy-Coated by the Hot- Dip Process. F. AWS A2.0 -Standard Welding Symbols. G. AWS D7.1 -Structural Welding Code. H. NAAMM -Metal Stairs Manual. I. SSPC -Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Strop drawings and calculations for metal stairs to be submitted with the stamp of an Engineer licensed in the State that the project is boated in. B. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Railings and Handrails: Design to withstand on top reil a minimum force of 250 lbs. applied in any direction at any point and 50 PLF applied horizontally. Design intermediate railing components to withstand a 25 PSF applied horizontally over the entire tributary area. 99149 PPC Metal Stairs 05510 05/25/00 90% PermitlSSUe 2 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Sedan 01300, certifying welders employed on fibs Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months, and the local Cdys certification raro. B. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State that the project is located In. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The design and construction shall meet all building codes as applicable to this site location. The contractor has sole responsibility for code compliance. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel WF Sections: ASTM A572, grade 50. B. Channel, angles, etc.: ASTM A36 C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Plates: ASTM A283. E. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade B Structural Quality with 1.25 oz/sq it galvanized coating. F. Serrated Steel Bar Grating: Provide the following, or as accepted: 1. FGemp Grading Model #K1N-19~-52, ASTM A-569. G. Botts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. J. Setting Compound: Provide one of the tollovang, or as accepted: 1. Sta-Crete Inc.'s Epoxy-Thiokol Resin 2. Hallemlte Mfg. Co.'s Por-Rok 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application. B. Trim, Closure Pieces, and Infilis: Same material and finish as exterior sheets, 24 gauge; brake formed to required profiles. C. Anchors: Expandable noncorrosive as per manufacturer recommendations. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C Continuousry seal joined members by continuous welds. D Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed butt joints light, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius I~ 1 1 99144 PPC Metal S~aln 05510 05/25/00 90% Permlt Issue 3 E Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where spec~cally noted otherwise. F Supply components requred for arrchorege of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifx:aly noted oMenvise. G Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings, and railings to each other and to building structure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. Remove milt scale, rust and dirt fdlowing SSPCSP2 for hand deaning and SSPC-SP3 for power tool Leaning. B. Shop phme metal fabrications and stairs as follows: 1 Verify primer compatibility with painted steel and with intumescent mastic fireproofing. Submit documentation showing compatibility. 2 Do not prime surfaces that will receive applied freproofing. In the event that structural steel members are primed, submit additional documentaton showing compliance with the Underwater Laboratories guidelines for primed steel. 3 Do not prime surfaces that will receive field welding, or are in contact with concrete, or that have high-strength bolted connections. C. Exterior structural steel members to be shop primed with a zinc rich epoxy primer, minimum 135% zinc in dry finish. Provide a 4-mil dry film thickness. D Interior structural steel members to be shop primed with the fabricators standard rust inhibitive primer. 3.02 SHOP COATING A All metal fabrications and stairs that is not galvanized or that receives applied fireproofing shall receive one coat of shop applied paint, as specified in this section, after all fabrcaton is completed. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions is acceptable and is ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is regwred. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with seriing templates, to appropriate sections. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for suffident temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop dravnngs. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 99144 PPC Metal Stairs 05510 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. G. Set handrail and guardrail posts plumb and true into preset sleeves or drilled holes, where shown; caulk solid with setting compound; strike off at surface flush and smooth. 3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. The schedule is a list of principal items ony. Refer to drawing details for dems not specificaly scheduled. 1. Interior Stairs: Metal concrete pan filled stairs, shop primed. 2. Exterior Stairs: Serrated grating tread, galvanized, and shop pnmed. ENP OF SECTION 99144 PPC Metal Ladders 05515 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Spec cation sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 03300 Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. 2 Section 04221 Concrete Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. 3 Section 07724 Roof Hatches 4 Sedbn 09900 Paint 1.02 SUMMARY A. Shop fabricated steel ladders. 1.03 REFERENCES A ASTM A38: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B ASTM A723-89: Spec cation for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C ASTM A153: -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E ASTM A500 -Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. F ASTM A792: Standard Specifiption for Sheet Steet, 5596 Aluminum-Zinc Aloy-Coated by the Hot- Dip Process. G AWS A2.0 -Standard Welding Symbols. H AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. I NAAMM. J SSPC -Steel Structures Painting Council. K OSHA 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop lNawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Shop drawings and calculations for metal stairs to be submitted wffh the stamp of an Engineer licensed in the State that the project is located in. B Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbds. Indicate net weld ~ngths. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design to withstand on top rail a minimum force of 250 lbs. applied in any direction at any point and 50 PLF applied horizontally. Design intermediate railing components to withstand a 25 PSF applied horizontally over the enlae tnbutary area. 99144 PPC Metal Ladders 05515 05/25/00 90% Permit issue 2 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisans of Section 01330, certifying welders empbyed on the Work, verifying AWS qualfication within the previous 12 months, and the local Gtys certification card. B. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State that the project is located in. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The design and consWCtion shall meet all building codes as applicable to this site location. The contractor has sole responsibility for code compliance. 1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Steel WF Sections: ASTM A572, grade 50. B Channel, angles, etc.: ASTM A36 C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Plates: ASTM A283. E. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade 8 Schedule 40. F. Sheet Steel: ASTM A446, Grade B Structural Quality with 1.25 ozlsq ft galvanized coating. t. Bolls, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. J. Welding Materials: AWS 01.1; type required for materials being welded. K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Manufacturers standard type to suit application. B. Anchors: Expandable non-corrosive as per manufacturer recommendations. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. 8. Fabricate items with joiMS tightly fitted and seaued. C Continuously seal Joined members by continuous welds. D Grind exposed Joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed butt joints tight, flush, and haidine. Ease exposed edges to small un'rform radius. E Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or Dolts: unobtrusively located: consistent with design of component. except where specifically noted otherwise. F Supply oomponenfs required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. G Accurately form components required for anctxxage of stairs, landings, and railings to each other and to building structure. 99144 pPC Metal Ladders 05515 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHES A Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. Remove mill scale, rust and dirt following SSPC-SP2 for hand deaning and SSPC-SP3 for power tool cleaning. B. Shop prime metal fabrications and stairs as follows: 1 Verify primer compatibility with painted steal and with intumescent mastic fireproofing. Submit documentation showing compatibility. 2 Do not prime surfaces that will receive applied frceproofirg. In the event that structural steel members are primed, submit additional documentation stwwing compliance with the Underwriter Laboratories guidelines for primed steel. 3 Do not prime surfaces that will receive field welding, or are in contact with concrete, or that have high-sVength bolted connections. C. Exterior metal ladder to t>e galvanized and shop primed with compatible primer. D Interior structural steel members to be shop primed with the fabricator's standard rust inhibitive primer. 3.02 SHOP COATING A All metal fabrications and stairs that is not galvanized or that receives applied fireproofing shall receive one coat of shop applied paint, as specified in this section, after all fabrication is completed. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field condtions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel Rems to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections. 3.05 INSTALll1TION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufrdent temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. G. Set handrail and guardrail posts plumb and true into preset sleeves or drilled holes, where shown; caulk solid with setting compound; strike oti at surface flush and smooth. 991gq ppC Metal Ladders 05515 05/25/00 90% t~ermk Issue 4 3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. The Schedule is a list of principal Hems only. Refer to Drawing details for items not spec~calty scheduled. 1 Interior Ladders: Rooftop or other access as indicated, strop primed. END Of SECTION 1 99144 PPC Metal Handrails and Railings 05520 OS/]S/QO 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.Ot RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 03300 Concrete: Placement of metal fabricaticns in concrete. 2 04221 Concrete Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. 3 09260 Gypsum Board Systems: Placement of support backing in stud walls. 4 09900: Paint 1.02 SUMMARY A. Shop fabricated handrails. B Shop fabricated railings. C Shop fabricated guardrails. D. Concrete filled metal pans. 1.03 REFERENCES A ASTM A53 -Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. B ASTM A123 -Zinc (Hot-Galvanized} Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. C ASTM A153 -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D ASTM A283 -Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. E ASTM A500 -Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. F AWS A2.0 -Standard Welding Symbols. G AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. H NAAMM -Metal Stairs Manual. I NAAMM -Pipe Railing Manual. J SSPC -Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. InGude erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Shop drawings and calculations for metal stairs to be submitted with the stamp of an Engineer licensed in the State that the project is located in. B Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. Indicate vent holes. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Railings and Handrails: Design to withstand on top rail a minimum force of 250 lbs. applied in any direction at any point and 50 PLF applied horizontally. Design intermediate railing components to withstand a 25 PSF applied horizontally over the entire tributary area. 99144 PPC Metal Handrails and Railings 05520 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01330, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualficetion within the previous 12 months, and the local Citys certrfication card. B. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State that the project is located in. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The design and construction shall meet all building codes as applicable to this site location. The contractor has sole responsibility for code compliance. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verrfy that field measurements are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Channel, angles, etc.: ASTM A36 B Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C Plates: ASTM A283. D Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40. E Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized components. F Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. H Setting Compound: Provide one of the following, or as accepted: 1 Sta-Crete Inc.'s Epoxy-Thiokol Resin 2 Hallemite Mfg. Co.'s Por-Rok I Handrail & Guardrail Mounting Flange: Provide flanges at the projector platforms as shown in the drawings, steel, extra heavy flange with flat base, with mounting 3 holes. Provide the following, or as accepted: 1 Model number 1610-T as manufactured by R86 Wagner, Inc J Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application. K Trim, Closure Pieces, and Infills: Same material and finish as exterior sheets, 24 gauge; brake formed to required profiles. L Anchors: Expandable non-corrosive as per manufacturer recommendations. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Railings and Handrails: Fabricate in accordance with NAAMM Pipe Railing Manual. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed butt joints tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small un'rform radius. 99144 PPC Metal Handralis and lRallings 05520 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. H. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs, landings, and railings to each other and to building structure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6. B. Shop prime metal fabrications and stairs as follows: 1 Verify primer compabbdity wdh painted sleet and with intumescent mastic fireproofing. Submit dowmentation shovnng compatibility. 2 Do riot prime surfaces that will receive applied fireproofing, In the event that structural steel members are primed, submit additional documentation showing compliance with the Underwriter Laboratories guidelines for primed steel. 3 Do not prime surfaces that will receive field welding, or are in contact with concrete, or that have high-strength bolted connections. C. 6cterior structural steel members to be strop primed with a zinc rich epoxy primer, minimum 85°k zinc in dry finish. Provide a 4-mil dry film thickness. D Interior structural steel members to be shop primed with the fabricator's standard rust inhibitive primer. 3.02 SHOP COATING A All metal fabrications and stairs that is not galvanized Or that receives applied fireproofing shall receive one coat of shop applied paint, a5 specified in this section, after alt fabription is completed. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditons are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments, C. Field weld components indicated on strop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 99144 PPC Metal Handrails and Railings 05520 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 E. Obtain Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. G. Set handrail and guardrail posts plumb and true into preset sleeves or drilled holes, where shown; caulk solid with setting compound; strike off at surface flush and smooth. 3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, noncumulative. 8. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.07 SCHEDULE A The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing detail for items not specifically scheduled. 1 Railings and hand railings. 2 Guardreils END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Ornamental Formed Metal 05730 05/25/00 90% Permit issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. 2 Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems 3 Secton 09900 -Painting: Finish painting. 1.02 SUMMARY A Ornamental sheet metal panels and shapes. Locabons and profiles as indicated on the drawings. B Stainless steel sheet panels at ticket counters. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A167 -Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate. B. ASTM 632 -Solder Metal. C. SMACNA -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B Submit samples of each sheet metal item speed for verification. C Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, Oashings, terminations, and Installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance wkh SMACNA standard details and requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 8. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer to have at least 5 years experience providing stainless steel fabrications. 2-02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Panels at the Ticket Booth 1 MP-0t, Oat sheet stock, ASTM A167, Type 304, dead soft temper, 20 gage; No. 4D finish. 99144 PPC Ornamental trormed Metal 05730 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 2 For use at the ticket booth, and as indicated elsewhere on the drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material and fmish as flashing metal. with soft neoprene washers bonded to the fastener head.. B Furring Channels: 718 inch x 2 112 inch galvanized 24 gage at 24 inches o.c. minimum, 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in sine, square, and free from distortion or defects. 8. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C Hem exposed edges on underside 112 inch; miter and seam corners. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Flat sheet stock materials: 1 Conform to drawing details as shown. 2. Fabricate from single pieces wherever feasible. 3. All joints to be fully welded and ground smooth except as noted on the drawings. B See the drawings and the Materials 8 Finish Summary for locations. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Rough Carpentary 06100 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 05300 -Steel Decks: Roof decking to receive wood curbs and cants 2 Section 06200 -Finish Carpentry 3 Section 06410 -Custom Casework 4 Section 07514 -Built-Up Asphalt Roofing 5 Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems 1.02 SUMMARY A. Roof curbs, wood Hailers and cant strips B. Wood blocking in wall and roof openings, where shown. C. Wood furring and grounds D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. E. Telephone and electrical panel boards. F. Preservative and fire-retardant treatment of wood. 1.03 REFERENCES A. APA: American Plywood Association. B. ASTM C79 -Gypsum Sheathing Board. C. ASTM E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C7 -All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. E. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 -Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. F. WWPA: Western Wood Products Associaton. G. ASTM E136 -Non Combustibility Test. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data Provide technical data on wood preservative and fire-retardant materials and application instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified and stamped by APA. 99144 PPC Rough Carprntary 06100 05/25/00 90"/o Permit Iswe 2 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: W WPA. B. Miscellaneous Framing: No. 2 and Better, Douglas Fir-Larch or Hem-Fir species, 19 percent maximum moisture content. C. Exterior Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing, Grade C-D; Exposure Durability 1; unsanded- D. Interior Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing, Grade GD, fire treated, 3!4 inch thickness unless noted otherwise. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Nails and Spikes: Hot~ipped galvanized. B. Soffit Vents: Continuous type, mill finish aluminum, 1-112 inch wide. 2.03 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant: AWPA Treatment C20. Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. WoodTreatmenl. 1. Preservative treat wood Hailers, curbs. blocking, stripping, sleepers, and similar members in contact with masonry, conuele, roofing or flashing. 2. Fire-retardant treat other wood and plywood members where indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. C. Construct curb members of single pieces. D. Space framing and fumng 16 inches o.c. E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. F. Coordinate curb installation with Installation of decking and support of deck openings, and roofing vapor retardant 3.02 SHEATHING A. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with plywood material where shown. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Finish Carpentry 06200 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, irxkuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Seclion 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Grounds and support framing 2 Section Ogg00 -Paint: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry kerns 1.02 SUMMARY A. Plywood Interior finishes. B Medium Density Fiberboard top of wall caps in auditoriums. 1.03 REFERENCES A. APA: American Plywood Assodation. 8. AWI - Ouality Standards. C. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit two samples of wood trim 10 inches long. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perfartn work m aooordance wkh AW I Custom quality. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator Company specializing in fabricating the products speckled in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2 01 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Hemlock or Douglas Fir spades; dear mixed grain; maximum moisture content of 6 to 7 percent; of quality suitable for paint finish. 99144 PPC Flnlsh Carpentry 06200 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A Interior Plywood: APA rated sheathing, Grade C-C; Exposure Durability 1; plugged and sanded. B Medium Density Fiberboard (MOF): Minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density, 3!4' thickness unless indicated otherwise. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of Douglas Fir species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer as specified in Section 09900. C. Wood Eller. As specified in Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AW I Custom Quality Standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1132 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install trim with nails or screws at 1 B inches on center. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Sfte Finishing: Refer to Sedan 09900 and Room Finish Schedule. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1132 inch. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Custom Casework 06410 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01230 - Alternates. B. Section 01110 -Summary of Work: Owner furnished casework and related equipment. C. Sectia~ 06100 -Rough Carpentry. Grounds and support framing. D. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction and substrates. E. Section 15400 -Plumbing Fixtures and Trim- Solid polymer restroom lavatories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI 135.4 -Basic Hardboard. B. ASTM A167 -Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. C. AWI -Quality Standards. D. FS MM-L-736 -Lumber, Hardwood. E, FS MMM-A-130 -Adhesive, Contact. F. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD3 -High Pressure Decorative Laminates. G. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. H. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Secton 01330. B. Product Data: Manufacturer s specifications, data, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes. D. Samples: Submit two, 2 x 3 inch size samples for each color, texture and pattern of stainless steel, plastic laminate, and melamine material specified. Submit one sample of each hardware item in specified finish. E. General Contractor to provide Architect with copy oflaminate Purchase Order(s) within six (6) weeks of "notice to proceed". 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 99144 PPC Cusipm caseworir 06410 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 ' A. Perform work in accordance with AW I Custom quality. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS , A. Manuracturer. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. , 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage; slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 1.09 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, and finish work. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS , A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI; average moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer: Douglas Fir or Hemlock species. B. Wood Particleboard: PS 1; AWI standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with ' water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces; fire rated particleboard; 3!4 inch thick unless otherwise indipted: Willamette Indusries, Inc.'s Duraflake FR, or approved C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade. smooth two , Sides, 1!4 inch thick unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, GP-50 General Purpose type; pattern and color: surface texture. and manufacturer as scheduled, or approved: F , ormica 1. PL-01: #4457 Carmine Bubinga 2. PL-02: ffS-1-587 Sugar Plum Textured Nevamar ' 3. PL-03: #2625-S Gdden Weave Silk Laminar B. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD3, BK-20 backing grade, and undecorated plastic laminate. C. Cabinet Liner: MDL Melamine Oveday as manufactured by RMP Roseburg Melamine Products, KorTron as manufactured by Willamette Industries, or approved. Color. Antique White 99144 PPC Cusbom Casework 06410 ' 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 2.04 SOLID POLYMER SURFACING A. Solid Polymer Surfacing: Class 1 flammability, thickness as shown, color !family, surface texture, manufacturer, and locations, and as scheduled, or approved: 1. SP-01: Y' Corian Pepper Ivory/Summit Family matte Concession Countertops 2. SP-02:'/z" Corian Pepper Ivory/Summit Family Toilet Room Countertops 3. SP-03: Conan Cameo WhitelGenesis Family matte Toilet Room Lavatories I a. Solid Polymer Lavatory Bowls: Conan "810AlS", 16 7/16 inch x 13 inch, Cameo White ' color with semigloss finish, for seamed undermount with Corian countertops 2.05 ACCESSORIES ' A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Edge Trim: Provide plastic laminate or PVC material with color to match adjacent face laminate. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Drawer Slides: Load capacity of drawers (loaded with paper) is defined as drawer depth x height x width (in inches) x .017 lbs. cu/in. plus 30 pounds. ' 1. Pencil Drawers: Accuride 2006, Steel ball bearings, 3!4-extension and load capacity up to 45 lbs. per pair. 2. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 3832A, Steel ball bearings, full extension, load M capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers that are deeper than they are wide. 3. Light to Medium Duty Drawers: Accuride 7432, Steel ball bearings, full extension, load ' capacity up to 100 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches wide or less. 4. Medium to Heavy Duty Drawers: Accuride 4034, Steel ball bearings, full extension with 1 inch overtravel, progressive movement, load capacity 150 lbs. per pair; for drawers 24 inches wide ' or less. ' 5. Heavy Duty or Lateral File Drawers: Accuride 3640, Steel ball bearings, full extension with 1 inch overtravel, progressive movement, load capacity up to 200 lbs. per pair, for drawers 42 inches wide or less. ' B. Cabinet Shelf Standards: Knape & Vogt 255 ZC. C. Cabinet Shelf Brackets: Knape 8 Vogt 256 ZC. ' D, Wall Shelf Standards: Knape & Vogt E3200 Series black color. E. Wall Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt E3210 Series black color. F. Hinges: 99144 PPC Custom Casework 06410 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 1. Concealed Hinge: Self-closing, 165-degree opening; Grass America, Inc. No. 3903 2. Continuous Hinge: 1-112 inch heavy-duty brass hinge, Stanley No. 314. G. Drawer and Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, dead bolt with metal strike: 1. Doors: National N8123-26D. 2. Drawers: National N8149-26D, or Corbin No. C6738. H. Drawer Pulls: 4 inch x 5/16 inch diameter wire pull, brushed stainless steel US32D. I. Sliding Door Track: EPCO No. 214. J. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Edge Trim: Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern, plastic trim. Use one piece for full length only. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Flush overlay style. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. E. Apply plastic laminate finish in full-uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fil corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cutouts. F. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse sloe of plastic laminate finished surfaces. G. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. H. Provide cutouts for outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units, and countertops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 99144 PPC Custom Casework 06410 ' 05/25/00 90Mo Permit Issue 5 F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. ' G. Countersink exposed grommets to finish flush with suROUnding surfaces 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Adjust moving or operating parts !o function smoothly and correctly. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, glass, hardware, fittings and fixtures. END OF SECTION r .~ r~ .^~ r~ r r a~ r r ~. r s .~ r~~ 99144 PPC Water Repellant Coatlnys 07180 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, incuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related SeGions: 1 Section 04221 - Concxete Masonry Units 2 Section 09000 -Room Finish Schedule 3 Section 09860 -Anti-Graffiti Coating 1.02 SUMMARY A Exterior water repellent coating applied to all exposed concrete and/or masonry surfaces. B Interior water repellent coating applied to all exposed masonry surfaces when no other interior finishes are indicated. C Field Mock-up. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit the following for each type of product specified: 1 Product descripllon and chemical properties including percentage of solids. 2 Limitations to coating and cautionary procedures required during application. 3 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. Indicate coverage rate for each type of substrate coating is to be applied. 4 Manufacturer's recommended cleaning procedures. 5 Certification by coating manufacturer substantiating that coating materials comply with speed regulatory requirements. B Samples: 1 Submit one quart of the water repellant coating for field mock-up prior to final installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source: Provide water repellant and an6yrafittf coating systems which are the products of one manufadurer. B Manufacturer: Company speciali~ng m manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Comply with alt Federal regulations and with any State andfor local Air Cluality DisVids regulations for VOC (volatile organic compounds) compliance. Provide products which comply wilh VOC content limits for traffic marking paints as required by all regulations. 1 Verify if seasonal changes affect the work, and coordinate the requirements with the actual commencement of work at the project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 99144 PPC Water Repellant Coatlngs 07180 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 B. Protect coating liquid from freezing. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply coating when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F. 6. Do not apply coaling when temperatures are expelled to fall bebw 32 degrees F within 24 hours. C. Do not apply coating when rain is expected within 24 hours. 1.8 FIELD MOCK-UP A Provide smock-up for the water repellant coating and associated anit~rafitti system on each major type of colored CMU and/or for Gtt-up concrete panels. B Provide a f 0'-0" x f 0-0' area, located as directed by the architect. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with specification requirements, manufacturer of products that may be incorporated in this Contract are as follows: 1. "Weather Seal Siloxane WB° as manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc. 2. 'Hydro8lock' as manufactured by L8M Construction Chemicals Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solids: Minimum 12%. B. VOC Content: Maximum 200 grams per liter calculated on a "VOC per Liter -Less Water Basis.' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 F~(AMINATION A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. B. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, dean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of coating. C. Verify that cracks which exceed 1164 inch wide have been repaired. Verify that masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective, have been raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar. 3.02 PREPARATION A Delay work until masonry mortar substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days. B Delay work until installation of sealants in joints of surfaces to be coated have been completed. B Clean substrate of substances which might interfere with penetratioNadhesion of water repellent coating- Remove kwse particles and foreign matter. Remove al or foreign substance with a chemical solvent which will not affect coaling. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. 3.03 APPLICATION A. The extent of the coating is indicated in subsection 1.02 Summary in this section. 99144 PPC Water Repellant Coatings 07180 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue 3 B Apply coating in accordance wNh manutacturers instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION TO FINISHED AND ADJACENT WORK A. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating. 1. Protect plants and vegetation which might be affected by the water repellant coating fumes or materials. 2. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blowover of water repellant coating. Cover adjoining, adjacent, and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is a possibility of the coating being deposited on surfaces. B. tf applied to unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by a method instructed by coating manufacturer. END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ s ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 99144 PPC Bulldlny Insulatlon 07210 05/25/00 90% Permlt Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Spec cation sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 03300 -Concrete: Foundation wall substrate. 2 Section 04221 -Concrete Masonry Units: Substrate to receive insulation. 3 Section 07514 -Built-Up Asphalt Roofing 4 Section 07840 - Firestopping. 5 Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Acoustical sealant and installation of acoustical insulation in stud partitions. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Rigid board insulation at perimeter foundation walls and as indicated on the drawings. B. Semi-rigid insulatlon and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction. C Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction. D Faced batt insulation in exterior wall construction. E Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. F Unfaced insulation. G Firesaffing insulation in protected openings or penetrations. 1.03 REFERENCES A ASTM C423 -Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B ASTM 0578 -Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Themu3l Insulation. C ASTM 0612 -Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. D ASTM C66S - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation E ASTM D4397 -Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Appligtions. F ASTM C7071 -Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). G ASTM E84 -Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H ASTM E795 -Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Test. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Secton 01330 B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. 99144 PPC Building Insutatlon 07210 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructbns Indicate special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. O. Manufacturer's recommended fastening pattern for powder-actuated-fasteners. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do no: irsl<dl insulation adhesives when temperaiurc or weather cond~4ons are dc!rimental to successul installation 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310. B. Coordinate the Work of Section 09260 for installatbn of acoustigl insulatbn and sealant 1.09 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of powder-actuated fasteners for the auditorium insulation installation. B. Constn,d (1) mockup for the typical interior wall insulation appligtion and (1) mockup for the typical exterior wall insulaton depicting installation conditions above and below 8 feet above the adjacent floor line. Mockup size to be 8 toot high by the width of the insulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BAIT INSULATION A. TYPE 'A' Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, Type III, Class A; preformed glass fiber ball; flame- resistant foil faced. Maximum flame spread rating is 25 and maximum smoke density is 450, as follows: 1. °FRK-faced" as manufactured Owens Coming. 2. "FSK-25° as manufactured by Certainteed Corp. 3. "FSK-25" as manufactured by Schuller International, Inc. B. TYPE 'B' Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; preformed glass fiber ball; unfaced. Maximum flame spread rating rs 25 and maximum smoke density is 450, a5 manufactured by. 1. OwensJCorning Fiberglas. 2. Certainteed Corp 3. Schuller International 2.02 RIGID BOARD INSULATION A. YPE 'C' Rigid Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C578 Type IV; extruded cellular type, acceptable manufacturers indude: 1. "Styrofoam SE° as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company 2. °Amofoam CM' by Amoco Foam Products Company B Rigid board performance requirements: 1. Thermal resistance: Minimum aged R-Value = 5.0. 2. Thickness: 1 inch thick for 'Styrofoam SE" and 'Amofoam CM"; 1 inch minimum thickness for substRutions that achieve the required minimum aged R-value. 3. Board Size: 24x96 inches. 4. Compressive Strength: Minimum 25 psi. 99144 PPC Building Insulation 07210 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 5. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM C2842, 0.3 percent by volume maximum. 6. Edges: Square. 2.03 BLACK FACED ACCOUSTICAL INSULATION A. TYPE 'D' Semi-Rigid Black Faced Acoustical Insulation, roll stock, ASTM C1071 Type ~, fiber glass duct liner roll stock, 1 inch thickness with a black coated mat surface on one side, minimum 60 Sound Absorption Coefficient with Type °A' Mounting as tested by ASTM E795 or ASTM C423, Flame Spread not over 25 and Smoke developed not over 50 as tested by UL 723 or ASTM E84, minimum 3.5 R-value total, aa;eplable manufacturers indude: 1. 'Aeromat Duct Liner as manufactured by Owens Corning 2. "Permacote Linacoustic Standard" as manufadured by Johns-Mannvllle 3. 'Manville Mat Faced Linacoustic Standard' as manufactured by Johns Manville (formerly Schuller International, Inc) 4. 'ToughGard R" as manufadured by CertainTeed Corporation 5. "AkousG-Liner" as manufadured by Manson Insulation Corporation 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Sedan 09260. B. Insulation Fasteners: 1. Adhesive: Type recommended by Insulation manufacturer for application. 2. Insulation Fasteners: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. C Black Faced Acoustkal Insulation Fasteners: 1. Concrete andlor Masonry Fasteners: Provide powder-actuated Insulation Pins 'X-IE" as manufactured by Hilti, Tulsa, OK, or accepted equal. Match fastener length to insulation assemblies, with minimum penetration depth is 1" to 1 1/8" into the concrete and/or CMU substrate a Location: Minimum usage is on all auditorium walls below 8 foot above the adjacent floor line. Maximum usage is on all auditorium walls. 2. Metal impaling pins (stick pins), nominal 3" x 3", minimum 12 ga diameter center pin with length as required, compatible substrate adhesive, screw fasteners and capped washers, provide "GEMCO" as manufactured by Goodloe E Moore Inc, Danville. IL, or as manufactured by AGM Industries, Inc or accepted equal. 1) Location: Maximum usage is on all auditorium walls above 8 foot above the adjacent floor line. No impaling pins wdl be allowed below 8 foot above the adjacent floor line. 3. Black Faced Fastening Pattern: Provide quantity as recommended by the insulation manufadurer but not less than 1 per every 4 square feet or 8 fasteners per each 4'x6' sheet of insulation minimum. D. Tape Polyethylene self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. E. Interior Fire Retardant Vapor Retarder: Class I, Class A rating per UBC~d2 and ASTM E-84, with a maximum flame spread rating is 25 and maximum smoke density is 450, as follows: 1. "WMP-VR Facing" as manufactured by Lamtec Corporation, Flanders, NJ, 800!852-6832 2. 'Griffolyn Type 55-FR" as manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc, Houston, TX, 713/507-4200. 99144 PPC Building Insulation 07210 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01310. B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and Insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesive. C Verify substrate surface is flat, free of txxieycornb, fins, irregularities and materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 0. Verify insulation boards are unbroken and free of damage. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install lhertnal insulation, acoustical insulation, and vapor barrier and/or retarder in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Install thermal Insulation with vapor barrier and/or retarder on warm side of walls and ceilings of building envelope without gaps or voids. Trim neatly to fit spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane between framing members. C. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and elecbical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. D. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. E. Where separate sheet vapor barrier and/or retarder is used, place on warm side of Insulation, and lap and seal sheet barrier joints over member face. F. Extend vapor bonier andfar retarder tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal m place. G. Refer to Section 09260 for installation of bolt acoustical insulation in metal stud partitions. H, Do not install the horizontal suspended auditorium ceilings insulation over lights or within 3 inches of the lights. 3.03 BLACK FACED ACCOUSTICAL INSTALLATION A. Install fasteners above and below 8 feet above the adjacent floor Ilne as indicated In Part 2 of this section. No impaling pins will be allowed below 8 foot above the adjacent floor line. B. Minimum fastener spacing 4'-0' on center. C. Install impaling pins on masonry surfaces with adhesive. Allow the pins to dry for a minimum of 24 hours before insulation application. Terminate the ends of the pins with capped washers.. Cut pins as required to allow the pin cap to be flush with the face of insulation. D. Install impaling pins on GW B walls with 2 self~rilling screws per fastener. E. Install the screw fasteners with integral large plate heads flush with the insulation surface. F. Fix areas where powder-actuated fasteners compress the insulation by aligning the insulation face flush to the fastener head. G. Apply black paint to all exposed fasteners and at (nsulation seams and edges where it is not black. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit Work to be damaged prior to covering insulation. 49144 PPC Building Insulatlon 07210 05/25/00 90% Permft Issue 5 3.04 BUILDING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. See the drawirgs for other thicknesses and locations not indicated in this schedule: Type Descrip[ion Thickness R-Value Locatron A Faced Batt 3 1/Z" R 13 . Exterior auditorium walls below the riser seating platforms. • Exterior auditorium walls in the furred out wall for wall carpet. • Exteror Projection Level exterior walls. B Unlaced Batt 2" R 7 • Exterior auditorium walls (overlaid with fire retardant vapor retarder, overlaid with black faced insulation) 3 112' R t3 Toilet room metal stud wails 6 114" R 19 Metal stud walls between the Lobby and the Projection level. • Metal stud walls between Vestibules and D Black Faced t' 3.5 END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 99144 PPC Metal Siding 07462 05/25/00 90% Permit Iuue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed metal siding, with related fleshings and accessory components. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01785 -Warranties and Borxls B. Section 05120 -Structural Steel. C. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry. D. Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers. F Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems G Section 04221 -Concrete Masonry Walls t.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A792 -Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural {Physical) Quality. B. ASTM D226 -Asphalt-Saturated Roofing Felt for Use in Waterproofing and in oonstruding Buik-Up Roofs. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Siding System: Preformed and prefinished metal siding panels; ske assembled, on furring channels over concrete masonry walls. Provide fabric moisture barrier aril over cmu walls that adjoin an interior space and over all gypsum wallboard walls. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall, as calculated in accordance with local code. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1H80. C. Syslem to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement wkhin system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads: deflection of structural support framing. D- Accommodate positive drainage for moisture entering or condensatpn occurting within panel system to exterior. E. Products of this Section shall provide continuity of vapor and air barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section Ot300. 99144 PPC Metal S7ding 07%2 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit two each samples of siding, 12 x 12 inch size, illustrating finish Odor, sheen, and texture. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum tlxee years dowmented experience. 8. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience, approved by Manufacturer. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to ske under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect siding panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. C. Stack prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. D. Prevent contract with materials which may cause discdoration or staining. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verity that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide ten year Manufacturer warranty under provisions of Section 01785, including coverage for degradation of panel finish including color fading caused by exposure to weather. B General contractor to provide two year watertight vraranry. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ASC Pacfic, Inc. B. BHP Steel Building Products. C. Substitutions: Under provisions d Section 01630. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Metal Siding 1. MS-01: Aluminum-Zmc Alby Coated Steel: ASTM A792. Commercial Quality. 24 gage minimum. 36' wide coverage. A. Pile: Nu-wave Corrugated by BHP Steel building products. B. Finish: Zacktique II, 20 year. B. Perforated Aluminum Panels ' 9914 4 PPC Metal Siding 07462 05/25/00 90% Permft Issue 3 ' 1. MS-02: Brushed Aluminum A. 22 ga B. 60 degree staggered centers ' C. Hole size:.125 D. Centers: .1875 E. Open Area: 40.3% ' F. Border: 1" all sides,'/z° @ F1/A911 Only C. MS-03: As for MS-01 with perforation holes per MS-02. ' 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient; ' ultraviolet and ozone-resistant; color as selected. B. Sealants: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of system. ' D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; without soft neoprene washers, stainless steel; fastener cap same color as exterior panel. E. Paint: Asphalt base F. Fabric Moisture Barrier: Provide synthetic fabric and sealing tape, as manufactured by ' 1. "Tyvek HomeW rap" by Dupont 2. "Pink Wrap" by Owens Corning. F.. Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturer for application to masonry. 2.04 COMPONENTS ' A. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets. B. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system as ' detailed. Exposed fasteners same finish as panel system. C. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, Fascias, and Infills: Same material and finish as exterior sheets, 24 gauge; brake formed to required profiles. ' D Tri ll i d int wall b d f r dh r d in t ti t r i r son as indic ted dr win s . m an s o a e e s a a on on ex er o an er o ma ry s a on a g . ' E. Furring Channels: 7/8 inch x 2 1/2 inch galvanized 24 gage at 24 inches o.c minimum. F. Anchors: Stainless steel. ' G. Hanger Wire: Galvanized 8 gage carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft tempered, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized for stress according to ASTM C 635 and the UBC 25-2. ' 2.05 FABRICATION A. Forrn sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. ' B. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. C. Form siding panels for lap seams. ~ ' D. Fabricate comers in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch returns and seal. 99144 PPC Metal Siding 07462 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate framing under provisions of Section 01040. B. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panel system. 3.02 INSTALLATION -MOISTURE BARRIER A. Install one layer moisture barrier horizontally on all gypsum drywall walls and on cmu walls that adjoin interior spaces that receive metal siding. B. Weather lap edges 6 inches, minimum; and ends 6 inches, minimum. C. Stagger vertical joints of each layer. D. Securely fasten in place. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL SIDING A. Install metal siding system on walls and soffits in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contract with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Fasten siding to furring channels over structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. End lap minimum 2 inches. E. Provide expansion joints where indicated. F. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. G. Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset from True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/8 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. C. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clear water. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing 07515 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 05300 -Steel Decks: Metal roof deck surface. 2 Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood Hailers and cants; and gypsum sheathing. 3 Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Weather protection to base flashings. 4 Section 07724 -Roof Hatches. 5 Division 15 Mechanical -for coordination of roof traffic pad locations. 6 Refer to the Mechanical and Architectural drawings for roof curb information and details. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Roof insulation, roofing membrane, tapered saddles, drainage crickets and base flashings. B Roof traffic pads as indicated on the drawings. C Contractor verification of the use or non-use of a thermal barrier board with the proposed roofing insulation over areas that are not fireproofed. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. B. ASTM D312 -Asphalt Used in Roofing. C. ASTM D1863 -Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-Up Roofs D. ASTM D2178 -Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. E. ASTM D2822 -Asphalt Roof Cement. F. ASYM D4586 -Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. G. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) -Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. H Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1 UL 1256: Standard For Fire Test Of Roof Deck Construction 2 UL Roofing Materials & Systems Directory I FM (Factory Mutual Research Corporation) -Wind Lift Requirements 1 FM 4450: Approval Standard For Class 1 Insulated Steel Deck Roofs J UBC (Uniform Building Code): UBC Standard 15-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate setting plan for tapered insulation, mechanical fastener layout, and joint or termination detail conditions. 99144 PPC SBS Modlfled Bitumen Roofing 07515 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 C. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane and bitumen materials, base flashing materials, vapor retarder, protective covering, and insulation. For insulation provide aged thermal values and documentation showing compliance with FM 4450 and/or UL: 1256. Provide product data on the thermal barrier board if the insulation does not pass FM 4450 and/or UL 1256. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 01400. Indicate procedures followed; ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. F. Applicator Qualifications: Submit written documentation of applicator's qualifications including evidence that applicator is licensed or approved by the manufacturer and listing five successfully completed projects similar in scope and complexity to work of this Section with current phone numbers of Architect and Owner contacts for verification. Submit documentation of designated project foreman's training certification by manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation and who shall have certification of training by roofing system manufacturer. O Single Source: Provide sheet materials, bituminous materials and flashing materials from a single source manufacturer to insure component compatibility. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable UBC and state and local code for roof assembly fire hazard requirements. B Minimum Fire Hazard Classification: UL Class B C Uplift Requirements: I-90 Factory Mutual. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene apre-installation conference within two weeks prior to commencing Work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01040. B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products in Manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. C. Store products in weather protected environment, Gear of ground and moisture. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure. D. Stand roll materials on end. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. 99144 PPC 585 Modified Bitumen Rooting 07515 05/25/00 90% Penmk Issue 3 B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01040. B. Coordinate the Work of installing associated metal flashings as the Work of this Section proceeds. 1.11 WARRANTY A Manufacturer Standard No Dollar Limit (NDL) Labor and Material Warranty: 1 Roofing Contractor shall submit a copy of the Manufacturers' Standard Warranty(ties). In addition, all standard and implied warranties for product performance are considered in effect upon acceptance of the roof by Owner from the Date of Substantial Completion. The Manufacturer is responsible for repair and/or replacement of defective materials under this provision. The roofing system manufacturer shall guarantee to maintain the roof system in a water tight condition at his own expense for the length of the Warranty. 2 Length of the Warranty: Ten (10) years from the Date of Substantial Condition. B. The ConUactor shall provide a written warranty guaranteeing all roofing, roof insulation, and Flashing against defects of workmanship and materials for a period of two years from the date of Final Acceptance and shall maintain the roofed areas in watertight condition during this period. The warranty shall be delivered to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the Work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. SBS mod~ed bitumen, NRCA system description: MBS-I-T-M, as follows: 1 Two (2) overlapping layers of insulation. a Mechanically fastened. 2 One (1) layer of asphalt-coated glass fiber base sheet. a Mechanically fastened. 3 One (1) layer of reinforced or non-woven SBS mineral surfaced cap sheet a Torch or heal fused applied. B Class B roof as per UBC Table 15•A. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A Acceptable Manufacturer's: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: B Asphalt-coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet: Provide ASTM D 4601-95, Type II, 36 inch wide roll stock, 0.20 Ibslsq ft minimum weight, as follows: 1 "PermaPly 28" Johns Manville @800 922 5922. 2 'F52 GlasBase" Fields Corporation, Tacoma, WA @ B00 627 4098. 3 Soprema @800 356 3521 4 Malarkey Roofing Company @ 503 283 1191 99144 PPC SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing 07515 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 C SBS Mineral Cap Sheet:: Provide ASTM D 5147 tested, reinforced SBS modifed bitumen membrane roll stock, 0.90 Ibs/sq ft minimum weight, with a mineral surface, the color is red or as selected from the manufacturer's standard color range by the architect, as follows: 1 "Dynamax" by Johns Manville 2 "Elastophene PS" as manufactured by Soprema @800 356 3521. 3 'M68 RubrCap" by Fields Corporation 4 Malarkey Roofing Company. 2.04 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type II or Type III as recommended by roofing manufacturer. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586. C. Industrial Roof Cement: ASTM D2822, Type II. 2.05 INSULATION MANUFACTURERS A. Verify with the FSR manufacturer that the following insulation products are compatible with the membrane and that they will not void the warranty 1 "Foamular 250 "extruded polystryene as manufactured by UC Industries. 2 "E'NRG'Y Z" polyisocyanurate as manufactured by Johns Manville. 3 "ACFoam" polyisocyanurate as manufactured by Atlas Roofing Corporation. 4 "Amofoam-CM" extruded polystryene as manufactured by Tenneco Building products. 5 "XEPS InsuHoam "extruded polystrene as manufactured by Westem Insulfoam. 6 "Polyiso Insulfoam " polyisocyanurate as manufactured by Western Insulfoam. 7 "Styrofoam Deckmate" extruded polysVene as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company. 8 Substitutions under section 01630. 2.06 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Foam insulation material requirements: 1 Provide two (2) layers of overlapping insulation board. 2 Minimum Thermal Value: 17 R-Value as tested under ASTM C 518. a The R-Value is calculated at 5.56 R value per inch of thickness. b The drawings show a nominal thickness of 3 inches. 3 Minimum Compressive Strength: 20 psi as tested under ASTM D 1621. 4 Minimum Water Absorption: Less than 1°k by volume as tested under ASTM C 209. 4 Required Testing requirements: ASTM C1289-95, Type II 5 ASTM E B4 and UBC Standard 8-1 testing requirements: a Maximum flame spread of 75. b Maximum smoke developed-rating of 450. 6 For UBC 2602.5.3 Thermal Barrier equivalency, provide one of the following: a UL 1256 b FM 4450 49144 PPC SBS Modified Blhimen Roofln9 07515 05/25/00 90% PermltIssue 5 B Tapered Insulation Board: 1 "Tapered Fesco Board" or Tapered E'NRG'Y 2 as manufactured by Johns Manville. 2.07 THERMAL BARRIER BOARD A. Thermal barrier materials with an index of 15 as tested with UBC Standard 15-2: 1 1Q" thick gypsum wallboard. 2 1!2' thick FRT plywood panels and required edge blocking. 3 1/2 inch "Dens-Deck Barrier Board" by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 208 ACCESSORIES A Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by Factory Mutual and system manufacturer; length required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate. "UltraFast Fasteners' by Johns Manville, or approved. B Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Straps: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard, preformed, configuration as detailed. 'FesCanY by Johns Manville, or approved. C Traffic Pads: Layout as shown on Drawings; "Whitewalk' roof traffic pads by WR Meadows, or as accepted. D Flashing Materials: ASTM D5147, polyester mat reinforced, granular-surfaced, Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) mod~ed bitumen base flashing. 'DynaFlex" by Johns Manville, or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site condKions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains, and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. F. Verify roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant and nailing are in place. 3.02 THERMAL BARRIER BOARD APPLICATION A Provide a thermal barrier board base layer over the steel deck where applied fireproofing is not shown 'rf the insulation does not pass the UL 1256 or the FM 4450 standards. B Bond the thermal bartier board with exterior glue, with edges supported by blocking, tongue and groove joints or other approved edge support. 3.03 INSULATION APPLICATION A. Mechanically fasten insulation to deck in accordance with insulation manufacturers insWCtbns. 8. Place the second layer of insulation with joints staggered from joints of first layer. C. Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. D. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 99144 pp~ SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing 07515 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 6 E. Install protection board over insulation In acxordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 BASE SHEET APPLICATION A. Allow the base sheet to relax, keep sheet taut, start fastening at center of sheet and work in opposite directions. Push all wrinkles and buckles ahead as fastening proceeds. 6 Mechanically fasten the base sheet to the insulation, according to the manufacturer's recommendation, in accordance to achieve a FM I-90 rating. 3.05 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Provide ventilation as required to maintain exposures to hazardous concentration of airborne contaminants at or below the allowable levels specified by OSHA a NIOSH. B Provide sufficient fire extinguishing equipment for use where torch welding roof work is being done. C Apply base fleshings, roof vents, control and expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown. D Coordinate installation of roof drains and related fleshings to NRCA recommendations E Apply felts smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths, or tears. F Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) at Point of Application: In accordance with NRCA. G Torch adhere the membrane to the base sheet m accordance with the manufacturers InstruGiOnS. 3.06 ROOF TRAFFIC PADS A. Traffic pads or walkways are shown on the architectural drawings. The roofing contractor shall coordinate the location of the pads adjacent to the roof top mechanical units (RTU's). and place the pads on the side of the equipment that would be used for typical filter replacement andlor for typical unit maintenance. B Apply another layer of SBS cap sheet where the roof pads are indicated. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. C. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daly during installation of the Work. D. Field Testing: To ascertain bitumen quantities placed. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by bitumen or any other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surtaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured flnistres puled by work of this section. 3.09 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces. ' 99144 PPC SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing 07515 ~ 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 7 END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Roofing 07610 05/25/00 90% Pertnlt Issue Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed, standing seam metal roof, roof Insulation, associated integral fleshings, and underlayment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01785 - W arranlies and Bonds. B. Section 05310 -Steel Decks: Roof deck construction. C. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry. D. Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Section 07724 -Roof Hatches. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A361 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process for Roofing and Siding. B. ASTM D226 -Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. C. SMACNA -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, fleshings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples in size illustrating metal roofing mounted on plywood backing illusrating typical standing seam, material, and finish. D. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, and characteristics. E. Installation Instructions: Submd specified Uade association installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal roof installations with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Roofing 07610 05/25/00 90°k Permit Issue Page 2 B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide twenty year warranty under provisions of Section 01785. Include coverage for structural failure; perforation, rupture, or leak due to corrosion. Warranty to cover entire system, including framing, flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and accessories. B. Contractor's Warranty: Provide two year warranty under provisions of Section 01785. Include coverage for degradation of metal finish, water tightness, and integrity of seals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. "Curved Select Seam" by BHP Steel Building Products, USA Inc. B. "Grandcurve" by Fabral. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. MR-02: Sheet Steel: ASTM A792, Grade 40; 24 gage core steel; Zincalume or Galvalume base finish with a clear acrylic protective surface coating. Provide shape and profile as listed under 2.01 FABRICATORS. 2.03 INSULATION A. Insulation Board: "UltraGard Gold Iso Board" by Schuller (calculated at 5.56 R value per inch of thickness), or approved; 3 Inch thickness; composite Rvalue = 17. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Zinc coated and prefinished to match sheetmetal where exposed to view; with soft neoprene washers. B. Self-Adhering Roofing Underlayment: Provide sheet membrane underlayment as follows: the Asphalt Application below is used with light colored roofing in all geographic areas except for the southwestern United Slates, which uses the Butyl Application below. 1. Asphalt Application: Cold applied, self-adhering, 40 mils minimum thickness sheet memebrane composed of rubberized asphalt and/or SBS modified asphalt with a slip resistant working surface. Subject to the requirements of Section 01630, provide one of the following: a. Ice & Water Shield by Grace Construction Products b. Rain Proof \ Ice 8 Water Guard by Protecto Wrap c. #170 Artic Seal by Malarkey Roofing 2. Butyl Application: Cold applied, self-adhering, 30 mils minimum thickness sheet memebrane composed of buytl rubber with a slip resistant working surface. Subject to the requirements of Section 01630, provide one of the following: 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Roofing 07610 05!25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 3 a. Vycor Ultra by Grace Construction Products C. Sealant: One-part polyurethane type, low modulus, Type II, Class A, as manufactured by PRC. Tremco, Sonneborn, Contech, General Electric Pecora, Woodmount, or approved. D. Bedding Compound: Butyl type, 1 x 1/8 inch, as manufactured by Tremco, Chemco, or approved. E. Cleats: Continuous, cold-rolled steel, galvanized; 20 gage. F. Concealed CIIps: 12 gage galvanized Z base, 4-1l2 inches long with moveable, No. 301, half-hard stainless steel tab interlocking with panel. G. Z-Channels: 18 gage galvanized steel, 3-1/2 inches wide. H. Anchors: Per manufacturer's recommendations and as required to meet or exceed 90 mph Wind Exposure C rating. I. Protection Board: ASTM C728 1 1/2 inch thick perlite type protection board directly over steel decking. "Fecso Roof Insulation Board" by Schuller, or approved 2.05 SHOP FABRICATION A. Provide manufacturers "Narrow Batten' roof panels with snap-on narrow batten caps nominal 3!8 inch wide, nominal 1 inch high, spaced at nominal 16 inch or 16-1/4 inches on center, and nominal panel width of 16 inches. B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Form panels in full length of sloped roof length. D. Fabricate each metal flashing section in 10 foot runs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect roof deck to verify deck is dry, free of snow or ice, clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped. B. Verify correct placement of wood Hailers and insulation positioning between Hailers. C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing strips located. D. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and Geats before starting installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and metal roofing in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Roofing 07610 05125!00 90% Pertnk Issue Page 4 B. Apply underlayment in single layer laid perpendicular to slope; weather lap edges 4 inches and nail in place. Minimize nail quantity. C. Cleat and seam all joints. D. Space and anchor clips in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Space Z-channels 24 inches o.c. Spot weld to steel deck. F. Use bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or metal and felts. G. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Conned units with specified joints and sealants. Fasten to surfaces at 6 inches o.c. minimum, with approved fasteners. H. Insulate dissimilar metal and incompatible surfaces with No. 30 felt, or as approved. I. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.04 STANDING SEAM ROOFING A. Space standing seams at 16 inch or 16-1!4 inch oc. B. Lay sheets with long dimension perpendicular to eaves. Apply pans beginning at eaves. C. Lock deals into seams. D. At eaves and gable ends, terminate roofing by hooking over edge strip. E. Finish standing seams 1 inch high on flat surfaces. F. Bend up one side edge 1-1l2 inches and other edge 1-3l4 Inches. G. Make first fold 1!4 inch wide single fold and second fold 1!2 inch wide, providing locked portion of standing seam, 5 plies in thickness. H. Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degree angle. I. Terminate standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down with tapered fold. J. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 10 feet in length. Lap joints 6 inches in direction of drainage. K. Extend valley sheet minimum 6 inches under roofing sheets. L. At valley, double fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 16-1/4 inches oc. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finistred Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surface. 1 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Roofing 07670 ~ 05!25!00 90% Permit Issue Page 5 ' END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Canopy Roofing 07615 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed metal roof and accessories for the exterior canopy. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01785 - Warranties and Bonds B. Section 05120 -Structural Sleel Decks. C. Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. D Section 09900 Painting 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A361 -Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process for Roofing and Siding. B. ASTM D226 -Asphalt-Saturated Organic Fell Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. C. SMACNA -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples in size illustrating metal roofing mounted on plywood backing illustrating typical standing seam, material, and finish. D. Product Data: Provide data on metal types, finishes, and characteristics. E. Installation Instructions: Submit specified trade association installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator and Installer. Company specializing in sheet metal roof installations with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Canopy Roofing 07615 05/25/00 90% Permlt Iswe Page 2 C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide twenty year warranty under provisions of Section 01785. Include coverage for structural failure; pertoration, rupture, or leak due to corrosion. Warranty to cover entire system, including framing, flashings, counterflashings, gutters, and accessories. B. Contractor's Warranty: Provide two year warranty under provisions of Section 01785. Include coverage for degradation of metal finish, water tightness, and integrity of seals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. BHP Steel Building Products, USA Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. MR-02: Sheet Steel: ASTM A792, provide gage as required for span with 22 gage minimum; 36" wide coverage, and as follows: 1. Profile: "Nu-Wave Corrugated° by BHP Steel Building Products, 2. Finish: "Zacktique II 20 Year" 8. Profile: 1. Flat where shown on drawings. 2. Non crimp curved when shown on drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Zinc coated and prefinished to match sheetmetal where exposed to view; with soft neoprene washers. B Sealant: One-part polyurethane type, low modulus, Type II, Class A, as manufactured by PRC, Tremco, Sonneborn, Contech, General Electric Pecora, Woodmount, or approved. C Anchors: Neoprene gasketed screws per manufacturer's recommendations and as required to meet or exceed 90 mph Wind Exposure C rating. 2.05 SHOP FABRICATION A Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B Form panels in full length of sloped roof length, and fabricate each metal flashing section In 10 foot runs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 1 1 1 1 1 99144 PPC Sheet Metal l,anopy Roofing 07615 05/25/00 90"/o Permit Issue Page 3 A. Inspect roof deGc to verNy deck is dry, free of snow or Ice, Gean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, property sloped. B. Verify correct placement of wood Hailers and insulation positioning between Hailers. C. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place, and nailing sUips located. D. Verify roofing termination and base fleshings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting Installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install metal roofing in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. B Cleat and seam all joints. C Space and anchor Gips in accordance wfTh manufacturer's recommendations. D llse bedding compound for joints between metal and bitumen or metal and feNs. E Secure fleshings in place using concealed fasteners. Connect units with specified joints and sealants. Fasten to surfaces at 6 inches o.c. minimum, with approved fasteners. F Insulate dissimilar metal and incompatible surfaces with No. 30 feR, or as approved. G Seal metal joints watertight. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit Vaffic over unprotected roof surface. END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Plashing and Trim 0762C 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, appty to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Metal flashing. 2. Preformed metal wall flashing. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 4 Section'Concrete Masonry Unfts" for wall flashing subsVate. 2. Division 7 Section'Roof Hatches" for roof hatches. 3. Division 13122 Section "Metal Building Systems". 4. Division 15 Mechanical Sections for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, vents, peneVations, and otties manufactured roof accessory units 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather wkhout failing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified Gashing material and fabricated product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualfications: Engage an experience Installer who hes completed sheet metal Gashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work For proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ-50 coating. Grade 40 (ASTM A 792M, Class AZ-150 coating, Grade 275) or to suit project conditions, with SS percent aluminum, not less than 0.0396 inch (t.0 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Meal Wall Flashing (MFai# Drawing Tag): AluminurrZinc Alby-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ-SG coating, Grade 40 (ASTM A 792M, Class AZ-150 coating, Grade 275) or to suit project conditions, with 55 percent aluminum, not tens than 0.0359 inch (24 gauge) thick, as follows: 1. MF-Ot Galvanized: Provitle a natural, standard zinc galvalume finish. 2. MF-02: Same as MF-01, rolled and 18 Ga. 22 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES ' 99144 PPC Sheet Metai Flashing and Trim 07620 05/25 /00 90% Permit Issue 2 A. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposetl heads with material being fastened. B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. ' C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; rwnhardehirg, nonskinnirg, nondrying, nonmigreting sealant. D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of ' components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as speclfled in Division 7 Section'Joint Sealants' E. Epoxy Seam Sealer. 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seartrcementing compound, recommended by ' aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather- , resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. G. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed: noncorrosive; size ' and thickness required for performance. H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based. ' I. Fabric Moisture Bartier. Provide synthetic fabric and sealing tape, as manufactured by: 1. 'Tyvek HomeWrap' by Dupont Company, Inc , 2. 'Pink Wrap' by Owens Coming. 3. 30th. Asphalt Impregnated Felt as indicated on drawings. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL t A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's'Architacturel Sheet Metal ManuaP that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. ' B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. ' C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is wkhout excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to forth hems. ' D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoWng seams i» sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feel 13 mj with no joints allowed wfthln ' 24 inches (610 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficientty weatherproof and waterproof, forth expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed ' within joints). F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. ' G. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coaling concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. ' H. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 03/25/0!190% Permit Issue ~ 1. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. ~. S¢e: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listetl below for each application aril metal. 8. Base Flashing, counterflashing, equipment support flashing and roof-penetration flashing. Fabricate from the following material and match the colbr of the metal roof: t. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276 inch (0.7 mm} thick. C. Metal Wall Flashing: Provide'S-lock' configurations at the seams. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verity that Work may propedy commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' Anchor units of Work severely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing arrd trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpanslon, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specfied not to be soltlered. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmovirg seams In sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Separations: Separate metal from noncompaGble metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. F. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment Installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. G. Roof•Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation wllh roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION - MOISTURE BARRrER 99144 PPC Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 A. Install one layer moisture banier horizontally on all gypsum drywall walls and on cmu walls that adjoin interior spaces that receive metal wall flashing. B. Weather lap edges 6 inches, minimum; and ends 6 inches, minimum. C. Stagger vertical joints of each layer. D. Securely fasten in place. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL WALL FLASHING A. Install metal wall flashing system on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide expansion joints where indicated. C. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal Flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07620 99144 PPC Roof Hatdxs 07724 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue i PARTS GENERAL ~.t RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: t Section 05515 -Metal Fabrications: Access ladder 2 Division 7 Roofing System Section(s). 3 Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 4 Section 09900 -Paint 1.2 SUMMARY A Prefabricated roof hatches, with integral support curbs, operable hardware, and counterflashings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. ProduU Data: Submit the following for each type of product specified, i Data on unit construction, sizes, confirmration, jointing mettxxls and locations when applicable, and attachment method. 2 Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation criteria, interface with adjacent components. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable roof hatch manufacturer's include the following: 1 Model'LH' as manufactured by Dur-Red Products 2 Model "M' as manufactured by Milcor Limited Partnership 3 Model 'S' as manufactured by the Brice Company 4 Model "SH 23" as manufactured by ASI, Inc. 2.02 ROOF HATCH A Unit Size: 2'-f3' x 3'-0" size, single leaf type; with a 12' high curb. B. Integral Steel Curb: t4 gage galvanized steel wdh 1 inch rigid glass fiber insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting. C. Flush Steel Cover: 14 gage galvanized steel; 1 inch glass fiber insulation; sandwiched by 22-gage steel interior liner; continuous gaskets to provide weatherproof seal. D. Hardware: 1. Compressbn sprang operator and shock absorbers. 2. Steel manual pull handle for interior and exterior operation. 3. Steel hold open ann with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release. 4. Components cadmium plated finish. 9914a PPC Roof Hatches 07724 05/25/00 90% Pernik Issue 2 E. Hinges: Manufacturers recommended type. 2.02 LADDER SAFETY POSTS A. Provide dual safety post system coMorming to mechanical code requirements. B Acceptable materials and construction: Steel, telescoping tubular sections: automatic locking devices. Stainless steel spring balancing mechanism for up and down movement. Black enamel finish. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components free of visual distortion or defects. Weld corners and joints. B. Provide for removal of condensation occuning within components or assembly. C. Fit components for weathertight assembly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate with installation Of rooTing system and related fleshings for weathertight installation. C. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials a dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Applied Freprooflty 07810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 01230 - Aflemates 2 Section 01785 -Warranties and Bonds 3 Section 05120 -Structural Steel 4 Section 05210 -Steel Joists 5 Section 05300 -Steel Deck 6 Section 07840 - Firestopping 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Spray-applied fire resistive materials, as indicated on the drawings, and on any steel columns and the stnictural frame as defined by the Building Code, that are not to receive Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E119 -Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. ASTM E805 - Tesl Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Flre-Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members. D. ASTM E736 -Test Method for CohesionlAdhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. E. ASTM E760 -Standard Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. F. ASTM E761 -Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members. G. ASTM E859 -Test Method for Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials (SFRMs) Applied to Structural Members. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sprayed-Applied Fireproofing Systems: Provide free rated assembly ratings conforming to Uniform Building Code. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. Provide schedule of application thickness. 99144 PPC Applied Flneproofing 07810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 C. Test Reports: Indicating the following: 1. Bond Strength of Fireproofing: ASTM E760, tested to provide minimum bond strengRh twenty times weight of fireproofing materials. 2. A copy of the UL Rated Assembly for each type of rating condition required or different spray material used. The copy should incude the complete assembly showing fasteners, system components, manufacturers, etc. as required to build the UL referenced roofing assembly. 3. Reports from reputable independent testlng agencies, of product proposed for use, which indicate coMormance to ASTM E119 and ASTM E84. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Independent Testing Laboratoys field test reports. F. Manufacturer's Field Service Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 01400. 1. Qualifications of manufacturers field observer. 2. Observer's report 3. Contractor's report of observer's activities on site. 4. Indicate environmental conditons under which fireproofing materials were installed. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator. Company specializng in applying the work of this section approved by manufacturer. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings. B. Provide certificate of compliance for fireproofing materials to auttwrily having jurisdiction indicating approval for use on this project. 1.08 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of spray applied freproofing under provisions of Sedan 01400. B. Construct mockup, 10 sq. ft. Conform to project requirements for fire ratings, thickness and density of application. C. Examine installation within one hour of applicatbn to determine variance due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity. D. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and method of application as necessary. Remove materials and re-construct mockup. E. Independent Testing Laboratory: 1. Test instatled fireproofing mockup for Iwnd strength in accordance with ASTM E736. 2. Test installed fireproofing mockup for dry density in accordance with ASTM E605. 99144 PPC APPiied Fireproofing 07810 05/25/00 90Mo Permit Issue 3 F. Mockup may remain as part of the Work N approved by Architect. H independent testing of mockup indicates that bond strength, or dry density, do not meet specified criteria, remove mockup and repeat until mockup installation meets specified criteria. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate material and surrounding air is below 40 degrees F. B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during and 24 hours after application, to dry material. C. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work in conjunction with placement of ceiling hanger tabs, mechanical component hangers and electrical components. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard five year warranty under provisions of Section 01765, including coverage for fireproofing to remain free from cracking, checking, dusting, flaking, spoiling, separation, and blistering Reinstall or repair failures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. INTERIOR USE: Provide one or more of the following products. Substitutions will be considered under provisions of Section 01630. 1. Unprotected Floor/Ceiling Assemblies a 'Blaze Shield II', UL D902, as manufactured by Isolatek International b 'Cafco 300', UL D902, as manufactured by Isolatek International. c "Monokote MK-6", UL D925, as manufactured by W.R. Grace CO. d "Mandolite CP-2", UL D922, as manufactured by Mandoval. e "Dendamix" , UL N827, as manufactured by American Sprayed Fibers, Inc. 2 Roof/Ceiling Assemblies a 'Blaze Shield II', UL P819, as manufactured by Isolatek International. b 'Cafco 300", UL P723, as manufactured by Isolatek International. c "Monokote MK-6", UL P732 as manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. d "Mandolite CP-2', UL P722 as manufactured by Mandoval. e 'Dendamix' , UL P827, as manufactured by American Sprayed Fibers, Inc ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sprayed-Applied Fireproofing: Conforming to following requirements: i. Bond Strength: ASTM E736, per manufacurer's recommendations. 2 Bond Impact' ASTM E760 no cracking, }taking or delaminahon. 99144 PPC Applied Fireproofing 07610 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 3. Dry Density: ASTM Ef>05, per manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Compressive Strength: ASTM E761, per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Air Erosion: ASTM E859. maximum 0.005 gm/sq ft. weight loss at 24 hours at 15 mph; 0.000 gm/sq ft. weight loss after 4 twurs at 29 mph. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 0 and smoke development 0 when tested in accordance with ASTM EB4. B. Reinforcement: 1-inch hexagonal wire mesh, No. 20 SWG galvanized steel wire; fiberglass with minimum 6.0 grams per s.f. C Water: Gean, potable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verifyr that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that dips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing, are in place. C. Verify ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned unlit fireproofing work Is complete. D. Verify that voids and cracks in substrate are filled, and projectans are removed where fireproofing is exposed to view as a finish material. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may eNect bond of fireproofing. B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond by scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or sandblasting. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces not scheduled for fireproofing and equipment from damage by overspray, fait-out, and dusting. B. Close oft and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply fireproofing in sufficient thickness to achieve rating with as many passes necessary to cover with monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspect the installed fireproofing after application and curing for integrity of fire protection, prior to concealment of Work. I t 1 1 1 99144 PPC Applied Flreprooflny 07810 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue 5 C. Re-inspect the installed fireproofing for integrity of fire protection, after installation of subsequent Work. D. Independent Testirg Laboratory 1. Test installed fireproofing for bond strength in accordance with ASTM E736. 2. Test installed fireproofing for dry density in accordance with ASTM E605. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debris. C. Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not required to be fireproofed. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. See the drawings for locations and extent of spray applrod fireproofing. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Intumescent Mastlc Freprooflng 07815 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Intumescent spray-applied fireproofing and painting, as indicated on the drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 05120 -Structural Steel B Division 5 Sections: Structural steel, steel joists and metal fabrications with reference to primer receiving fire protection materials. C. Section 07250 Applied Fireproofing. D Section 07270 - Firestopping. E Secton 09900 -Painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A SSPC -Dry Film Thickness Testing. B ASTM D2240 - Durometer Hardness C ASTM D2794 -Impact Resistance D ASTM D4060-Abrasion Resistance E ASTM D4541 -Bond Strength F ASTM E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G ASTM E119 -Method For Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. H ASTM E736 Adhesion /Cohesion I ASTM E761 -Compressive Strength 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Sectbn 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. InGude a copy of the latest list of approved compatible steel primers. C. Test Reports: Indicating the following: 1. Fire test reports of fireproofirg application to substrate materials sim~aar to project conditions. 2. Reports from reputable independent testing agencies, of product proposed for use, which indicate conformance to ASTM E119 and ASTM E84. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiting special attention. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: SubmH under provisions of Section 01400. Indigte envmonmental condtions under which fireproofing materials were installed. 99144 PPC Irrtumescent Mastic Flrepr»ofing 07815 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this section approved by manufacturer. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings. B. Provide cert~cete of compliance for fireproofing materials to authority having jurisdictbn indicating approval for use on this projeC. 1.07 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of applied intumescent fireproofing under provisions of Section 01400. 8. Construct mockup, 10 sq.ft. Conform to project requirements for fire ratings, thickness and density of application. C. Examine installation within one hour of application to determine variance due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity. D. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and mettwd of application as necessary. Remove materials and reconstruct mockup. E. Mockup may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of substrate material and surcounding air is below 50 degrees F. B. Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during and 24 hours after application, to dry material. C. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work in conjunction with placement of ceiling hanger tabs, mechanical component hangers and electrical components. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate application of primers performed m Section 05120, with primers specfied in this Section. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. "A/D Firefilm' with A/D "Colorcoat" as manufactured by A/D Fire Protection Systems B. "Cafco SprayFilm' with "Sprayfilm Topseal" as manufactured by Isolatek International 99144 PPC Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing 07815 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 C "Fire-Sorb 1001' with "Fire-Sorb Primer" as manufactured by Nu-Chem, Inc., Sl. Louis, MO. D Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Primer: The primer used on the structural steel, steel joists and metal fabrications shall be approved by the intumescent mastic fireproofing manufacturer. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. C. Finish: Smooth. D. Topcoat Colors: 1 FI-01 Natural color of the fireproofing material 2 FI-02 Black color to match P-01 color specified in section 09900. 3 FI-03 Red color to match P-05 color specified in section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Applicator to certify in writing to the Architect that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that dips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate freproofing, are in place. C. Verify ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing work is complete. D. Verify that voids and cracks in substrate are filled, and projections are removed where fireproofing is exposed to view as a finish material. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces of unprimed steel members in accordance with SSPC-SP-6 or SSPC-SP-2. B. Clean primed steel members of dirt, dust, grease. oil, loose material, or other matter which may effect bond of fireproofing. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond by scraping, brushing, snubbing, or sandblasting. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces not scheduled for fireproofing and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting. B. Cbse off and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply primer, reinforcement, and fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply fireproofing in sufficient thickness to achieve rating with as many passes necessary to cover with mondithic blanket of uniform density and texture. C. Apply finish colors over the fireproofing. 1 99144 PPC Intumescent Mastic fireproofing 07815 05/25/00 90% Permit Iswe 4 305 FIELD QUALfTY CONTROL , A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. ' B. Inspect the installed fireproofing after application and curing for integrity of fire protection, prior to concealment of Work. C. Re-Inspect the installed fireproofing for Irrtegrity of fire protection, after installation of subsequent ' Work. 3.06 CLEANING , A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess material, overspray, droppings, and debns ' C. Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not required to be freproofed 3.07 SCHEDULE , A. See the drawings for locations and extent of Intumescent fireproofing. F S CT , END O E ION 99144 PPC Flrestoppirg 07840 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. OraNnngs and general provisbns of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, appty to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07810 -Applied Fireproofing: Spray applied fireproofing. 2. Section 0422'1 -Concrete Masonry Units: Masonry fireproofing. 3. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing. 4. Division 15 -Mechanical: Mechanical work requiring firestoppirg. 5. Division 76 -Electrical, Electrical work regwring firestopping. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Sodety for Testing and Matenals (ASTM): 1. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code 2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 7479 Fire Tests of Through-Peneration Firestops 2. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 3. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Fills, Voids or Cavity Materials (XHHW ) b. Firestop Devices (XHJq 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on product charadenstics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Manufacturer's spec cations and other data needed to prove compliance wdh the specified requirements- D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and Installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's and Applicators standard warranties. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializng in manufacturing the products speed in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Single source responsibility for firestopping materials: Obtain firestop materials from single manufachxer for each different product required. 99144 PPG Flrestopping 07!340 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E$14, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. 2. Proposed firestop materials and mettwds shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Sequence Work under the provisions of Section 01100. B. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be Installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Deliver to the Archlted signed copies of the following written warranties against material failure: 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering firestop materials. 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. 3M Contractor Products. B. USG Interiors, Inc. C. RedorSeal Corporation. D. Hilli Corporation. E. Firestop Systems Inc., Delta, B. C., Canada F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.02 MATERIALS A Safing: Mineral fiber matting, 8 Ib./cu.ft. density, unlaced. B. Firestopping Material: Single component silicone elastomerlc intumescent caulk with either self- leveling S/L or non-sag N/S capabilities. C. Intumescent composite sheets Or wrap sticks. D. Penetration sealing systems. E. Moldable putty, pads, slides or pillows. F. Fire rating of firestop assemblies shall be 1 or 2 hours, but In no case less than the rating of the time-rated floor or wall assembly. 99144 PPC Firestopping 07840 OS/2S/00 90a/o Pemtlt Issue 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface to receive firestop system products in accordance with manufacWrer's insWctions for surface preparation. 1. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond. B. Verify that penetrations and joints are propedy sized C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions relative to temperature and humidity conditions, before, during and after installation of firestopping materials. D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with published Through- Penetration Firestop Systems in UL's Fire Resistance Directory or the publication of another approved independent laboratory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of firestopping materials. 1. Apply phmer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 3. Seal all joints to ensure an air and water-resistant seal, capable to withstand compression and extension due to thermal, wind or seismic joint movement. 4. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. 5. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating to uniform density and teMure. C. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items requiring firestopping. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Examine sealed penetration and joint areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION ~r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ s t ~ ~ s r ~r ~ ~ ~ a ~ 99144 PPC Joint Sealers 07900 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specfication sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 04221 Concrete Masonry Units 2 Section 06410 Custom Casework 3 Section 07420 Composite Metal Panels 4 Section 08410 Storefront 5 Section 08810 Glazing 6 Section 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 7 Section 09300 Tile 8 Division 15 Mechanical for plumbing fixtures 9 Other sections referencing this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A Joint sealants for interior and exterior surfaces. B. Joint backing rods, tape and accessories for a complete installtion. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C790 -Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. B. ASTM C804 -Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. C. ASTM 0834 -latex Sealing Compounds. D. ASTM 0881 -Epoxy Resin Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1193 -Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. G. SW RI (Sealant, Waterpr~ng and Restoration Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples, in size illusUating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructans: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conddions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Perform work in accordance with SWRI requirements and ASTM C1193 for materials and installation, 99144 PPC Jdnt Sealers 07900 05/25/00 90% Permit issue 2 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specked in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Company specializing in performing the work of This section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310. B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this secton. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERSA. A Dovr Coming Corporation B. Mameco, Inc. C. Pecos Corporation. D. Tremco, Inc. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealant No. 1: 1. Type: Multi-component: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, and O. 2. Movement Capability. 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Products: Vulkem 922, T2mco Dymenc 511, Dynatrol II, or approved. 4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Sealant No. 2: t. Type: Multi-component; chemical curing polyurethane; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M, A, and O. 2. Movement Capability. 25 percent In extension and compression. 3. Products: Vulkem 245, Tremoo 9001901, Pecos NR-200, or approved. 4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Sealant No. 3: t. Type: Multi-component; polyurethane sealank ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, M, A, and O. 2. Shore A Hardness: Between 45 and 50. 3. Products: Dynatred 40+, Tremco HPL, or approved. 4 Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. D- Sealant No. 4: 99144 PPC Joint Sealers 07900 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 1. Type: Single-component; low modulus, neutral moisture curing silicone; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, and A. 2. Movement Capability: 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Products: Pecos 864, Spectrum I or Spectrum II, or approved. 4. Cobr: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors. E. Sealant No. 5: 1. Type: Single-component; ulna low modulus, neutral moisture curing silicone; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, O, and A. 2. Movement Capability: 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 3. Products: Pecos 890, Spectrum I, or approved. F. Sealant No. 6: 1. Type: Single-component; acrylic latex; ASTM C834. 2. Movement Capability: 7-1/2 percent in extension and compression. 3. Products: Pecos AC•20, Tremco Latex, or approved. 4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturers standard colors. G. Sealant No. 7: 1. Type: Two-component; 100 percent solids epoxy resin security sealant; ASTM C881, Type 1. 2. Shore A Hardness: 95 at 48 hours. 3. Products: Pecos Dyna-Poxy EP 1200, or approved- 4. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. H. Sealant No. 8: 1. Type: Singlecomponent, silicone rubber; architectural grade. 2. Products: Tremco Proglaze, Dow 786. or approved. 3. Color. To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. I Sealant No. 9: 1. Type: Single-component, silicone rubber; architectural grade. 2. Products: Dow 799 Silicone Glass sealant, or approved. 3. Cdor. Translucent (dear). 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suk application. B. Joint Cleaner. Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: 1. Non-staining, open-cell polyurethane, close-cell polyethylene, or soft, reticulated polyethylene for sealant types 1, 4, 5 and 6, or as approved by sealant manufacturer. 2. Closedcell polyethylene for sealant types 2 and 3, or as approved by sealant manufacturer. 3. Rigid joint fillers may tN: used with sealants 2 and 3 separated from sealant by specked joint backup or bondbreaker tape. 4. Use closed cell joint backing for joint width greater than 25 percent. 99144 PPC Joint Sealers 07900 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive black polyethylene tape w as recommended by sealant manufacturer to sud application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openirx,}s are ready to receive work. B. VerKy that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints m accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and ASTM C790 for latex base sealants. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in axordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded maser, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave unless noted otherwise. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500 B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints: 1. Vertical Joints Bordered on Both Sides by Porous Building Material such as Concrete, Natural Stone, w Masonry: Sealant 1 w 4. 2. Vertical Joints Bordered on Both Sides by Non-porous Building Materials such as Painted Metals, Anodized Aluminum, Mill Finish Aluminum, PVC, Glass, or Porcelain Tile: Sealant No. 4 or 5. 3. Masonry Expansion and ConUol Joints: Sealant No. 1. 4. Cross-Joints in Copings and Projecting Stone Work: Sealant No. 1. 99144 PPC Joint Sealers 07900 OSJ?S/00 90% Permit Issue 5 5. Vertical Joints Wider than 1.25 Inches: Sealanf No. i. 6. Horizontal Joints in Walks and Concrete Floors: Sealant No. 2 or 3. 7. Vertical Concealed Joints in Lapped Joints and Metal Building Panels: Sealant No. 5. 8 Box Office I Ticket Booth glazing: Sealant No. 9 B. Interior Joints: ~. Expansion and Control Joints: Sealant No. 1 or 5. 2. Trim or Finish Joints Subject to Minimal Movement: Sealant No. 6. 3. Expansion Joints in Horizontal Tr~c Surfaces: Sealant No. 2. 5. Vertical and Horzontal Joints Requiring Pick-Resistant Security Sealant: Sealant No. 7. 6. Concealed Applications Requiring Acoustical Seal: Refer to Section 09260. 7. Vertical and Horizontal Joints Requiring USDA Approval: Sealant No.5. 8. Toilet Fixture Joints: Sealant No. 8. END OF SECTION r +~ r ~. r r: ~s r r s r r r. r ~r r 99144 PPC 08000: Door and Frame Schedule 03!28/00 50% ISSUE page t Mack GAe>u~D Width 7lephf 'Barg Type DOO! Maf7 Fin (ilz y Type Frama Maf1 FMI Hdw, ,Grp Details HeaC - $00 Sheet A871 UNO Jamb T7ves RarrlBrki h 100 3'-0" '. T-0' I - A HM PT-06 A HM PT-06 I 1 i D4 D4 101 3'-0' T-0" ~ A `HM - PT-06 A _ HM ', PT-06 2 D4 D4 ~ 103A ~ 6'-0' I 8'-0" D AL T ~ D _AL~ CLR 3 D5 E5A FS Storefront 1038 i 6'-0" 8'-0" ~ D AL T D AL I CLR 3 DS ESA F5 (Storefront 103C 6'-0" ~ ~ 8'•0" ~ D AL ~ T D AL _ _CLR 3 ~ DS _ E5A F5 _ 'Storefront 103D 6'•0' 8'-0' D AL T D I AL CLR 3 ! _ D 5 E5A F5 Storefront 103E 3'-0" 8'-0' C AL _ T D AL CLR 4 _ DS __ _ E5A F5 Storefront 105 6'-0" ~ T-0" ~ i 8 HM PT-08 A i HM PT-OS 8 ~ C2A C2B Exterior side paint PT-O6 1 O6A _ 3'-_0" ~ T•0" ; _ ~ HM PT-OS A HM _ PT-08 5 C2A C28 1068 6'-0" ~ T•0" I B HM PT-03 ~ A HM PT-03 ~ 6 C2A C28 _ _ F4 106C 6'-0" T-0" ~ B _' HM ~ PT-08 A HM PT-08 18 C2A _ C28 109 3'-0" T-0" _ A HM PT-08 i A HM_ PT-OS 15 110 ' 3'-0" T-0" B HM PT-01 A HM ~ PT-Ot 7 _ C2A C2B 111A 3'-0" 7'-0" A HM _ PT-08 A HM PT-OB 9 D2 D2 1178 3'-0" T-0" ~ A HM PT-Ot , A ; HM PT-01 10 C2A C28 t 12 3'-0" T-0" A HM PT-01 _ A HM PT•01 10 C2A C28 i _ 113A 3'-0" T-0" A HM PT-08 ~ A HM PT•08 9 D2 _ D2 Auditorium side of doors, PT•01 1138 3'-0"_ T-0" ? A HM ~ PT-06 A HM PT-06 10 I C2A C2B F4_ Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 114A 3'-0" T-0" A HM PT-08 I A HM PT-08 9 ~ D2 D2 Auditorium side of doors, PT-Ot 1148_ 3'-0" T-0" ? A HM ~ ~ PT-06 A ~ HM PT-O6 10 C2A_ C28 F4 Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 115A 3-0" _ T•0" _ _ A HM PT-OS A HM PT-OB 9 D2 D2 Audtorium side of doors. PT-01 1 t 58 3'-0" T-0" A _ HM PT-06 A HM - PT-06 10 C2A C2B F4 Auditorium side of doors, PT-Ot 116A 3'-0' ' " T•0" " A i HM PT-08 A HM PT•08 _ 9 _ D2 D2 _ ~ t _ Auditorium side of doors, PT-Ot 1168 6 -0 T-0 A IHM PT-06 A HM _ ~ PT-06 10 C2A C28 F4 Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 117A 3'-0" T-0" A HM PT-08 A HM PT-OS 9 D2 D2 - Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 ~ - 1178 3'-0" T-0" A HM PT-06 A HM PT-O6 10 C2A C28 F4 Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 118A 3'-0" T-0" A HM ~ PT-08 A HM PT-08 9 D2 D2 Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 1188 3'-0" T-0' A HM PT-06 A HM PT-O6 10 C2A ~ C28 _ F4 Auditorium side of doors, PT-01 120 6'-0" T-0' A HM PT-08 A HM PT-08 - __ C2A C26 _ 12t 3'-0" T-0' ~ A HM ~ PT-OS A HM I PT-OB ~ 5 122 6'-0" T-0" I B HM PT-08 ~ A _ HM ~-08 j 7 201 3'-0" T•0" A HM PT-02 A HM PT-02 11 D4 D4 _ j 99144 PPC 03/28100 50% ISSUE 08000: Door and Frame Schedule Page 2 Q~N~9 Door I Frame Hdw Defai(s -See Shee(AH I 1 UlYO Rertrarks Mark WidfA Ffeight IAef'g Type ~ Mefl FM G!z'g ~ Type MaYI Fin Gip Head JemO TMesh 202 ' 6'-0' ; T-0' B HM ~ PT-02 A HM _ PT-02 12 ~ C2A_ C2B F4 204 - 6'-0' T-0" B :HM ~ PT-02 A HM PT-02y12 C_ 2A C28 Paint exterior side PT-O6 _ 220 3'-0' T-0` I ~ A HM-~ PT-02 i A HM PT-02 15 -- D r the le Le n _ Al (Aluminum ( ~ I ~ ~ ~ l HM Hollow Melal 99144 PPC Steel Doors and Frames OBS10 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 -GENERAL t.t RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Connect, indtrding General and Supplementary CondiBons and Division t Specification Sections, appy to tors Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Bonvwed-light frames at prajedipn ports. 4. F'ue-rated door and frame assembles. B. Related Sections include the fdwwing: 1. Dlvfsion 4 Section 'Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchors and grouting frames in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section "Door and Frame Schedule' for a listing of the doors in the protect. 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware' for door hardware and weather stripping. 4. Division a Section'Glazing' for glazing for borrowed light names. 5. Division 9 Section 'Gypsum Board Assemblies' for spd-groutlng names instalbd in steel-framed gypsum tgard partitions. 6. Division 9 Section 'Painting' fa field painting factory-pdmed doors and frames. t.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute t. ANSI A250.8.1998: ReoommerWed Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames B. National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 80-95: Fire Doors and Fire Windows C. Steel Door Institute 1. SDI 105.92: Recommended Erectbn Instructions for Steel Frames. 2. SDI 117-93: Manufacturing Tderences for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and hams indicated, inducts door designation, type, level and model, material descrtpllon, core descrtptlon, construction detells. label wmpliance, sound and fire- resistance retings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Frame details for each frame type ifldUdlrtg dimensioned profiles. 3. Details and locations of reinfarcarnerR arW preparations /ar hardware. C. Certificates: Wrkten certification from door end frame manufacturer of compliance with specfied quality assurance standards. 1.5 DUALfTY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Steel Door Instftute: Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames (ANSI/SDI-tp0-98). B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testng and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE: ,AND HANDLING 99144 PPC Steel Doors and Frames 08110 05/25/00 90% Pet,;tllt Issue 2 A. Denver doors and frames cardboard-vrtepped or creted to provide protection during treruit and job storage. 8. inspect doors and frames on dekvery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage fs found. Minor damages may be repaired provided relkrished 'dens match new work and are acceptable to Architect Remove acct replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors artd frames et building site above ground and under cover. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to cortplfante wi8t requirertreMS, menufacwrers offertng products that may be incorporated into the Work indude, but are not limited to, the tollowirg: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. b. Cunies Company. c. Fenestre d. SteekreR: a dmsion of IngerS014Rarld. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 368M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drewfng Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standaN of flatness. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets. ASTM A 653lA 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A80 (ZF190)zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed)coating;stretdter-leveled standard of flatness. 2.3 DOORS A. Interior Doors: SD7-100 Grade II (heavy-duty). Modal 2 (seamless), minimum 18 gage faces, 13/4' edge thickness. B. EMedor Doors: SD7-100 Orede II (heavy-duty). Model 2 (seamless), minimum 18 gage faces, 1 3/4" edge thickness. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel names for doors end Dorrdwed lights that conrPlY wiCt SDI 100.98. and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0.053-inch- (t 3mm) (16 gage) thkk steel sheet. C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-slipped names, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of singledoOr names and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes dear during construction. D. Plaster Guards: Provide O OtB-inch- 10.4-mm-) Ihkk, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar bones to dose ofT interior of opertings: place at bads of hardware cutouts where mortm or other materials might obstruct hardware Operation. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less then 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-)thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Wail Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-Inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter. steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet F. Inserts, Bolls, and Fasteners: Manufadurefs standard orals. Where zir>FCOated items are to be butts into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153JA 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be dgld, neat in appearance, and free from defects inducting warp and twckle. Where practical, fd and assemble units in manufacturefs plant Clearly identify work that cannot t>e pemtanentty factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. 99144 PPC Steel DOOIS and Frames 08110 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 ' B. Exterior Door ConsWction: For extedor locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels. and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addRion of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) Ihlck, metalliccoated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. ' C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors from cold-rolled steel sheet. ~ core Construction: One of the idiowing manufacturers standard core materials that produce a door ' complying with SDI starWards: 1. Exterior Doors: Polyurethane. a. STC rating: 39 minimum at auditorium exterior exit doors. 2. Interior Doors: ' a. STC rating: 39 minimum at auditorium hallway entry doors. b. Vertical steel stitieners, minimum 22 gage spaced not more than 6 inch centers and mineral wool insulation throughout. E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 118 mch (3.2 mm> at jambs and heads, except not more than 1r4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3ra Inch i 19 mm) at bottom. F Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G, Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge. H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117.'Manufaduring Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.' ~ Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, buyers. and moldings hom either cold- or ' tat-rolled steel sheet. J. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk Bat or oval Aeads for exposed ' K. screws and bolts. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: Al exerior loplions and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-Insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 235 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. ' t Unless otlrervvise indicated rovide Bt'ertnal-rated asse bli ith LL al e f 0 067 R 14 2 . , p es w m v u o .9 ) or . ( better. ' L Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and fremes to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. ' M Frame CoruWCtion: Fabricate frames to shape shown with mitered or coped and continuousty welded comers and seamless face joints. N. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-appked hardware. D^an9 and tapping for surface-appGad hardware may be done at Project site. O Locate hardware as Indicated on Shop Drawirgs or, i(not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. ' P Glazing Stops: Menufadurers standard, formed from 0.032-inch- IUB-mm-)thick steel sheet. 1 Provide nonremovable stops On outsWe of exterior doors and on secure side of Interior doors for glass. buyers, and other panels in doors. ' 2 Provide screw-applied. removable. glazing stops on inside o1 glass. kwvers, and aher panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES ' A. Prime Finish: Manufacturers standard, factory-applied coat of baked on rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for aceeptance criteria. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Snop Drawings, manufacturers data, and as specified. 99144 PPC Steel Doors and Frames 08110 05/25/00 90% Permit L9sue 4 B. Pladng Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set Names accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely unbl permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is conpleted, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. In masonry construction, provide et least three wall andars per jamb; install adjacent to huge location on hinge jamb aril at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors indude masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. a. Coordinate filling of all frames In masonry walls with masonry mortar. 2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at correspording freights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. e. Fill frames with manufacturers standartl e~anded foam utsulation fill. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NF PA 80. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A25D.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in names, within dearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI Ai 15.1G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within cleararKas specified in NFPA 1f0. 2. Coordinate installation of glazing H rat factoryxtistaded. 32 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A- Prlme•Coat Touchup: Immediately after Installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final Inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 99144 PpC Access Doors 08305 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of mechanical and electrical access doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Openings in ceilings and walls. B. Section 09900 -Paint: Field paint finish. C. Division 15 -Mechanical: Access doors fumished under provisions of Divrsron 15, installed under Work of this Section. D. Division 16 -Electrical: Access doors fumished under provisions of Division 16, installed under Work of this Section. 1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Record actual locations of all access units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with UL requirements. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated access units. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310. B. Coordinate the work with mechanical and electrical work requiring access units. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each type of access door. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliances a with requirfements, provide gaccess doors by one of the following: 1. Bar-Co, Inc. 2. JL Industries 3. Karp Associates, Inc 4. Milcor, Inc. 99144 PPC Access Doors 08305 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 2.02 FABRICATION -WALL UNITS A. Refer to Division 15 and 16 for required sizes, unless noted otherwise in this section or in the architectural drawings. B. Fabricate frames of 16 gage steel. C. Fabricate door panels of 14 gage steel, single thickness steel sheet. D. Weld, fill, and grind joints to assure flush and square unit. E. Hardware: 1. Hinge: 175-degree steel hinges wlth concealed constant force closure spring type. 2. Lock: Screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 2.03 FINISHES A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with baked on primer. B. Finish: Refer to Section 09900. 2.01 RATED WALL ACCESS UNITS A. Non-Rated Door and Frame Unit In Gypsum Board: 1. Formed steel type; Model 'DW Access Door" manufactured by Milcor Limited Partnership, or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. C. Posftion unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Spedal Doors 08311 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 SECTION 08380 -SPECIAL DOORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, inGuding General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Spe~gtion Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section inGudes the following: 1. Double acting doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware' for door hardware not provided by Manufacturer. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for steel door frame. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components, profiles and finishes for doors. B. Shop Drawings; Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors. Include plans, elevatbrss, sections. details, and attachments to other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Size Variations: Obtain ArchitecCs acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Double Acting Doors: 99144 PPC Spedal Doors 08311 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 a. Eliason Corporation of Kalamazoo, MI (800) 828-3577. 2.2 DOORS A. Double Acting Doors ,Model No. SCP 8: 1. Locations: Between Support and Concessions. 2. Door Body: '/.'solid core. 3. Frame: By others. 4. Base Plates: 18 inch high, 18 gauge stainless both sides. 5. Edge Trim: 1&gauge stainless steel, riveted in place. Stainless steel hardware covers. 6. Window: 9 x 14-inch clear acrylic set in black rubber molding. 7. Hardware: by Manufacturer. Provide dead bolt with thumb tum, on concesswns side ony. B. Finish:.032 inch decorative laminate, both sides. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide double acting door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to double ailing, including sizes of openings to receive door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A Comply with manufacturefs written instructions for installing. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securoly to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A, Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08380 99144 PPC Double Acting Doors 08380 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specfication Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Double acting doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for anchoring and grouting access door frames set in masonry construction. 2. Division 8 Section °Door Hardware" for door hardware not provided by Manufacturer. 3. Division 8 Section 'Steel Doors and Frames" for steel door frame. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components, profiles and finishes for doors. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Double Acting Doors: a. Eliason Corporation of Kalamazoo, MI (800) 828-3577. 99144 PPC Double Acting Doors 08380 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 2.2 DOORS A. Double Acting Doors ,Model No. SCP 8: 1. Locations: Between Support and Concessions. 2. Door Body:'/." solid core. 3. Frame: By others. 4. Base Plates: 18 inch high, 18 gauge stainless both sides. 5. Edge Trim: 18-gauge stainless steel, riveted in place. Stainless steel hardware covers. 6. Window: 9 x 14-inch Gear acrylic set in blaGc rubber molding. 7. Hardware: by Manufacturer. Provide dead bolt with thumb turn, on concessions side only. 8. Finish:.032 inch decorative laminate, both sides. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide double acting door assemblies manufactured as Integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of other work about specfic requirements relating to double acting, including sizes of openings to receive door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturel's written instructions for installing. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08380 99144 PPC Storefronts and Curtalnwalis 08410 05/25/00 9Q% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 • GENERAL 1.7 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contras, inducting General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, appty to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A, This Section includes the following: 1. 6cterior storehont systems. B. Related sections include the folbwirg: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants' for joint sealants installed as paA of aluminum entrance and storefront systems. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing' 1.3 REFERENCES A, American Architectural Manufacturers Association. AAMA SFM-1: Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. Palatine, IL: AAMA, 1987. B, American National Standards Institute. ANSI A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. New York: ANSI, 1992. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads arW thermal and sWctural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those Indicated for this Project Failure includes the following. 1. Air infiltration and water penefrebon exceeding spedfied limits. 2. Framing members trensterting stresses, including ttxxse caused by thermal and structural rtgvertrartl, to glazing units. B. Glazing: Physlcalty and fhertnaity isolate glazing from freming members. C. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior from aluminum exposed to interior with a material o(low thermal conductance. D. Wind Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, inducting anchorege, ppable of wtthstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to the UnHorm building Code and/or to the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Refer to the slructurai drawings for design wind speed and exposure category. 2. Defection of framing members in a directlan normal to wall plane is Iimlted to 1!175 01 clear span or 3!4 inch (19 mm), whichever Is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, sWcturel distress, failure of operating components to function nomralty, or pemranent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. Test Pressure: 150 peroerrt of inward and outward wind-load desgn pressures. b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest t mile (1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category. E. Dead Loads: Provide entrance- and storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimensbn when cerMn9 full dead bad. 1. Provide a minimum 1/&inch (3.1&mm) dearence between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. 2. Provide a minimum 1rlFrinch (1.59-mm) dearence between members and operable windows and doors. 99144 PPC Storef-ortts and Cuttaintlralls 013410 05/25/00 90% t~ertmit Issue 2 ' F. Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, induding anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from unlfortniy distributed and concentrated Itve loads indicated without (allure of materials or permanent deformation. G. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with pertnaneM resistance to air leakage through , faced glazing and freme areas of not more than 0.06 cfMsq. R. (0.3 Usrsq rn) of fixed welt area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a ataticair-pressure difference of t.57 IDI!sq. fl. (75.2 Pa). H. Water Penetretlon: Provide entrance end storefront systems that do not evbence water leakage through ' fixed glazing and frame areas when tested accoMing to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of Inward-ailing wind-bad design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, 'Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other SWUures," but not less than 6.24 Ibflsq. R. (299 Pa). Water leakage Is defined as f011ows: , 1. Uncattrolled water infittreting systems or appeanrg on systems' nonrnafly exposed interior surfaces from sources other then condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained bads !o the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water ' leakage. I. Thermal Movements: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulDng from the folknving maximum change ' (range) in ambient and surface temperatures witftout buckling, damaging stresses on glazing. failure of joint sealants, damaging bads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to Wncbort property. and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 day C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 day C), material surfaces. J. SWcturel-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural movements including, but rtot limited to, sway and deflecbort. K. Condensation Resistance: Provide storefrorri systems with condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.1. L. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building Name and outer adjacent construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A Product Data: For each product spedfied. Indude details of construction relative b materials, dimenslorts of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drewings For entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabdcetlon and Installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and conlrectlon, end attachments to other work. a. Submit Ergineen's stamped drawings and rakulations far the State that the project is beefed in. C. Product Test RepoAs: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a quallFled independent testing agency, Indicate compliance of entrance and storefront systems with requirements based on comprehensive testng of curets systems. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced insiaUer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work Of this Section who has Speciel¢ed in installing entrance and storefront systems similar f0 those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for enhance end storefront systems, induding Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manutacWrer's standard units in assemblies similar to itlose Indkated for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Denrtortstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on Architect's evaluation of crfleria conforming to ASTM E 699, Ihat the independent testing agency has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of enhance and storefront system through one source hom a single manufacturer. D. Preinstailation Conference Agenda Hems: 99144 pp~ Storefronts and CurWinwalis 08410 OS/ 25 JOO 90% hermit Issue 3 1. Review design intent of the curtainwall 2. Review details aril transitions 3. Review extents of tempered glazing 4. Coordinate cuRainwall supports with steel erector A. Field Measurements: Vedfy dimens'rons by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work 7.8 WARRANTI' A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are no[ limfted to, the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Failure of operating components to function normally. 5. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. 6. warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, bu[ are not limited to, the following: 1. Nominal 13/4' / 2" by 4" / 4 1J2" non•thertnal broken, single glazed, center pocket aluminum storefront system: a. Model 'S-960' framing with model "D300" medium stile doors with t' glass stops by EFCO Corporation. b. KawneerCompeny,lnc. c. International Aluminum Corporation; U.S. Aluminum. 22 MATERIALS A Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use aril finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM 6 221 M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Bars. Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 21 tNt). B. Steel Reintomement Complying with ASTM A 36 (ASTh1 A 36M) for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 jASTM A 570M) for hot-rolled sheet and strip. C. Glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." D. Glazing Gaskets: ManufactureYS standard pressure-gtazirg system of black, resilient glazing gaskets. setting blocks, and shims or spacers, fabricated from an elastomer of type and in hardness recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements. Provide gasket assemblies that have corners sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer forjoint type. F. Sealants and joint fillers for Joints at perimeter of entrance and storefront systems as specified In Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." G. Bituminous Paint: Cok1-applied asphalt-masfic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS 99144 PPC Storefronts and Curtainwalis 08410 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 ' A. s standard brackets and reinforcements that are Brackets and Relnforoements: Provide manufacturer ' compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferous shims for aligning system components. B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleedirg ' fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use ' countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. C. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying ' with ASTM A 123 a ASTM A 153 requirements. D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended by manufacturer. ' E. Aluminum Entry Door Hardware 1. Weather Stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable. 2. Sill Sweep Strips: Retracting resilient seal type, of neoprene compound. 3. SAM II overhead concealed closers. , 4. Top, bottom and intermediate pivots. 5. Exit Devices: Concealed rod type. 6. Push/Pull Sets: Styles'CO9". 7. Threshold: Provide "Pemko' model numbers 795x19325 or approved equal, offset saddle ' threshold, ADA compliant, with the offset side on the interior aligning with the top of the owner supplied floor mat. Field verify offset height, approximately 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch vertical dimension. Provide width to match the mullion depth. 8. Balance of hardware per Hardware Schedule. ' 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembles, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped , or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 1. Fabricate components forscrew-spline frame construction. ' B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight antl free of defects or defornations, before finishing. C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. , D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurting or migrating within the system to the exterior. E. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to , FGMA's'Glazing Manual' F. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painfing contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommerxied by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painflng , contact surfaces with bituminous paint. G. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subfremes and reinforoirg of types indicated or, H not indicated, as required for a complete system. ' Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components onty as necessary for shipment and installation. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES ' A. General: Comply with NAAMM's 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for B. recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable'rf , they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations In appearence of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. . 99144 PPC Storefronts artd Curtainwalls 08410 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 5 C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. D. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.40 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfornanca of enVance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for pro[ectlng, handling, and Installing entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints tree of burs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovemenl joints. Seal joints watertight. B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occuring or migrating within the system to the exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construGion, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants' E. Install framing components plumb and we in algnmenl with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members. F. Install glazing to comply with requirements of Division B Section "Glazing; unless otherwise indicated. G. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants; unless otherwise indicated. H. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); ti4 inch j6 mm) overtotal length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1n6 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at comers, limit offset from true alignment to 1132 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to ti8 inch (3 mm). I. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. J. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of themtal barrier. K. Sel thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure entrance and storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Door Hardware 06710 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-i Specification sections, apply to this section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 2. Section 08380 Special Doors 2. Section 08410 Storefronts C. Specific items of finish hardware and accessories specified to be provided under other sections including, but not limited to the following: 1. Hardware for cabinetwork and millwork. 2. Hardware for aluminum entrance doors. 3. Hardware for miscellaneous building specialties. 4. Hardware and accessories for metal toilet enclosures. 5. Metal toilet room accessories. 6. Hardware for various equipment items. 7. Hardware for mechanipl and electrical equipment. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Door hardware for hollow metal doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Americans with Disabilities Act - Accesslbilitys Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADA) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. American Society of Hardware Consultants (ASHC) D. Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) E. NFPA 101 -life F. ANSIMFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Product data: Submit complete manufacturer's product data to Architect for approval, consisting of complete catalog cuts and descriptive data, UL listings, and other pertinent technical data required for complete product and product use information. C. Samples: If requested by Architect, submit to the Architect for approval a complete line of samples as directed by the Architect. Samples shall be plainly marked giving hardware number used in this Spec cation, the manufacturer's numbers, types and sizes. The Architect will deliver approved samples to the project site to be stored. Samples will remain with the Architect unfit delivery of all hardware to the project is complete, after which time they will be turned over to the Contractor for incorporation into the work. A. Do not order materials or begin fabrication until Architect's approval of submittals has been obtained. 99144 PPC Door Hardware 08710 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving Manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door hardware with two years experience and approved by Manufacturer. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: 1. Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the Work of this Section. 2. Hardware supplier shall be or shall have in his employ a member of the American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants or a person who is the equivalent thereof. Consultant shall be readily available for consultation with Architect, Owner, and General Contractor. 3. Consultant shall obtain keying In meeting with Tenant and Architect. 4. Consultant shall be knowledgeable on local, state and federal life-safety fire codes and ADA Guidelines, and assist Architect as required. 5. Consultant shall make at least two job site inspections and one final inspection to certify that all hardware has been properly installed according to the Manufacturer's recommendations. Consultant to furnish Architect wRh two copies of certification at completion of project. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101. C. Codes: 1. All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and state building codes. 2. Hardware for fire-rated openings shall also be in compliance with all fire building codes applicable to the district in which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 3. Provide hardware that meets or exceeds handicap accessibility per local building codes. Conform to the Americans with disabilities Act (ADA) of 1990 4. Closer adjustment shall not exceed the following opening force: a. Interior doors: 5 pounds pressure b. Exterior doors: 8.5 pounds pressure c. Fire doors: 15 pounds pressure 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package hardware ftems individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. C. Deliver keys to Tenant by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. D. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area. 99144 PPC Door Hsrdware 08710 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01785. B. Warranty: Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of one year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware Manufacturer, except the door losers shall be so guaranteed for ten years. The hardware supplier shall assume no liability where faulty operation is due to improper installation or tack of normal maintenance. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. C. Provide special wrenches and lode applicable to each different or special hardware component. D. Provide maintenance toils and accessories suDWied by hardware component Manufacturer. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Manuhacturer item S Stanley gulls Hager, McKinney B Best Lock Co. Locks: Cylinders, Latches GJ Glynn,lohnson O.H. Stops Rixson O Quality Push Plates Tice Pull Plates, BBW Kick Plates N Norton Closers I H.B. Ives Stops Glynn-Johnson RI Rixson/Firemark Magnetic Hdders R Reese Pemko 2.02 TEMPORARY CORES A. Provide construction cores in locking doors during construction. Replace with permanent cords at time of substantial completion. All locking doors shall be of interchangeable core type. B. Contractor is responsible for security of the Project and insuring all keys distributed during construction are returned prior to acceptance of Project by the Owner. 2.03 LOCKS AND KEYING A. Provide Falcon a Best interchangeable core cylinders keyed to 'Q" keyway as directed by Owner. B. Provide keying consultation with Owner. Provide Master Keyed and Grand Master Keyed locks. Furnish two keys for each lock and six master keys each set. Provide plastic type key tags for all keys, identifying location, as directed, and deliver to Owner by registered mail. C. All locks to accept FaICONBest I.C. cylinders. 99144 PPC Door Hardware 08710 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide solid blocking for all wall stops and bumpers. B. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to secure or anchor All hardware as per manufacturers published templates. Self-tapping sheet metal screws are not acceptable. All dowres and exit devices on wood doors shall be through-bolted. The Contrador shall be responsible for drilling wood or metal wRh the recommended hole saes. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as instructed by the Manufacturer. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with Manufadurer's instructions and requirements of BHMA, unless listed otherwise. B. Use the templates provided by hardware item Manufacturer. C. CoMorm to ADA Guidelines for positioning requirements for the physically disabled. D. Install each hardware Rem in compliance with the Manufacturer's instructions: 1. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware on surfaces which will be painted or finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store until completion of the finishes. Reinstall each item. 2. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed. E. Adjust and check each operating Rem of hardware to insure proper operation and function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Wherever hardware installation Is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, make a final check and adjustment of all hardware Rems during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish d hardware and doors. Adjust door coMrd devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust door Losers to comply with the idlowing ANSI requirements: 1. Door Open 160 Degrees: Adjust door dosers to take a minimum of three seconds to move where leading edge of door is three inches from latching. 2. Maximum Force for Pushing ar Pulling Door Open: Adjust fire doors In accordance with kx:al, state, and federal code; adjust exterior hinged doors to 8.5 Ibf, and adjust interior hinged doors to 5 Ibf. 3. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that may hold the door in a dosed position. C. Instruct Owner's personnel In proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finish. 99144 PPC Door Hardware 08710 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 5 3.04 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. See attached. END OE SECTION i~ 99144 PPC Glazing 08810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing far the folowing products and applications, including those specded in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Interior borrowed tires. 2. Glass for Curtainwall, storefront framing and doors. 3. Mirror glass for toilet rooms. 4. Glass and glazing al the Ticket Booth. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Storefronts' for storefront framing and entrance doors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI 297.1-1984 (Reaffirmed 1994): Glazing Materials Used in Buildings-Safety Performance Specifications and Method of Test B. American Soclety for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM C 1036-91: Specification for Flat Glass 2. ASTM C 1048-92 Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass C. Uniform Building Code 1. Vdume 1, Chapter 24 Glass and Glazing 2. Vdume 3. Standard 24-1 Flat Glass and 24-2 Safety Glazing 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Genera(: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without (allure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installatbn; failure d sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in conswdia,. B. Glass Design: Provide glass liter for various size openings In nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the idlowing crKeria 1. Specified Design Wind Loads: as indicated on the sWctural drawings. 2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For insulating glass supported on alt four edges, provide thickness required that limits center defectbn at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or t inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 99144 PPC Glazing 08810 OS/2S/00 90% Permit Issue 2 3. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glarirg products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glaang similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Glazing Standards: FGMA'Glaang Manual" and 'Sealant Manuat " C. Safety Glazing Standard: ANSI 297.1 and testing requirement of 16 CFR Parf 1201 for category II materials 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glaang materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendatans for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed wRh glaang when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensaton, or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Submit 2 (two) year Water Tightness Warranty signed by the exterior glaring applicator and contractor. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. CardinallG 2. Guardian Industries 3. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Viracon, Inc. 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS 99144 PPC Glazing 08810 05/25/00 90% Permit Isswe 3 A. GL-Ot: Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, Flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), 6 mm (1l.4 inch) thick float glass unless otherwise Indicated. 1 Provide 1!4' thick float glass at the projection port Nnndows. 2.3 HEAT-TREATED SAFETY GLASS A. TG -Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Clear: Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class and Quality as specified for primary clear float glass. Thickness as specked in this section, unless otherwise indicated. B. Clear Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FS (heat-strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I, Gass 1 and Quality q3 (glazing sated). Thickness as specified in this section, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MIRROR GLASS A. GL-02: Mirror Glass Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q2 (mirror) nominal 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick, sizes as noted on the Drawings, and with silvering, electroplated copper coating and protective organic coating. 2.5 TICKET BOOTH GLASS A. GL-03: Clear fully tempered safety glass, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), nominal 10 mm (0.39 Inch) thick, sizes as noted on the Drawings. At Ticket Counters provide polished edges, cutouts for pass-throughs, and voice ports where shown. 2.6 SEALED INSULATED GLASS UNITS A. GL-04: Provide pre•assembled units complying with ASTM E 774, Class A, each pane is a nominal 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick with a '/x inch air space. Use the manufacturer's standard sealing, spacer, and dessicant systems. Provide fully tempered or heat strengthened glazing as prescribed in Glass Standards above and as indicated on the drawings. Provide Screened and decorative glass faces as indicated on the drawings . 1. Interior Face: Clear float glass, GL-01 unless otherwise noted 2. Exterior face: Viracon Sdarscreen Low E product number VE1~2 or approved. Characteristics as follows: Visible light transmittance 37%: Solar transmitarxx' 24%; W transmittance 15°k; Shading coeNicient:.36 3. Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealant suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 4 Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealant: As selected by Architect from manufadurer's full range for this characteristic. 2.7 SEALED INSULATED GLASS UNITS/SANDBLASTED SCREEN A. GL-05: Provide as per GL-04 with exterior face as follows: 1 F~cterior face: Viraoon Solarscreen Low E product number VE7-d2 or approved with silkscreen dots providing 40% coverage having values as follows: Visible light transmittance 20%; Solar transmitance 13%; W transmittance 6%; Shading coefficient: 23 2.8 SEALED INSULATED GLASS UNITS /FLUTED REED GLASS A. GL-O6: Provide as per GL-04 with faces as follows: ggig4 pp~ Glaztng 06810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 t. Exterior face: Vlracon Solarscreen Low E product number VE1-42 coating ont/4" nom. fluted reed glass. 2 Interior face: I/4' nom. Fluted reed glass. 2.9 GLAZING GASKETS A. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, Integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: ~. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Silicone. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 5. Any material Indicated above. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS B. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glaring standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. C. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. D. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of t35, plus or minus 5. E. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass tiles in place for installation indicated. F. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). G. Mirror Molding: ASTM A167, Type 302 a 304 stainless steel; 22 gage, No. 4 satin finish. H. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Mirror adhesive, chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall subsUate. I. Glazing Channel at Box Office Pass-Through Windows: Clear extruded aluminum, .125" thick stock, to acommondate GL-03 glass, as fdlows: 1. Sill Channel: 1' wide x 314" high. 2 Head Channel: 1" wide x 1' hgh. 3. Jamb Channel: None J. Voice Ports supplied and installed by the owner, supplier to cut glass: Verify the model and size with the Owner. Natural color aluminum finish. 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in saes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face dearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. 99144 PPC Glazing 08810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 5 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the fdlowing: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, induding those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 SAFETY GLASS A. Provide heat treated glass, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Kind FT (fully tempered) Coated and/or Kind FT Uncoated which complies with ASTM Ct048 requirements, and with ANSI 297.1, and which is in coMormance with UBC Chapter 24 Glass and Glazing requirements. B. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass where shown on the drawings, and if not shown, provide fully tempered glass in locations where required in conformance with UBC Chapter 24 Glass and Glazing requirements. 3.4 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply wlth combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, inducting those in referenced glazing publications B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated On Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and (ace clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installatlon. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project sfte. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks In sill rabbets, sired and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Oo not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass tiles. G. Provide spacers for glass tiles where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as fellows: ~. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install cored size and sparing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and 99144 PPC Glazing 08810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 6 glaang tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glaang tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass tiles from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glaang publications. I. Sel glass tiles in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass liter in openings on setting bbcks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket appliptions at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacurer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately attar installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and dean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protedlon, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufadurer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to kx below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. 99144 PPC Glazing 08810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 7 END OF SECTION 08810 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ t ~s ~ ~ rc ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 99144 PPC 05/23100 90ge Issue 09000 Room Finish Schedule Page 1 . Aoan Name A/at7 Fbd Finrdn BYe Feplr WPM Nate East ~Mefeeal ___Frrvan Malenal Fintth fetsna South _ _ - t ~6rKtn Wetl Aklenaf F ~ Cel31p ~ Firm ~, NpI09S• ~ - 100 TICKET CN CP-01 RB-01 GB WC-02 CW FF GB WC-02 GB WC-02 -- GB PT-03 1,6 101 OFFICE _ _ CN_ CP-0i RB-Ot GB PT-02 G8 PT-02 GB PT-02 GB PT-0__2 GB__ PT-02 X1,6 102 LOBBY fCN ~CC-01 TL•03 ,OPEN _ CW FF CW FF CW ~FF '' OPEN PT-03 1,6 __ CC-02 CM FF CM FF CM FF TL-03 MS-01 FF _ - 103 ALC_ OVE CN ~CP-Ol CM _FF CM FF CM_ FF CM _FF_ GB PT-01 _1,6 _ WGOt _ WC-01 WGOi 104 CONCESSION _ -CN OT-01 OT-02 ~CM IFF OPEN ~ ',CM ,FF CM -FF GB ,PT-06 1,6 105 -H_A__LLWAY CN CP 01 C_M FF CM -FF CM FF -CM FF OPEN '1 1,6 i MS-Ol FF MS-Oi FF ~ - - 106 SUPPORT CN OT-01 IOT-03 - - CM __. FF CM FF ' -0M FF CM FF AT-03 F_F 1,6 - ~ FR FF FR FF ~FR FF FR FF -- _ - _ t07 WOMEN CN TL-06.0 7 TL-04 ,GB TL-04/05 GB TL-04/0 5 G8 TL-0410 5GB -TL-04l05 GB PT-05 1,6 108 MEN CN TL-0610 7,7E-01 GB ~TL-04,05 GB TL04/05 G8 TL-04/0 5 GB TL-047D5 G8 PT-05 1.6 _ 109 UNISEX CN TL-06.0 77E-04 IGB TL-04rO5G8 ,TL-O4IO5G8 TL-04/O S GB TL-04/05' GB PT-05 ,1,6 110 STORAGE C__N_ SV-01 -RB-01 GB _ PT-02 CM IFF GB PT-02 CM FF AT-03 FF X1,6,10 GB PT-02 _ PT-02 _ 111 .AUDITORIUM - 1 _ C F F AT-01 'FF 1,2,3,4,5,8,9 ~ S-01 PT-01 DRAPE RY GB WC-01 DRAPERY GB WC-01 DRAPERY DRAPERY 113 IAUDRORIUM - 2 CN CP-01-01 _ _ _ CM FF GB WC-_01 ~CM FF_ iCM FF AT-0. 1 -FF 1,2,3.4,5.8,9 CS-01 .PT-O1 _ G8 ~IWC-01 DRAPERY DRAPERY GB jWC-01 ~ DRAPERY ~ DRAPERY 1- , 114 IAUDTORIUM 3 ;CN MCP-01 ~ _ CM ~- iFF GB WC-Ot CM FF CM OFF AT_•Ot_ FF 1,2,3,4,5,6,8 CS-Ot PT-Ot IGB WC-01 DRAPERY DRAPERY GB WC-01 - _ _ DRAPERY ~ DRAPERY 115 AUDITORIUM - 4 CN CP-O1 CM FF GB PT-O1 'CM CM FF AT•O1 OFF 1,2,3,4,5,6,9 99144 PPC 05/23!00 90% Issue 09000: Room Flnlsh Schedule Page 2 99144 PPC ' 05/25/00 90% Pertnlt lasue ROOM FINI SH SCHEDULE ABBREVIATIONS: mark tlasatptpn AT suspended acoustical ceiling file ' CC CM stained concrete concrete masonry units CN concrete CP carpet FR fiberglass panels GB gypsum board systems PT paint ' RB TL resilient sheet flooring file SV sheet vinyl WC wall covering 1 1 NOTES Room Finish Schedule Notes 09001 Page 1 specA~catro+' 3aCeDn 095tt 04221 03300 09660 09986 09665 09300 09665 09950 1. See drawings. 2. Drapery by owner. 3. Paint color PT-01 to 8" AFF at all masonry walls with drapery. 4. Paint surfaces behind screen color PT-01 (insulation touch-up only). 5. Paint projection window frame color PT-01. 6. See door and frame schedule. 8. 8'-0" x 6'-0" SV-Ot Floor area at projection machines as shown on drawings. 9. Half wall to receive WC-01, all sides. 10. Epoxy type paint required. 11. SV-01 to be flashed up wall 6" for cove base. END OF SECTION 1 r 1 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90% Permk Issue PART1 GENERAL Gypsum Boats Systems 09260 1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-load bearing steel framing members. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C Steel headers, bracing, furring, and support backing. D Load bearing and structural steel studs and joists framing is specified in Section 05400. E. Gypsum board. F. Shaftwall system. G. The backer board. H. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cdd Formed Metal Framing. B. Section 08100 -Rough Carpentry: C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. D. Section 09300 -Tile: Wall finish over backer board. E. Section 09900 -Paint. F UBC -Uniform Building Code Standard 25-2 G Stuctural Drawings for load bearing and other indipted framing members and systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 -Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM 0475 -Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. C. ASTM 0630 - W ater-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. D. ASTM C645 -Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C754 -Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw ANachad Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. F. ASTM C919 -Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applicatans. G. ASTM C1002 -Steel Dell Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. H. GA-201 -Gypsum Board for Walls and CeiNngs. I. GA-216 -Recommended Spec cations for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. J. GA-600 -Fire Resistance Design Manual. K Metal Stud Manufacturers Association (MSMA) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications, data, and installation instructions. 99144 PPC Gypsum Board Sydems 09260 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GA-201, GA-216, and GA-600. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in per(onning the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310. B. Coordinate the Work of this Section with Section 09530, and with other Sections referencing this Section. 1.08 PREINSATALLATION CONFERENCE A. Agenda Items: 1 Review drawings and room finish sGiedule for discrepancies and bring to architects attention. 2 Review wall construction for UL, UBC, GA and USG rated assemblies. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A Gypsum Board Systems 1 Celotex Corporation. 2 Domtar Gypsum America, Inc. 3 Georgia-Pacific Corporation. 4 Gold Bond Building Products. 5 National Gypsum Company 6 United States Gypsum (USG). B Metal Framing Systems are based on the MSMA standards and crlteria. 1 Allied American Studco, Phoenix, AZ 2 Krarc Steel frammg Systems, Salem, OR 3 Scafco Corporation, Spokane, WA 4 Angeles Metal Systems C. SubstRutlons: Under provisions of Section 01630, and in conformance with the MSMA standards, criteria and section properties. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanised sheet steel, channel type with minimum 114 inch stHfened return flanges, punchout shapes or cutouts are permitted as long as they do not reduce the specified system performance, minimum depth (or web height) as indicated on the drawings, the allowable spans and maximum deflection as listed in the Schedule at the end of this section, and as follows: 1 12 Gage: ASTM A446 Grade 0 (Fy = 50 ksi). 99144 PPC Gypwm Board Systems 09260 ' 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 2 14 and 16 Gage: ASTM A446 Grade D (Fy = 50 ksi). B. 3 18 Gage and Lighter: ASTM A446 Grade A (Fy = 33 ksi). Furring Channels: ASTM 0645, hat shaped, minimum depth shall be 718 inch with a minimum width of furring attachment flanges shall be 1/2 inch, minimum 25 gauge, allowable spans and C maximum deflection as listed in the Schedule at the end of this section. Resilient Channels: 25 gauge, sized 1/2 inch by 2 1/2 inch, corcosion resistant formed steel; RC-1 Resilient Channels by United States Gypsum (USG), or approved. D. Framing Accessories, ASTM C 645: 1. Deflection Head Track: Steel gage to match stub members, DFT (Deflection Track) by Stealer Inc., or approved. 2 Steel Support Backing, ASTM C 645, quantity and placement to be verged by the contractor, designed for loading and locations as follows: a Speakerlsconce backing, bafFlette support backing, and door hold open backing shall be 16 gage C-studs as indicated on the drawings in the A600 sheet series. b 50 pounds per foot maximum equipment weght, inGudmg but not limited to, surface ' mounted mirrors, waste receptaGes, and towel and soap dispensers, shall be 6 inch by 20 gage steel strap with 2 #10 flush headed metal screws per stud attachment. c 100 pounds per foot maximum equipment weight, including but not limited to, upper wall cabinets up to shelves, base cabinets, shelving to 7'-0" and handrails, shall be 6 inch by 1 1/4 inch by 20 gage U-shaped steel tracks, notched at stud Intersections, with 3 #10 flush headed metal screws per stud attachment. E Anchorage to Substrate. Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and s¢e to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. 1 Fasteners: ASTM C1002 ' 2 Wlre for Hangers and Ties: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft tempered. prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized for stress according to ASTM C 635 and the UBC 25-2, but provide not less than 12 gage. 3 Adhesive: GA-216 2.03 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; Type X, UL rated; 5!B-inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. ' B. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM 0630; Type X, UL rated; 5/8-inch thick, maximum permissible length: ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. C. Cementitous Backer Board: High density, glass fiber reinforced, 5S inch thick; coated glass fiber ' D tape for joints and corners. Tile Backer Board: Type X 518 inch with embedded glass mats and a silicone treated core, "Dens- Shield Tile Backer Board" as manufactured by Georgia Park, or accepted equal. E Fiber Reinforced Board: Type X 5/8-inch composite fiber reiMorced gypsum with a glass reinforcement mesh on the backside as manufactured by Louisiana Pacific. 2.04 INTERIOR SHAFT WALL MATERIALS A Shaft Wall System: Type X 5/8 inch gypsum panels one side and 1 inch thick gypsum liner panels the other side for one hour ratings. Provide manufacturers standard system for 2 hour conditions. ' B Refer to the architectural assembly type plans for required fire resistive ratings and tested assembly designs. 99144 PPC Gypsum Board Systems 09260 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 2.05 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C79; moisture resistant Type X, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum available size in place, ends square cut, glass mat (aced surfaces; "Dens-Glass Gold Sheathing" as manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 8 Gypsum Soffd Board: ASTM 0931; Type X; UL rated: 518 ux~r thick, maximum permissible length; 'Sheetrock brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board' as manufactured by United States Gypsum Corporation. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Corner and Casing Beads, and Casing Joints: Galvanized metal. '800 Series" by US Gypsum, or approved. 8. Edge Trims: GA 201 and GA 216. C. Joint Materials: 1. Gypsum Wall Board: ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 2. Tile Backer Board: 2 inch wide sett-adhering fiberglass mesh tape; type as recommended by manufacturer of Docking board for specific application of ceramic tie. D. Textured Finish Materials: Latex based texturing material, containing fine aggregate. E. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA-216. Provide drywall screws at 25 to 20 gage steel framing, and provide self-drilling screws for 20 gage to 14 gage steel framing. F. Metal Blocking: Minimum 6 inches wide. 16 gage formed, sheet steel, or unpunched metal studs cut to length to frt between studs. G. Acoustical Sealant: Single component, non-drying, non-skinrnng, non-bleeding sealant. Adco BP- 400, Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Pecos BR-98, or approved. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01310. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated. 3.02 METAL STUD INSTALLATION A. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600. B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center a as noted ott>erwise. C. Extend stud framing full height to structure above where indicated. Maintain dearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide deflection type ceiling runners. D. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. E. Blocking: Bdt or screw steel d,annels to studs. F Bracing: Walls over 12'-0" high to be laterally braced at 8'-0" on center vertically with 1 1!2' 16 gage cold-rolled channels, dip anchored to metal studs and adjacent structure. 99144 PPC Gypsum Board Systems 09260 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 5 3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect furring channels horizontally; space maximum 24 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3.04 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with ASTM C754, GA 201 and GA 216. B. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. F. Install framing members for water resistant gypsum board at maximum 12 inches on center. 3.05 SUSPENDED GYPSUM CEILING INSTALLATION A Install suspended gypsum ceiling in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B Calculate and design ceiling framing assemblies to support their own dead load and to support 10 psf live load for all uses except over stages as per UBC Table 16-B. C Install suspended gypsum ceiling hangers according to UBC Section 2504 and UBC Table 25-A. 3.06 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Install resilient channels in accordance with manufacturer s instructions, and as shown. B. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C919. 3.07 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600. B. Erect single layers gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. D. Multiple Layer Applications: Secure second and third layers to first with fasteners. E. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer, and third layer perpendicular to second. Offset joints of second and third layers from joints of first layer, respectively. F. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. G. Walls Scheduled to Receive Ceramic Tile: Install file backer board over metal studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H Walls and Ceilings in Toilet Rooms, and Other Wet Areas, Other Than Those Scheduled to Receive Ceramic Tile: Install moisture resistant gypsum board over metal studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated, and as follows: 1 Control joints not to exceed 30' oc in furring or partitions except at walls inbetween auditoriums. 99144 PPC Gypsum Board Systems 09260 OS/ZS/00 90% Permit Issue 6 2 Wings at "L", 'U', and "T" shaped ceiling intersections. 3 Ceiling dimensions exceeding 50' in either direction with perimeter relief, or 30' without perimeter relief. 4 Where control joints occur in the exterior walls. 3.08 SHAFTWALL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Vertical Applications: For clear spans up to 12 feet in height provide minimum 4° stud, 25 gage with an allowable deflection of U360 with an 5 psf air pressure load. Provide intermittent bracing to structure or increase the gage andlor stud size for when spans exceed 12 feet. B Horizontal Applications: Design and provide a system capable of supporting a dead load of 20 psf with an allowable deflection of U360. See the architectural drawings for horizontal spans widths C Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, cavity type proprietary system consisting of metal studs, framing, gypsum board of applicable types, fasteners, and other accessories. D Apply face layers and finish as specified for other gypsum board. E Install per UL for hourly fire-resistive rating where indicated. F Seal perimeter with acoustical sealant around base layer in multiple layer application, and around steel framing in single layer application. G Seal penetrations with acoustical sealant. 3.09 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Walls Scheduled to Receive Ceramic Tile: Tape joints and corners of file backer board with 10 x 10 glass mesh tape embedded w(th file adhesive, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions for file backer board. D. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: Treat joints same as for gypsum board. E. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners of gypsum soffit board installation to produce smooth surface ready to receive paint finish. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1!8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 1 1 r 99144 PPC t?ypwm Board SysOems 09260 05/25/00 90% Permlt issue 7 3.71 GYPSUM SYSTEMS PERFORMANCE SCHEDU LE A Condition /Location Maximum Deflection Minimum Notes Loading 1 Vertipl Interior Non-Load Bearing WaBS U120 Typical 5 PSF A, B Ll240 ®Ceramic Tile Lateral Load 2 Vertical Furring Channels U120 Typical 5 PSF A 0240 Q Ceramic Tile Lateral Load 3 Vertical Shag Wall U360 5 PSF A Lateral Load 4 Horizontal Suspended Furring Channels U240 A 5 Horizontal Suspended Metal Studs 10 PSF A Dead Load 6 Horizontal WaII Supported Metal Studs 10 PSF A Dead Load 7 Horizontal Accessible Floor /Ceilings 30 PSF A Total Load 8 Horizontal Non-Accessible Floc /Ceilings 10 PSF A Dead Load 9 Horizontal Non-Accessible Callings 10 PSF A Dead load 10 Horizontal Shaft Wall U360 A Nobel A See Sheet A091 for stud spacing an d minimum member size. B Use minimum 18 gage studs for specified UL Design No 493 o n Sheet A091 . 99144 PPC Gypsum Board Systems 09260 05/25/00 90"/o Permit Issue 8 3.12 PARTIAL MSMA METAL FRAMING TABLES A Vertical Wali Studs and Tracks Maximum Unsupported Height Based on 5 PSF Lateral Load Type Stud Min Maximum Stud Spacing C-Stud Depth Gage Deflection 16" oc 24' oc Notes IC 3 112' 20 V240 16'-0' N!A 1, 2, 3, 5 3 5/8' 16'-5' 6" 1 T-9" 8" 2a'-T' Ic 21/z' 2s v12a 1 rte" s•-6• 2, a, 5 3112" 14'-0' 11'-5" 3 518' 1a'-3' 11'-T a• 1a•-tr 1z-z- IC 2 112" 20 U120 15'-6" 13'-7" 1, 2, 3, 5 31/2" 20•_2" 17'-7" 3 5!8" 20,-8„ 18'-1" 4" 22'x' 19'-6" 6" 30'-11" 2T-0' 8" 39'-Y 34'-1' Notes' 1 Minmum 3 112", 20 gage, V240 for walls with ceramic file 2 See Assembly drawings for required stud spacings. 3 Minimum 20 gage track and jamb studs and at all door openings. Provide double studs at all door jambs. 4 Use ST sections for tracks and match gaga to stud gage. See the drawings for deflection head track details. 5 Use minimum 18 gage studs for specified UL Design No 493 on Sheet A091. B H orizontal Floor and Ceiling Unpunched Joists (~ 30 PSF Total Load Maximum Unsupported Single Span Based on 10 PSF DL + 20 PSF LL = 30 PSF TL Type Joist Min Maximum Stud Spacing C Joist Depth Gage Deflection 16" oc 24' oc Notes EJ 4" 18 U360 for 11'-10' 9'-11" 3 Sectbn 6' 18 live load 15'-11' 13'-0' 7 1/4" 18 1, 2, 3 8' 18 19'-3' 15'$" 10" 16 26'-5' 23'-0' 12" 16 30'-8" 26'-9' 99144 PPC ~rpsum Board Systems 09260 05/25/00 9O°h PerrtrFt Sssue 9 C Horizontal Floor 1 Ceiling and Ceiling Joists @ 10 PSF Dead Load Maximum Unsupported Single Span Based on 10 PSF LL IC 2112' 20 U360 T-9" 6'-11" C Stud 3 1!2" 8'-5" 7'-7" 3 5/B" 8'-6" 7'-8" 4" 8'-9" 7'-11` D Horizontal Ceiling Spans @ 3 PSF Dead Load - - - p 9 --- Type Joist Min Maximum Stud S acin C Joist Depth Gage Deflection 16" oc 24" oc Notes IC, SC, 1 5/8" 25 CC 21/2" Section 31/2" J JIV J 1 4,. 9,-8., 8.$.. E Horizontal Ceiling Spans @ 10 PSF Dead Load Maximum Unsupportetl Single Span Based on 10 PSF Dead load Type Joist Min Maximum Stud Spacing C Joist Depth Gage Deflection 16" oc 24" oc Notes IC 15/8" 20 U360 6'-1" 5'-4" Section 2112" 7'-9" 6'-11" 31/2" 8'-5" 7'-7" 3 518" 8'-6" 7'-8" 4" 8'-9" T-11" F Vertical Shak Walls Maximum Unsupported Height Based on SPSF Lateral Load Type Stud Min Maximum Stud Spacing C Joist Depth Gage Deflection 16" oc 24" oc Notes CH 2 1/2" -- 25 U120 __- - NIA 12'-10" 1, 2 21/2" 22 18'-0" 2 t/2" 20 19'-2" 4" 25 16'-11" 4" 20 27-10" 6" 20 28'-0" Notes 1 Based on the "C-H" stud profile by USG 2 Based on maximum elevator vefoci oty f 180 feet per minute END OF SECTION ~ r~ ~r r sn ~r r r r s r ~a r r r ws r r r 99144 PPC Tile 09300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 01230 -Alternates 2 Section 03300 -Concrete: Fine broom finish of floor slab for file application 3 Section 04421 -Concrete Masonry Units 2 Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Mildew-resistant sealant 3 Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Tile backer board 4 Section 12692 - Fbor Mats Frame edging material where indicated. 5 Division 15 -Mechanical: Floor drains. 1.02 SUMMARY A Quarry floor file B Ceramic wall and floor tie C Glass mosaic file 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A118.1 - Ory-Set Portland Cement Mortar. B ANSI A118.3 -Grouting and Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive B. ANSI A118.4 -Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. C. ANSI A116.6 -Ceramic Tile Grouts. D. ANSI A736.1 -Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. E. ANSI A137.1 - SpeaFications for Ceramic Tile- F. Tile Council of America (TCA) - 1996 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate file layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, Junctions with dissimilar materials, threshdds, and setting details. C. Product Data: Indicate material spec cations, characteristics, instructions for using adhesives and grouts, and manufacturers installation instructions. D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods, cleaning materials. E. General Contractor to provide Arohiect with copy of ble Purchase Order(s) within six (6) weeks of "notice to proceed". 99144 PPC Tile 09300 05/25/00 90Mo Permit Issue 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, compositor and variety of file from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B Single Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source for each aggregate. C Manufacturer Company spedalizing in the manufacture of products specified in this Secbon with minimum three years documented experience. D Installer: Company spedaliang in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. E Provide work conforming to the TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation and to ANSI A137.1. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide mock-up of Floor and wall installation to show layout, cut tiles, grout, patterns, miscellaneous coves and acx;essories. Mock-up to include representative details of all file conditons. C. Accepted mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in a dosed, unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide under provisions of Section 01700. B. Ceramic: Provide minimum 5% of quantity installed, of each type and color spectfied. 1.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENCE MANUAL A. Maintenance Data: Include recommerxled deaning and stain removal mettwds, deaning materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable tie manufacturers include the toMowing under 2.02 and 2A3. B Substitutons under Section 01630. 1 i 1 99144 PPC ~k 09300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 2.02 QUARRY TILE (OT) AND CERAMIC TILE (TL) A Provide file in conformance with to ANSI A137.1-1988, and as follows: Tag Nominal Size in Edge Fnish Color Product and Manufacturer (inches) Vendor OT-O7 8 x 8 x Square Unpolished 505 Plaza Gray "MetroTile" by Metropolitan 112 Ouarry Thompson Tile, Portland, OR "Note: Use GT-01 only OT-02 4 x 8 x Straight Unpolished 505 Plaza Gray "MetroTile" 1/2 Base "Note: Use GT-01 only OT-03 4 x 8 x Bullnose Unpolished 505 Plaza Gray "MetroTile' 112 Base "Note: Use GT-01 only TL-01 6 x 6 irregular gloss R35 Pratt and Larson Wall Tile contact: Matt Graham (503)231-9464 "Note: Use GT-02 only TL-02 6 x 6 irregular matte check library Pratt and Larson color: Wall Tile KM + 6% PP oontact: Matt Graham + 1 % CRIM (503) 231-9464 #3113 "Note: Use GT-02 only "Note: This lile is in the Pratt and Larson library, ask Andy or Matt. TL-03 6 x 12 square slate #&31-G slate Oregon Tile and Marble (cut from contact: Desiree 12 x 12) (503) 291-8628 "Note: Use GT-01 only TL-04 6 x 6 irregular gloss R25 Pratt and Larson Wall Tile contact: Matt Graham (503)231-9464 "Note: Use GT-03 only 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue Tile 09300 4 TL-05 1" x 1" square glass 'Earthtones' United Tile tnoouurt "Interstyle, Glassblends size Mosaics' required contact: Cindy tw~~ded attests) (503) 231.4958 ''Note: Use GT-03 only TL-O6 1 x 1 square unpolished A-07 Linen United Tile (pre- "floor file mosaics" netted) contact: Cindy (503) 231.4958 "Note: Use GT-02 only TL-07 1 x 1 square unpolished even United Tile (pre- percentage "floor file mosaics" netted to mixture of: contact: Cindy be A-27 sand (503) 231958 12 x 12 A-33 charcoal ''Note: Use GT-02 only accent R-24 sea coral tile) R-25 marigold TL-OS NOT USED TL-09 8 x 8 eased glazed eggplant Dal Tile 'Quarry Ttie' 2.03 MORTAR A. Mortar Materials: ANSI A118.1 Dry-Set, ANSI A118.4 Latex Modified, portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water; provide minimum 400 psi with tile: as manufactured by: 1 Laticrete. 2 TEC a HB Fuller Company. 2.04 ADHESIVE A. Ceramic Tile Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type Ithin-set bond type, as manufactured by: 1 "TA-122" by TEC, or accepted. 2.05 GROUT A. Tile Grout: ANSI A118.6, Latex-Portland Cement type as manufactured by 1 GT-Ot: ft902 Birch ,TEC or approved equal, used with OT-01, 02, 03 and TL-03 2 GT-02: #949 Silverado, TEC or approved used with TL-01, 02, 06 and 07 3 GT-03: #943 Victorian White, or approved equal, used with TL-04 and OS 2.06 FLOOR LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT A Provide 'TA-325" as manufactured by TEC, or approved. 99144 PPC Tile 09300 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue S 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: Silicone type, moisture and bacteria resistant type, color to match the grout unless noted otherwise, as specified in Section 07900. B. Thresholds: Aluminum transition strip, 1/8 inch thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces. 3.02 TILE JOINT WIDTHS A Wall Tile: 1/8 inch unless noted otherwise. B Floor Tile: 1/8 inch unless attached to apre-netted backing. 3.03 GROUT FINISH A Sanded: Provide at floors and with mosaic tile. B Unsanded: Provide at walls, glass and other specialty tiles. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean. C. Seaf substrate surface cracks with filler. D Level the floor with a floor leveling underlayment to achieve a maximum variation of 118 inch in 10 feet from the required plane. E Apply sealer or conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.05 INSTALLATION FOR TILE A Lay file to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt file pattern through openings. B Cut and fit file tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. C Place file ceramic file joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in file size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. D Form internal comers with cove units and external corners and all edge conditions with bullnose units. E Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. F Mix and proportion premix setting bed and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G Sound ceramic file after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H Keep expansion and control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 4 Ai1ow file to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. J Grout ceramic file joints. 99144 PPC Tile 09300 05/25/00 90% hermit Issue 6 K Apply sealant to junction of ceramic file and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.06 INSTALLATION AT DRY AREAS A. WaII Tile: Install tile, adhesive, and grout in accordance with the following: 1 TCA Installation Method: W242-98 with gypsum based file backer board and metal studs. 2 TCA Installation Method: W223-98 with masonry or cementitious backer boards. 3 The adhesive manufacturer's instructions. B. Floor Tile: Install tile, cement mortar, and grout in accordance with: 1 TCA Installation Method: F113-98. 3.07 INSTALLATION AT W ET AREAS A. Wall Tile: Install tile, cement mortar, and grout in accordance with the following: 1 TCA Installation Method ' B. Floor Tile: Install tile, water proofing membrane, cement mortar, and grout in accordance with: 1 TCA Installation Method: F122-98. , 3.08 INSTALLATION AT EXPANSION JOINTS 1 TCA Installation Method: EJ17~-98. 2 Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction, ano isolation joints where indicated and as dimensioned on the drawings- 3 Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles. 4 Lqqate joints in file surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates . 5 Prepare joints and apply sealant to comply with section 07900. ' 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Clean file surfaces. ' 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 96 hours after installation. 3.11 TILE SCHEDULE , A. Refer to Section 09000 Room Finish Schedule. ENO OF SECTION 99144 PPC Suspended Acoustical Callings 09511 05!25!00 9U% Permit Issue Page 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divislon-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 01230 -Alternates. 2 Division 15 -Mechanical: Sprinkler heads and air diffusion devices. 3 Division t6 Electrical: Light fixtures and fire alarm components. 1.02 SUMMARY A Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim 8 Acoustical panels. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 -Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 -Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. C. ASTM C665 -Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Constructign and Manufactured Housing. D. ASTM E580 -Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay- in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. E. ASTM E1264 -Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. F. Ceilings and Interior Systems ConUactors Association (CISCA) -Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. G. UL -Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. H. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1 UBC Chapter 25 and Table 25-A 2 UBC Standard 25-2 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 11360. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceitrng finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items. C. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components, acoustical units. 99144 PPC Suspended Acoustical Cellings 09511 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 2 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specked in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assembly materials. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.09 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01100. B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. C. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide minimum 5% of quantity installed, of each type and color specified. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard one year warranty on all of the suspended ceiling components, except provide a 10-year warranty for AT-Ot, under provisions of Section 01785. },}2 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENCE MANUAL A. Provide manufacturers documentation on ceiling cleaning and maintenance. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Non-fire Rated Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty dassification; exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. B. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. C. Exposed Grid Surface Width: 15/16 inch with reveal. D. Grid Finish: Flat Black at AT-01 and White at AT-02 and 03. E. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, dips, splices, edge moldings, and hold down clips required for support and lateral restraint of suspended grid system. F. Support Channels and Hangers: Primed steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 1 1 99144 PPC Suspended Acoustical CeHings 09511 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 3 G. Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft tempered, prestretched, Class 1 coating, sized (or stress according to ASTM C 635 and the UBC 25-2, but provide not less than 12 gage. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNIT MATERIALS A. AT -01, Acoustical Panels, ASTM E1264, conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24x48 inches. 2. Thickness: 518 inches. 3. Composition: Mineral fiber. 4. Light Reflectance: 75 percent 5. NRC Range: 0.55. 6. STC Range: 35 minimum. 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E1264; Flame Spread 25 or under. 8. Edge: Square. 9. Surface Cdor: 'Black." 10. Surface Finish: Factory applied vinyl latex paint. 11. ProducUManufacturer: a "Armstrong 1729 Fine Fissured Humaguard RH90" by Armstrong b "Omni Climal Plus' Auratone non-directional fissured by USG Interiors c "HHF 19T by Cebtex. B. AT -02, Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264, coMorming to the folowing: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber. 4. Light Reflectance: 75 percent. 5. NRC Range: 0.55 to 0.65. 6. STC Range: 35 to 39. 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E1264; Flame Spread 25 or under. 8. Edge: Lay-in for 15H6 inch "Prelude Exposed Tee." 9. Surface Color: White. 10. Surface Finish: Factory-applied vinyl latex paint. 11. ProducUManufacturer. a "Minaboard, Cortega No. 769" by Armstrong b "BET 197" by Celotex. C. AT-0 3, Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264, conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24x48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Composition: Ceramic and mineral fiber composite or wet-formed mineral fiber. 4, Light Reflectance: 80 percent. 99144 PPC Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09511 OSY25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 4 5. NRC Range: 0.10 or 0.20 nonperforated 6. STC Range: N/A. 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E1264; Flame Spread 25 or under. 8. Edge: Lay-in for 15/16 inch 'Prelude Exposed Tee." 9. Surface Color: White. 10. Surface Finish: Scrubbable factory-applied vinyl plastic paint or vinyl-faced membrane. 11. Product/Nfanufacturer: a Plain Ceramaguard 605 (non-perforated) by Armstrong b Nonperforated VL Fire Guard 870 by Armstrong c "VMF 19T' by Celotex. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: As spedfied in Section 07210. B. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify sde conditions under provisions of Section 01310. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. B. Locate system on room axis according to ceiling plan. C. install suspension and acoustical unit system in accordance with manufacturers instnrctbns. D. Install with lateral (seismic) restraints as shown on Drawings and as follows: 1 UBC Table 25-A for suspended and furred ceilings not weighing more than 10 PSF. 2 Per UBC Standard 25-2. Bracing assembly consists of compression posts and wires securely fastened to suspension system main runners and structure above. 3. Exception as per UBC Standard 25-2'Ceiling area of 144 square feet or less surrounded by walls which connect directly to the structure above are exempt from the lateral load design requirements of this standard.' 4. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 1 D feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Room Finish Schedule. ENO OF SECTION 99144 PPC S t C il 095 ings pecial y e 45 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 1 ' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: ' A. Si(e installation of the stretch ceiling system 8s required by contract documents. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 04221: Concrete Masonry Units 1.03 REFERENCES: A. ASTM E84-94 -Tunnel Test ' B. UPitt (NYS/NYC) -Combustion Toxicity Test C. ASTM C423 -Acoustical Test 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. The Newmat Stretch Ceiling System has a fire hazard classification of Class A when tested in accordance with ASTM E84-94. 2. Upon exposure to fire, the system did not produce products of decomposition or combustion that were more toxic than those given off by wood or paper when decomposing or burning under comparable conditions when tested in accordance with UPitt (NYS/NYC). 3. The Newmat PVC membrane is acoustically transparent when tested in accordance with ASTM 0423. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer Quaycations: 1. The installation work of this section shall be performed by a Newmat licensed dealer. 2 Installer must have a current certificate of authorization and training from Newmat USA Ltd. 1.06 SUBMITTALS: ' A. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit as may be required to show compliance with the contract documents. B. Samples: Submit sample containing speck components (rail, membrane, and harpoon) as specifred for each area. C- Installer Certification Certificate: Submit from Newmat USA Ltd. and installer as required by contract documents. ' 1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Store all materials off the ground and protected from dirt and dust of construction operations. ' B. Materials are to be acclimatized to installation conditions for forty-eight hours prior to installation. C. Handle all materials in a manner that will protect them from damage and soiling. 1.08 WARRANTY: ' A. Manufacturer: Newmat S.A. provides aten-year limited warranty against defects, materials, and welds. B. Installer: Installer provides atwo-year or as required by contract documents, limited warranty against defects in workmanship . PART 2 -PRODUCTS 01 2 MANUFACTURER . 1 99144 PPC Specialty Cellinge 09545 05/25/00 90°k Permit Issue Page 2 A. SF-01: The stretch ceiling system shall consist of a custom fabricated ceiling membrane with concealed rails as manufactured by Newmat S.A., 22 Rue de General Dame, Haubourdin Cedex 59482 France; 011333 20.50.70.0610 1 1 3 30 2 0.50.98.03. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Rails: 1. Concealed/Wall or Ceiling Mounted: Ghost (PVC) or Diva (Aluminum) Rail 2. Separators/PVC: Double Ghost Concealed Rail B. Ceiling Membrane: Custom fabricate a PVC ceiling membrane for each area according to exact field measurements. 1. Newmat: Monolithic ceiling membrane 2. Color: Nuit 3. Attachment: via manufacturer's fully concealed pvc harpoon welded onto the perimeter of each ceiling membrane. C. Rings: PVC or Lomatex reinforcement rings (circular, square, rectangular, etc.) are to be used for perforations through the membrane for lighting fixtures, sprinkler heads, HVAC registers, etc. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the condition of the installation site for compliance to the preparatory conditions , under which the work of this section must be performed. B. C. Notifiy the architect immediately of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed until , such conditions have been corcected in a manner that enables a proper quality installation satisfactory to the installer. D . Survey the installation site for exact field measurements for custom fabrication of the ceiling membrane. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mounting surface shall be smooth and flat (taped of drywall and sealed) prior to installation of Baits. B. The ceiling membrane shall not be installed until: , 1. The space has been enclosed and is weather-tight. 2. All wet work has been completed and is dry. 3. Painting of mounting surface has been completed. ' 4. All adjacent and related work of other trades has been completed including: architectural woodwork, masonry, doors and frames, hardware, gypsum drywall, plastering wall covering, painting, HVAC, sprinkler system, and electrical work. , 5. Ambient temperature and humidity to be maintained at values that approximate those of occupancy (HVAC system to be shut down at flme of ceiling membrane InsWllationA ' 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Field measure each ceiling or wall area on which the rail is to be installed. B. Secure rails on the perimeter of each area (level or curved to accommodate design) using the following means: 1. On semi-soft materials: (i.e., gypsum drywall, plaster, wood), 1" pneumatically driven coated staples not more than 2 inches on center. ~ 99144 PPC Specialty Ceilings 09545 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue Page 3 2. On hard materials (i.e., concrete, brick, ceramic file, marble/stone), 3116" aluminum rivets to more than 4 inches on center (for aluminum rails only, not more than 6 inches on center). C. Stretch custom fabricated membrane by "hooking' the harpoon into the rail using Newmar spatulas and technique combined with a heat source in order to make the membrane stretchable (flexible) D. Install reinforcement rings using Newmat cold-weather adhesive. 3.04 CLEANING A. Wipe down rails and ceiling membrane upon completion of installation with damp white cloth or with denatured alcohol if necessary. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Resilient Sheet Flooring 09665 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Stair Nosing 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout B. Section 03300 -Concrete: Floor substrate surface. C. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall materials to receive applicafion of base. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM F710 -Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. FS L-F-475 -Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing. D. FS SS-W~0 -Wall Base: Rubber Plastic. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 8. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data on specified products, inGuding adhesives and accessories, describing physical characteristics. C. Samples: 1. Resilient Flooring: Two 12 x 12 inch in size of each color and pattern specified. 2. Resilient and Vinyl Tile Flooring: Two 12 x 12 inch in size of each color and pattern specified. 3. Resilient Base: Two 12-inch long samples of base material in each color specified. 4. Edge Strips: Two 12-inch long samples of type, color, and finish. 5 Stair Nosing: One 12-inch long sample of type, color and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. trrsta7ters far LinGeum Shoe! Flooring: Individuals cert~ed by the manufacturer to perform installation work of linoleum sheet flooring, with documented certification of experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flamelsmoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store in enclosed areas. 99144 PPC Resilient Sheet FlooHng 09665 05/25/00 90% Permltlssue 2 C. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing of installed products; and precautions against Leaning materials and methods detrimental t0 finishes and performance. 1-10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide under provisions of Section 07700. 8. Resilient Base: Provide 5 percent of quantity installed of each type, color, and size. C. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Provide 5% of quantity installed of each color. (Size: Standard roll width X 5°k.) D. Resilient and Vinyl Tile Flooring: Provide 5% of quantity installed of each color. pART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet with Backing, SV-01: FS L-F-475 Type II Grade A, color and pattern through surface wear thickness: 1. Vinyl Wear Thickness: 0.050-inch nominal. 2. Overall Thickness: 0.085-inch nominal. 3. Sheet Width: 6'-0". 4. ProductlManufacturer: "Classic Colon" as manufaotured by Armstrong. 5. Color: Suffield "86820 Celebration White" 2.02 MATERIALS -BASE A. Wall Base, RB-01: FS SS-W-40. Rubber base, continuous length rolls, standard toe and toeless base with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units: 1. Height: 4 inches. 2. Thickness: 1!8 inch thick rubber 3. Color: 40- Black 4. Manufacturer: Johnsonite 2.03 MATERIALS- STAfR NOSING A. Square Vinyl Stair Nosing, SN-01: Vinyl, continuous length rolls. Double lock for butting to 1/8" file or sheet goods. 99144 PPC Resilient Street Flooring 09665 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 1. Height: 2 3/.° OW x 2" OH 2. Thickness: N/A 3. Style/Color: VDL~40-Sq. 4. Manufacturer: Johnsonite 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: polymer modified Portland cement type; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended byflooring manufacturer. C. Floor Edging: Vinyl. D. Cant Strip: Plastic. E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTIpN 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify concrete floors are dry to acceptable maximum moisture content as recommended by flooring manufacturer, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. B. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 118 inch in 10 feet antl are ready to receive Work. C. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. D. General Contractor has responsibility for providing a concrete floor meeting industry standanYs for installation of flooring. 1. Test concrete floor substrate for moisture. Test shall be calcium chloride test as developed by the Resilient Flooring Institute. Conduct one test for every 1,000 SF of flooring, around perimeter of area or room, at columns, and where moisture may be evident. Moisture emission from concrete shall not exceed 3 lbs. per 1,000 SF in 24 hours, in accordance with the Resilient Flooring Institute Standard. Prepare diagram of area or room showing location and results of each test. If test results exceed limitation, do not proceed with flooring installation until corrective action has been completed. 2. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare concrete floor substrates in accordance with ASTM F710. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sutrfloor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface with maximum variation of 118 inch in 10 feet. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. E. Apply primer to surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION -SHEET FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 99144 PPC Resilient Sheet Ftooring 09665 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 4 B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. D. Install sheet flooring parallel to length of room. Provide minimum of 1/3 full roll width. Double cut sheet; provide continuously heat welded seal. E. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. F. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. Secure resilient strips by adhesive. G. Turn up Flooring to form base where sheet flooring is scheduled for base material. Back floor and wall junction with cant strip. Provide cap strip to terminate base. H. Where separate base material is scheduled, scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, Floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. 3.04 INSTALLATION -BASE A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Use longest lengths possible. Maintain minimum measurement of 24 inches between joints. B. Miter internal comers. At external comers provide premolded end stops and one-piece external corners. C. tnstatt base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. O. Scribe and Sit to door Srames and other interruptions. E. Install topset cove type base throughout except at carpet. Install straight type base at carpet. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Sectbn 01500. B. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 09000 Room Finish Schedule. END OF SECTION 99140 PPC Wall Covering 09950 OSJ25(00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to this section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall substrate 2 Section 09900 -Paint: Preparation and priming of substrate surface 1.02 SUMMARY A Wall coverings 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 -Test Meihod for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. 8. Shop Drawings: indicate watt elevations with seaming fayrnrt. C. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering. D. Samples: Provide two samples of wall covering, 6 x 6 inch size illustrating color, finish, and texture. E. Test Reports: Submit reports verifying flame and smoke ratings, when tested by UL or an agency approved by the Architect. F. Manufacturer's Installation instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G. General Contractor to provide Architect with copy of wallcovering Purchase Order(s) within six (6) weeks of "notice to proceed'. 7.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specked in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. f.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke ratings of 25150 when tested to ASTM E84. 1.07 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field sample of wall covering on scheduled substrates under provisions of Section 0'1400. B. Provide field sample panel, 6 feet wide, full height, illustrating installed wall covering, and joint seaming technique. C. Locate where directed. 99144 PPC Wall Covering 09950 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Inspect roll materials On site to verify acceptance. C. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. D. Do not store roll goods on end. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or vinyl covering product manufacturer. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive wall covering. C. Provide fighting level o180 fl candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide one bolt (same dye lot) of each color of wall covering. Label each bolt with color and Pattern, in addition to the manufacture's label. C. Package and label each roll by manufacturer, color and pattern, and destination room number. 1.11 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENCE MANUAL A. Manufacturer's recommended cleaning procedures, patching or repair. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acoustical Wallcovering. WC-01: FS CCC-W-40t3A, Class A and Class 1 100% Solution Dyed Olefin, coMorming to the following: 1. Total Weight: 17 oz 2. Roll Width: 72' 3. Color: Onyx 4. Producl/Manufacturer: "Sierra° by LBIBoyd. B. Wall Covering, WC-02: FS CCC-W-408A, Type II; vinyl coated fabric roll stock, conforming to the following: 1. Total Weight: Type II 2. Roll Width: 54" 3. Color. tbd 4. ProductlManufacturer. TBD C. Adhesive: Type recommended by wallcovering manufacturer to suit application to subshate. D. Termination Trim: Extruded plastic of color to match adjacent wallcover. 99144 PPC Wall Covering 09950 05/25/00 90% Pernik Issue 3 E. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01040. B. Verffy that substrate surface is ready to receive work, and conform to requirements of the wall- covering manufacturer. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply coverings unless moisture content of surfaces are below 12 percent. D. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does rat vary more than 1!S inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1116 inch/ft. 3.02 INSTALLATION A Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance wRh manufacturer's instructions. B Apply adhesive to wall surface immediately prior to application of wall covering. C. Use wall covering in roll number sequence. D Razor trim edges on flat work table. 0o not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. E. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight. F. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. G. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal comers or wthin 6 inches of external corners. H. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1l4 inch below top of resilient base. I. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll. J. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. K. Install termination trim. L Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe Gean wKh dry cloth. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Gean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. C. Reinstall wall plates and accessoroes removed prior to work of this Section. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B Do rat permit work at or near finished wall covered areas. 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Room Finish Schedule. Wall Covering 09950 4 END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Metal Toilet Compartments 10160 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condltlons and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows: 1. Type: Stainless Steel 2. Compartment Style: Overhead braced and floor anchored. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 'Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars, purse shelves, and similaraccessodes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance wfth requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work incude, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Ampco Products, Inc. 3. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pfding, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloredons, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. B. Steel Sheets for Color-Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphadzed steel sheet that is leveled to stretcher- leveled flatness comptying with the requirements of standards indicated below: 1. Electrolytically Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591 (ASTM A 591M), Class C, of the following minimum thicknesses: a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0,0359 inch (0.9 mm). 99144 PPC Metal Toilet Compartments 10160 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 b. Panels and Screens: 0.0359 inch (0.9 mm). c. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0747 inch (1 ~J mm). 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized or Gatvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), in manufacturers standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses: a. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). b. Panels and Screens: 0.040 inch (t.0 mm). c. Tapping Reinforoement• 0.079 inch {2.0 mm). C. Core Material for Mete)-Faced Units: Manufacturers standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin- impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 rrml minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-114 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware. E. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturers standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous. cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear-anodized aluminum. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturers standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of the following material: 1. Material: Stainless steel. G. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturers standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile in manufacturers standard finish. H. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturers standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome- plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protedivecoated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Metal-Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and provide continuous, interlocking mooing strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal comers by welding or Gips. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Overhead-Braced-aril-Fkwr-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion- reslstantsupports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. D. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 2a•inch• (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36•inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-)wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard seifcbsirg type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper. Manufacturers standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination rubber- faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units [hat comply with 99144 PPC Metal Toilet Compartments 10160 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 accessibillily requirertrents of authorities having jurisdiUgn at compaMrents indreated to be handicapped accessible. 3. Coat Book: Manufacturers standard combination hook end rubber-llppod lwmper, stied to prevent door hom hitting compartment-mounted accessortes. 4. Door Bumper. Manufacturers standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging doors or entrance screen doors. 5. Door Pull: Menufadurers standard unit that comDfies with accessrbilrty requirements Of authorites having jurisdiction et out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compaMrents indicated to be handigpped accessible. 2.4 ZING OR ZINGALLOY-COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMMS 'Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products' for recommendations relative to applying finishes. B. Color-Coaled Finish: Provide manufacurers standard baked finish complying wMh Ong manufacturers written instrucbons for pretreaunent application. bekirg, and nwrdmum dry film fhidcness. 1. Cobc Stainless Steel PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.7 INSTALLATION A. General: Compy with manufacurers written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1f2 inch (t3 mm) between pilasters and panels and not more than inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units in positron with manufacturers recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels wfth not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur In masonry or Ule joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at wells. B. Overheatl-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to fiaor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less Man 2 fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are inclosed Dosition. 32 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust arM lubricate hardware according to manufacturers written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from Gosed position when unlatched. Set hinges on oW-swinging doors and swing doors m entrance screens to return to fully rinsed position, B. Provide final protection and maintain conditlons that ensure toilet compartments and screens are wiCaut damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Comple0on. END OF SECTION 10'155 99144 PPC Signage 10400 05/25/00 90% PermR Issue i PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Ticket Booth signage. B Room identfiption sgnage as indicated in the Schedule at the end of this section. C Building address signage. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames: Substrete for door mounted signs. B. Section 08410 -Storefronts C. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Substrate for wall mounted signs. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADA, Americans with Disabilities -Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. CABO/ANSI A117.1-1992. C. State or local jurisdictions with ADA signage requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Submit samples of each sign form and material showing finishes, colors, surface textures, lettering size and style, and qualities of manufacture and design of each sign component including graphics. C Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. D Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: InGude installation template and attachment devices. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute, ANSI A117.1, and ADA. Americans with Disabilities -Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, and other state or local regulations. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A ASI Sign Systems, Dallas, TX, 800-ASI-SPEC. 99144 PPC signage 10400 05/25/00 90% PenmitIssue 2 B Best Manufacturing Sign Systems, Montrose, CO, 800-235-best C Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, NY, 528-370-3433. D Seton Identfiication Products, Branford, CT, 800.243-6624. E The Supersine Company, Detroit, MI, 313-892-6200. F Innerface Architectural signage, Gig harbor, WA, 206-265-8771. 2.02 MATERIAL A Quantity and location is provided in the schedule at the end of this section. B. Visual and Tactile Signs: 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard tactile signage series, employing Manufacturer's graphic blast process. 2. Materials: Manufacturers standard ES plastic high-pressure laminate. 1/8 inch thick, fire- retardant, self-extinguishing. a Color as indicated in the signage schedule. 3. Style: Signs shall be of the four-in-one construction style having the following characteristics: a. Letters and numerals shall be raised 1132 inch, upper case, serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade 2 Braille, Glue-on letters or etched backgrounds are not acceptable. Braille shall be separated '/: inch from the corresponding raised characters or symbols. b. Symbols, or pictograms, shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6 in minimum in height. c The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background. Provide dark symbols on a light background. d Letters and numbers on signs shall have awidth-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and astroke-width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. e 1 inch wide, 1/32 inch raised perimeter border, with 1/8 inch radius at outside sign edges. 4. Lettering Style: Helvetica Medium, all uppercase. 5. Lettering Size: All lettering to be 1 inch high. 6. Layout: All lettering to be centered on sign face with Braille message below. 7. Size: Sign size shall vary with regard to message. All signs shall have a 1 inch wide border on all sides of message area. 8. Mounting: a. Attach to wall surface with Manufacturer's standard general-purpose adhesive. b. Mounting Height: (1) Wall mounted signs shall be 60 in above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign. Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within 3 inch of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. (2) All case-mounted signs mount minimum 40 inches high. c. Locatton: 1 99144 PPC Signage 10400 ' 05/25/00 90% Permit Isxuc 3 (1) Single-Swing Doors: Sign edge 6 inch from strike jamb. ' (2) Double-Swing Doors: Sign edge 6 inch from right-hand jamb. (3 N D P l ) o oor: er local bui ding offiGal and as directed by the Archited. C Street Address Signage: ' 1 Provide a seHadhering opaque vinyl letters on a Gear background. 2 Indude the numerical sUeet address of the building with the full street suffix address. ' 3. Lettering Style: HeNetica Medium, all uppercase. 4. Lettering Size: All lettering to be 12 inches high. ' S. 6 Layout: Center the lettering on the background with a 1" Corder around the sign. C l i di or as o n cated in the signage schedule. 7 Verify height and kxation requirements with the bcal Fire Marshall. ' D Tra nsfer Arm Seating and Assistive Listening Available Signage 1 Provide aself-adhering opaque vinyl letters on a clear background. 2 Text as indicated In the signage schedule. 3. Lettering Style: Helvetica Medium, all uppercase. 4. 5 Lettering Size: All lettering to be 1 inches high. La out: Cent r th l tt i t " . y e e er e ng on he background with a 1 border around the sign. 6 Color as indicated in the signage schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B Beginning of installatxm means inst~ler accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with ANSI A117.1 and ADA. B. Install signs after doors and wall surfaces are finished, in locations indicated. C Install level, plumb and at the height indicated. D. Clean signs. 99144 PPC 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 304 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE Signage 10400 4 MEN Men's ResVoom No. 140 Blue with A, B 1 per restroom while core entrance WOMEN Women's Restroom No. 140 8tue with A, B 1 per restroom white core entrance RESTROOM Unisex ResVOOm No. 140 Blue with A, B. C 1 per restroom white core SAFETY FILM ONLY PERMITTED IN THIS ROOM On the mail level door to the Black text on a white B 1 per stairwell entry projection level stairwell background. door to the upper level Above the projection room and 1 per workbench WOfkbenCtl(e5) TRANSFER ARM SEATING AVAILABLE Place on each side of the Black text on a while 2 ticket booth, inside the ticket background. booth on the glass "ASSISTIVE LISTENING SYSTEM AVAILABLE Place on each side of the Black text on a Gear E 2 at each ticket booth --PLEASE ASK- ticket booth, inside the ticket transparent booth on the glass background "STREET ADDRESS" On the exterior glazing above Black text on a clear D the main entry door, as transparent directed by the archdectandlor background ~. _ :: •.~ Notes A Include the International Symbol of Accessibility. 8 Include Braille C Include the unisex symbol D ConVactor to verity location and lettering height with the bcal fre Marshall. E Incude the International Symbol Of Access for Hearing Loss. Verify with the Owner about what type of device is going to be used and add that message at the top of the sign as per Federal ADA Section 4.1.3(19xb). END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Flre Extinguishers and Cabinets 10522 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B F've extinguisher cabinets (FEC). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and shims for concealed in-wall construction. B. Section 04221 -Concrete Masonry Units: Wall construction to receive Work of this Section. C. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction to receive Work of this Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL 299 -Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A, Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, and location. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. D. Manufacturer's Installatan Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. 1.05 OPERATION ANO MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700 B. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-cert~cation requirements. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for extinguishers. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTINGUISHERS A. Mufti-purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL 299; Type 2A-108C, steel tank. B. Acceptable Extinguisher Manufacturer 1 "MP-5" as manufactured by Larsens Manufacturing Company 2 "Cosmic 5E° by J. L. Industries 3 Or approved. 99144 PPC Fire Extlnguishers snd Cablrrets 10522 05/25/00 90Mo Permit Issue 2 2.02 CABINETS A. Tub: Formed steel. B Door: Vertical haH glass door style, zinc plated pull handle; Gear double strength float glass. Die cut letters with text as follows'Fire Extinguisher.' Keyed lock wrth'SAF-T-LOK' on J. L. Industries models or with 'Larsen-Loc' on Larsens Manufacturing Company models. C Configuration: 1 Surface Mounted at all locations except at elevator mechanical room. D. Trim: Manufacurer's starxtard surface mounted edge. E Glazing: 1/4" Gear acrylic with vertical red lettering. F Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. G Acceptable Cabinet Manufacturer- ~ '2409-SMV Vertical Duo' by Larsens Manufacturing Company 2 °Ambassador 1013W 12" by J. L. Industries 3 Or as accepted. 2.03 FINISHES A Extinguisher: Red color. B. Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Black baked enamel finish. C. Cabinet Interior; Black baked enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verfy wall openings under provisbns of Section 01040. 6. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and loceted. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; locate as directed. B. Secure rigidly in place. 3.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET SCHEDULE A. Design Minimums: The minimum design guidelines are shown below. Verily actual quantities wits •,~ ~~ • c•a~.v cgs. Verify locations with Architect and local fxe Marshall w code official before final insta_at o~. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Toilet Accessories 10810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for concealed in-wall construction. B. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: In wall framing and plates for support of accessories. C. Section 10160 -Metal Toilet Compartments. D. Section 10170 -Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADA, Americans with Disabilities -Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ASTM A366 -Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. C. ASTM A167 -Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. D. ASTM A269 -Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions indicating special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ADA Guidelines. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 99144 PPC Toilet Accessories 10810 OS/ZS/00 90% Permit Issue 2 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. For accessories and hand dryers. B. Bradley Washroom Accessories and Amerign Specialties, Inc for grab bars and soap dispensers only. C. Substitutions and Manufacturers: Under provisions of Section 01630. Substkutions will be evaluated against the Bobrick "Contura Series" based on the radiused comers and surfaces. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel. E. Expansion Shields: As recommended by manufacturer for component and subsUate, 2.03 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Stainless Steel: match finish on Toilet Room partitions 2.05 KEYING A. Provide tumbler locks for all lockable access doors and panels. All locks shall be keyed alike per each room or per entire project, in accordance with Tenant's instructions. B. Master key all accessories. 99144 PPC Tollet Accessories 10810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 PART ~ EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with ADA Guidelines and manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidry anchored to substrate. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Bobrick is specified as standard; Refer to Drawings for locations. 1. Grab Bar: Bobrick: B-5507 x 36", 8-5507 x 42' at wheelchair accessible stalls. Bobrick: B-5507 x 42' provide two (2) per each ambulatory stall. 2. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick: 8-4288 3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick: B-270 4. Soap Dispenser: Bobrick: B-82216 5. Paper Towel/Waste Recept: Bobrick: 8-4369 Contura Series, satin finish stainless steel 6. Mirrors by others 7. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser Bobrick Bd221 END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ . r r^ir a~ ~r ri ~^r ~ ~.^~ ~r ~ r r ~ r rr 99144 PPC Building Access Key Cabinet 11020 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 01210 Allowances 1.02 SUMMARY A This section includes exterior wall mounted key boxes, fasteners and accessories for a complete installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Submit the manufacturer's product data for each of the following: 1 Key box specification sheet. 2 Manufacturer's standard finish colors. 3 Installation instructions and recommended fasteners. 4 Mechanical fasteners and adhesives. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer's indude the following: 1 "KNOX-BOX" as manufactured by Knox Company a Quantity: One (1) key box assembly. 2.02 DESCRIPTION A Model Series: KNOX-BOX 3200 Series B Surface mounted. C Color determined by the architect as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors of dark bronze, black or aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A Verify location and coordinate keying with the local Fire Marshall. B Install per manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION ~ ~ ~ i ~r ~ !~ f~ /I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ` lii 99144 PPC Floor Mats 12692 05/25/00 90% Permit issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Entrance floor mats. B. Frame edging material as supplied by the file subcontractor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03365 -Surface Applied Colored Concrete B. Section 03300 -Concrete 1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. EM-01: Manufacturer: Interface Style: 60090040 Superflor Color: 609177 Amazon Size: Floor tile, see manufacturers specrfications 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: TSC-DAG 30 acrylic adhesive or as recommended by entrance mat manufacturer. 8. Frame Edging: Provide °L" shaped stainless steel divider strips at the perimeter of the floor file or concrete and the floor mats. Size height according to height of installed floor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor area is ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verfy size of floor mats before fabricating mats. B. Vacuum clean floor area. 99144 PPC Floor Mats 12692 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install frame edging as per file manufacturers recommendations. B. Install mats in floor areas after final cleaning of finish flooring, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and to prevent edge of mat from Irfting or rolling. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Gap Allowed Between Frame and Mat: 118 inch. END OF SECTION 1 99144 PPC Firc Extinguisiters and Cabinets 10522 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fire extinguishers. B Fire extingulsher cabinets (FEC). 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and shims for concealed in-wall construction. B. Section 04221 -Concrete Masonry Units: Wall construction to receive Work of this Section. C. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction to receive Work of this Section 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL 299 -Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, and location. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, odor and finish, and anctwrdge details- D. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and recertification requirements. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for extinguishers. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTINGUISHERS A. Multi-purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL 299; Type 2A-106C, steel tank B. Acceptable Extinguisher Manuradurer: 1 "MP-5" as manufactured by Larsens Manufacturing Company 2 "Cosmic 5E" by J. L. Industries 3 Or approved. 991gq pp~ Flre Extinguishers and Cabinets 10522 05/25/00 90Mo hermit Issue 2 2.02 CABINETS A. Tub: Famed steel. B. Door: Vertical half glass doa style, anc plated pull handle; Gear double strength float glass. Die cut letters with text as tdlows'Fire Extinguisher" Keyed IoGc with -SAF-T-LOK' on J. L Industries models a with'Larsen-Loc on Larsens Manufacturing Company models. C Configuration: 1 Surface Mounted at all locations except at elevator mechanical room. D. Trim: Manufacturer's standard surface mounted edge. E Glazing: ~ /4" Gear acrylic with vertical red lettering. F Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. G Acceptable Cabinet Manufacturer: 1 '2409-SMV Vertical Duo' by l.arsens Manutachuing Company 2 °Ambassador 1013W 12' by J. L. Industries 3 Or as accepted. 2.03 FINISHES A. Extinguisher. Red wbr. B. Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Black baked enamel finish. C. Cabinet interior: Black baked enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTI~iN 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings under provisbns of Section 01040. B Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions: bcate as directed. B. Secure rigidly m place. 3.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET SCHEDULE A. Design Minimums: The minimum design guidelines are shown below. Verify actual quantities with the drawings. Verify locations with Architect and local free Marshall a code official betae final installation. END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Toilet Accessories 10810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for concealed in-wall construction. B. Section 09260 -Gypsum Board Systems: In wall framing and plates for support of accessories. C. Section 10160 -Metal Toilet Compartments. D. Section 10170 -Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADA, Americans with Disabilities -Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ASTM A366 -Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. C. ASTM A767 -Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. D. ASTM A269 -Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330. B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions indicating special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ADA Guidelines. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 99144 PPC Toilet Accessories 10810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. For accessories and hand dryers. 8. Bradley Washroom Accessories and American Specialties, Inc for grab bars and soap dispensers only. C. Substitutions and Manufacturers: Under provisions of Section 01630. Substitutions will be evaluated against the Bobrick "Contura Series' based on the radiused corners and surfaces. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel. E. Expansion Shields: As recommended by manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces fiat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Stainless Steel: match finish on Toilet Room partitions 2.05 KEYING A. Provide tumbler locks for all lockable access doors and panels. All locks shall be keyed alike per each room or per entire project, in accordance with Tenant's instructions. B. Master key all accessories. r 99144 PPC Toilet Accessories 10810 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with ADA Guidelines and manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Bobrick is specfiied as standard; Refer to Drawings for locations. 1. Grab Bar: Bobrick: B-5507 x 36", B-5507 x 42" at wheelchair accessible stalls. Bobrick: B-5507 x 42" provide lwo (2) per each ambulatory stall. 2. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick: B-4286 3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bobrick: B-270 4. Soap Dispenser: Bobrick: B-82216 5. Paper ToweVWaste Recept: Bobrick: 8-4369 Contura Series, satin finish stainless steel 6. Mirrors by others 7. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser Bobrick 6221 END OF SECTION 99144 PPC Buiiding Access Key Cabinet 11020 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Spec cation Sections, apply to this Section. B Related Sections: 1 Section 01210 Allowances 1.02 SUMMARY A This section includes exterior wall mounted key boxes, fasteners and accessories for a complete installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Submit the manufacturer's product data for each of the following: 1 Key box specification sheet. 2 Manufacturer's standard finish colors. 3 Installation instructions and recommended fasteners. 4 Mechanical fasteners and adhesives. PART2PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturer's include the following: 1 "KNOX-BOX" as manufactured by Knox Company a Quantity: One (1) key box assembly. 2.02 DESCRIPTION A Model Series: KNOX-BOX 3200 Series B Surface mounted. C Color determined by the architect as selected from the manufacturer's standard colors of dark bronze, black or aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A Ver'rfy location and coordinate keying with the local Fire Marshall. B Install per manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION s s rt ~ ~ ~ ~ r . ~s ~ r ~s . s ~. ~ r 99144 PPC Floor Mats 12692 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Entrance floor mats. B. Frame edging material as supplied by the file subcontractor. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03365 -Surface Applied Colored Concrete B. Section 03300 -Concrete 1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. EM-01: Manufacturer: Interface Style: 60090040 Superflor Color: 609177 Amazon Size: Floor tile, see manufacturers specifications 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: TSC-DAG 30 acrylic adhesive or as recommended by entrance mat manufacturer. 8. Frame Edging: Provide'L" shaped stainless steel divider sVips at the perimeter of the floor file or concrete and the Floor mats. Size height according to height of installed floor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor area is ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify size of floor mats before fabricating mats. B. Vacuum Gean floor area. 1 99144 PPC Floor Mats 12692 05/25/00 90% Permit Issue 2 , 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install frame edging as per file manufacturers recommendations. B. Install mats in floor areas after final Leaning of finish flooring, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and to prevent edge of mat from lifting or rolling. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Gap Allowed Between Frame and Mat: 1/8 inch. , END OF SECTION r r i ' 99144 PPC APPENDIX 1 00 OS 25 90% PERMIT ISSUE 1 ' Appendix 1 ~ _„ Geotechnical Repor[ i~ I I~ I err s r r r r r r r r~ r~ r r r r r. r 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 l SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT YELM 6-PLEX MOVIE THEATER YELM, WASHINGTON PREPARED FOR Yelm Prairie Development PROJECT NO. KE00103G MARCH 2000 Co11PORA7E OFFICE 911 Fifth Avenue, Suile 100 ~~ ASSOCIATED Kirklond, Wa~hinglon 98033 fa2sf 827.7701 EARTH FAX X4251827.5424 SCIENCES, INC aAWBRIDGE LSIAIJD OFFICE 179 Ibdrwr Ions Nplll Boilridge Glvd, WA 98110 .• •- ~ - - ~ - _ .. (206)780-9370 FAX (206178(>9438 - .. $IrbJYrfaCe E.rploration ad ' Yelm 6-Ples ,Movie Theater Georechnical Engineering Report Yelm. Washington Project anQ Sirr Conditions I. PROJECT A.~1D SITE CONDITIONS 1.0 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering study for the proposed 6-plex movie theater in Yelm, Washington. The site is located on the Vicirtiry Map, Figure I. The proposed building location and approximate locations of the explora[ions accomplished for this study are presented on the Site and Exploraeion Plan, Figure 2. In the event that any changes in the nature, design or location of the new structure are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report should be reviewed and modified, or verified, as necessary. 1.1 Purpose and Scope The purpose of this study was to provide subsurface data to be utilized in the design and development of the above-referenced project. We performed geologic studies to assess the type, thickness, distribution and physical properties of the subsurface sediments and shallow ground water conditions. Geotechnical engineering studies were also conducted to determine the type of suitable foundations, allowable foundation soil bearing pressures, anticipated foundation settlements, floor support recommendations, drainage and erosion considerations. This report summarizes our current fieldwork and offers development recommendatiots based on our present understanding of the project. 1.2 Authorization Verbal authorization to procccd with this study was granted by Ms. Brenda Toole of Olympic Associates Company. Our study was accomplished in general accordance with our proposal dated February 17, 2000. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Yeim Prairie Development and their agents, for specific application to this project. Within the limitations of scope, schedule and budget, our services have been performed in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering and engineering geology practices in effect in this area at the time our report was prepared. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made. Our observations, findings, and opinions are a means to identify and reduce the inheren[ risks to the owner. 2.0 PROJECT AND SITE DESCRIPTION This report was completed with an understanding of the project based on an unreferenced site plan prepared by GGLO Architecture and provided to us by Olympic Associates. Verbal information was also provided by Mr. Greg Good with WHP Architecture. Present plans call for construction of a 6-plex movie theater. The theater will be approximately 30 to 40 feet in March 2. 2tX10 ,1SSOC7,l7FD F.1R77f SCCmVVCEQ IIVC. SRH//h - ~CIADIalGI - ro-D Nf111-0D - wSK Page 1 Srtbsurface Erploratlon and Yelm 6-Plu Movie 7heatcr Georechnical Enainrering Rtyon YeLn Washington Project and Site Conditions height with a building footprin[ of approximately I50 feet by 200 feet. The building will use concrete masonry unit (CMU) construction with aslab-on-grade floor and will ramp up from a finished floor elevation of 347 feet for the individual theater rooms. We understand that the existing ground surface for most of the building area (northern 2/3 of the pond) is near elevation 343. Therefore, development will require some structural fill to achieve the desired subgrade elevation. The area surrounding the theater building will be paved and will also require some structural fill placement to achieve grades near the proposed building elevation. The existing house to the north will be removed at the time of construction. Vehiculaz access will be from West Road SE and NE 4" Street. The theater and surrounding parking areas represent the northern portion of development on a larger parcel that extends southward to NE 103" Avenue. Future devclopment on the rest of the parcel will include buildings labeled B through I, as shown on figure 1, two storm water ponds and vehicular access to the theater parking area. This report addresses only the 6-plex theater development. The subject area was located south of the existing residence at 411 West Road SE in Yclm, Washington. It was bordered to the north by existing residences, to the west by an cquiptnent rental company to the east by West Road SE and to the south by the undeveloped portion of the larger parcel. Topography in the area of the theater consisted of an approximate 8-foot high gentle slope along the southern portion of the study area. The ground surface in most of the theater arca was relatively level with a slight increase in elevation on the order of 3 to 4 feet to the north. The lowest portion of the study area was at approximately elevation 340 located near the southeastern portion of the proposed parking area. Several small fill mounds on the order of 4 feet high and overgrown with scotch broom plants were observed along the southern portion of the study area. The City of Yetm located a buried water train south of the study area. Vegetation consisted of field grass. 3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION Our field study included excavating a series of exploration pits and performing a geologic reconnaissance to gain information about the site. The various types of sediments, as well as the depths where characteris[ics of the sediments changed, are indicated on the exploration logs presented in the Appendix. The depths indicated on the logs where conditions changed may represent gradational variations between sediment types in the field. Our explorations were approximately located in the field by measuring from the existing site features shown site plan. The conclusions and recommendatiotts presented in this report are based on the 6 exploration piu completed for this study. The number, location, and depth of the explorations were completed within site and budgetary corutraints. Because of the nature of exploratory work below ground, extrapolation of subsurface conditions between field explorations is necessary. It should be noted that differing subsurface conditions might sometimes be present due to the random nature of deposition and the alteration of topography by past grading and/or filling. The nature and ex[ent of any variations between the field explorations may not become fully March 2, T000 ASSOOA7FD E1RTH SC7F1dCES. INC. sRrrh. - nmormcr - tao: urrum - ru Page 2 Subsurface Exploration and ' Yelm 6-Plu Movie Theater Geotechnical Engineering Report Yelm, Washington Project and Sire Conditioner evident until construction. If variations are observed at that time, it may be necessary to reevaluate specific recommendations in this report and make appropriate changes. 3.1 Exploration Pits Exploration pits were excavated with grubber-tired backhoe. The pits permitted direct, visual observation of subsurface conditions, except where impeded by ground water accumulations. Materials encountered in the exploration pits were studied and classified in the field by a geologist from our firm. All cxploration pits were backfilled immediately after examination and logging. Selected samples were then transported to our laboratory for further visual classification, as necessary. 4.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Subsurface conditions on the parcel were inferred from the field explorations accomplished for this study, visual reconnaissance of the site and review of a geologic map of the area. As shown on the field logs, the exploration holes generally encountered glacial outwash sand and gravel sediments underlying sandy topsoil. The following section presents more detailed subsurface information organized from the upper (youngest) to the lower (oldcsq sedimem types. 4, I Strati>traphy Topsoil All the explorations encountered loose to medium dense, moist, black, sandy topsoil with scattered gravels. This material varied in thickness from 1'fi to 3 feet across the study area with a majority of the area covered by 2 to 2'fr feet of this material. Based on cursory laboratory testing, the topsoil contains approximately 10 to 15 percent organics, by dry weight. Material similar to this has been used for grading on other projects in the south Puget Sound area without detrimental affects. Other alternatives include mixing it with the onsite sand and gravel for use in structural fills, placing it in landscape areas or exporting. We do not recommend this material for direct structural support of foundations. Recessional Ourwash Underlying the topsoil and extending below the termination depths of the explorations was a medium dense, moist to saturated with depth, tan and gray, gravelly sand to sandy gravel. This material was interpreted as recessional outwash. The outwash was deposited by melt water streams from the trailing margin of the Vashon-age ice sheet during its nottherly retreat from this region approximately 12,000 years ago. These sediments are suitable for foundation March 2, 2000 ASSOCIATED EARTH SCIENCES. INC. Slur/jh - XEOal01C1 - t~•!1.'VNUdD - w7K Page 3 SabtnrJacr Ezplomtion and Yrlm 6~Pfrx Movie Themrr Geotorhnical Enginrrring Rrporr Yrlm. Washington Projrcr mid Site Conditions support and for use as swcttual fill. Tltis material is cottsistent with the reviewed geologic map for the project vicinity. 4.2 Hvdrolo¢v Rapid groin water seepages were observed in the explorations pits EP-1, EP-4 a~ EP-5 from depths ranging from 9'fi [0 11'k feet below existing grade. We interpre[ed the seepages to represent the local water table. It should be noted that the level of the ground water on this site will fluctuate in depth depending on time of year and rainfall conditions. March 2. 20A0 ASSOCU7FD EIRTASCff.NCES, lNC. srorryti-KCOOrotci-t~-n.w+v~o-MU Page 4 Subsu>~oce Ezplorotion and Yr/m 6-P/u Movie Thrarrr Geotechnica/ Engineering Report Yelm, Washington Design Recammendelions II. DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 5.0 INTRODUCTION Our exploration indicates that, from a geotechnical standpoint, the study area is suitable for the proposed development provided the recommendations contained herein are properly followed. The bearing sediments, consistine of non-organic, medium dense sand and gravel were relatively close to the ground surface and may be used to support conventional spread footing foundations with only minor preparation, as described in the next section. The topsoil contained a moderate amount of organics but was considered sandy. Therefore, it is our opinion that the topsoil may be left in place and used as a base for structural fill below the slab-on-grade floor pavement areas when capped with at least two feet of sand and gravel structural fill. Based upon the subsurface conditions encountered during exploration, the following site preparation procedures have been developed and include recommendations regarding site drainage, stripping, subgrade protection, proofrolling and subgrade compaction. However, site preparation effort is expected to be dependent upon the time of year that construction proceeds. Therefore, bids for site preparation, earthwork, and paving operations should be based upon the time of year that construction will proceed. It is recommended that a representative of our firm observe the soil conditions prior to and during site preparation activities to evaluate the suitability of stripped subgrades prior to placement of structural fill, and construction of foundation elements and floors. 6.1 Site Drainage and Surface Water Control Adequate temporary and pennattent conaol of surface water runoff and possible subsurface seepage will be required in order to allow site access a~ grading for construction of the new buildings, access driveways, parking lots, installation of underground utilities, and other proposed improvements. Excavation, filling, subgrade and grade preparation should be performed in a manner and sequence that will provide controlled drainage at all times and proper comrol of erosion. Surface water should be collected and pumped or drained to provide a suitable working platform. The site should be graded to prevent water from ponding in construction areas and/or flowing into excavations. Exposed grades should be crowned, sloped, and smooth-drum rolled at the end of each day to facilitate drainage. Accumulated water must be removed from subgrades and work areas immediately prior to performing further work in the area. Equipment access may be limited and the amount of soil rendered u~t for use as structural fill may be increased March 2, 2000 ASSOCUTED EARTH SCIENCES. INC. 5!W//h - XEOOIOIGI - IDD'VNU-00 - wIK Page 5 ' Subsurface Exylorarion and Yelm 6-Plez Movie 77etater Georechnical Engineering Report Yelm, washin ron Design Recommendations if drainage efforts are not accomplished in a timely sequence. If a working drainage system is not utilized, project delays and increased cosu could be incurred due to the greater quantities of wet and unsuitable fill or poor access and unstable conditions. Final exterior grades should promote free and positive drainage away from the building at all times. Water must not be allowed to pond or to collect adjacent to foundations or within the immediate building area. It is mommended that a gradient of at least 3 percent for a minimum distance of 10 feet from the building perimeter be provided, except in paved locations. In paved locations, a minimum gradient of one percent should be provided uNess provisions are included for collection and disposal of surface water adjacent to the structure. Additionally, pavement subgrades should be sloped to provide drainage toward catch basins and pavement edges. 6.2 Site StriooinQ Site preparation will require removal of any surface vegetation or other deleterious materials in the planned building, parking lot, and driveway areas. Areas where loose surficial soils exist due to grubbing operatiotu should be considered as fill to the depth of disturbance and treated as recommended for structural fill placement. Based on our explorations, snipping depths of 6 inches should be anticipated for those areas where the sandy [opsoil is left in place. After stripping the vegetation, site preparation for foundation areas should consist of removing the black, sandy topsoil to expose the underlying sand and gravel. The exposed sediments should be recompacted with a 20-ton, vibratory roller prior to placing the foundation concrete. If the foundations will be placed on structural fill, then the topsoil excavation should extend two feet beyond each side of the foundation area. Topsoil exposed in the slab-on-grade flocr or pavement areas should be graded to allow the placement of at least 2 feet of sand and gravel structural fill. The vibratory roller should be used to recompact any disturbed areas prior to placing structural fill as discussed in Sation 7.0. 6 3 Wet Weather Conditions If construction proceeds during an extended wet weather period, and moisture-sensitive, organic topsoils become wet, they will become disrurbed. Therefore, the bids for site grading operations should be based upon the time of year that construction will proceed. It is expected that in wet conditions some topsoils used as a base before filling may need to be removed due to disturbance by equipment traffic and may need to be replaced with on-site sand and gravel. 6.4 Sub¢rade Protection Exposed topsoils will become softened if disturbed by corutruc[ion equipment while at elevated moisrure contents, requiring additional soil removal at an increased cost. Therefore, site preparation and initial construction activities should be planned to minimize disturbance to the March 2, 2000 ASSOCUTED EARTH SCIENCES. lNC. Page 6 serrhe - xcaoraer - to a vtrvm - r.K Subsurface Exploration and Yelm G-Plea Movie Theurer Geotechnfcal Engrneering Report Yelm, Washington Design Recommendations existing ground surface topsoils, particularly during extended wet weather periods and the wet season (typically October through May). Construction traffic should be restricted to specific drive areas to limit the area where disturbance of the subgrade will occur. If site stripping and grading activities are performed during extended dry weather periods, extensive subgrade stabilization is not expected to be necessary. However, it should be noted that intermittent wet weadter periods during the summer months could delay earthwork if soil moisture conditions become elevated above the optimum moisture content. 6.5 Proofrolline and Suberade Compaction Following the recommended site stripping procedures, the stripped subgrade within the building and pavement areas should be proofrolled with heavy rubber-tired cotuttvction equipment, such as a fully loaded tandem-axle dump truck. Proofrolling should be performed prior to structural fill placement or foundation excavation. The proofroll should be monitored by the geotechnical engineer so that any soft or yielding subgrade soils can be identified. Any soft/loose, yielding soils should be removed to expose a stable subgrade. The subgrade should then be scarified, adjusted in moisture content, and recompacted to the required density. Proofrolling should only be attempted if soil moisture contents are at or near optimum moisture. Proofrolling of wet subgrades could result in further degradation.. Low areas and excavations may then be raised to the planned finished grade with compacted structural fill. subgrade preparation and selection, placement, and compaction of structural fill should be performed under engineering controlled conditions in accordance with the project specifications. 6.6 Site Erosion To aid in reducing erosion and offsite sediment transport we recommend that earthwork operations be conducted during periods of drier weather. We further recommend that a silt fence be installed along the margins of the construction areas. Additional recommendations include mulching or hydroseediag disturbed areas during the wetter seasons, covering stockpiles of soil with plastic or placing straw bales around their bases. Runoff from the sandy topsoil is expected to be black and therefore should be protected from erosion as described above. 6.7 Frozen Suberades If earthwork takes place during freezing conditions, all exposed subgrades should be allowed to thaw and then be recompacted prior to placing subsequent lifts of structural fill or foundation components. Alternatively, the frozen material could be stripped from the subgrade to reveal unfrozen soil prior to placing subsequent lifts of fill or foundation components. The frozen soil should not be reused as structural fill until allowed to thaw and adjusted to the proper moisture content, which may not be possible during winter months. March 2, 2000 ASSOCUTED E,1R7N SCIENCES. INC. SRH//h _ KE00lOJGl - fO•D.NHll-00 - WZK Page 7 Subsurface Ezpforation and Yelm 6-Pfes Movie theater Geotechnical Engineering Rcport Ye1m, Washington Design Recommendations 7.0 STRUCTURAL FILL Structural fill will be necessary to establish desired grades for the building area, parking areas, utility trench backfill and if desired, for the foundations. All references to structural fail in this report refer to subgrade preparation, fill type, placement and compaction of materials as discussed in this section. After stripping has been performed to the satisfaction of the geotechnical engineer/engineering geologist, the upper 12 inches of exposed ground should be recompacted to at least 90 percent of the modified Proctor maximum density using American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) test designation D 1557 as the standard. After compaction of the exposed ground is approved structural fill may be placed to attain desired grades. Structural fill is defined as non-organic soil, acceptable to the geotechnica] engineer, placed in maximum 12-inch loose lifts with each lifr being compacted to at least 95 percent of the modified Proctor maximum density using ASTM:D 1557 as the standard. Structural fill for the slab-on-grade floor should be compacted to at leas[ 92 percent of ASTM:D 1557. Utility trench backfill in any roadway areas should be completed in accordance with the City of Yelm standards and specifications. The contractor should note that any proposed fill soils must be evaluated by Associated Earth Sciences, Inc. (AESI) prior to their use in fills. This would require that we have a sample of the material 48 hours in advance to perform a Proctor test and determine its field compaction standard. Soils in which the amount of fine-grained material (smaller than U.S. number 200 sieve) is greater than approximately 5 percent (measured on the minus U.S. number 4 sieve size) should be considered moisture-sensitive. Use of moisture-sensitive soils in structural fills should be limited to favorable dry weather and dry subgrade conditions. The on-site sand and gravel sediments contained little silt and are not considered moisture-sensitive. However, the topsail contains fines and should be considered moisture sensitive. As such, construction equipment traversing any exposed topsoil during inclement weather could cause disturbance of the subgrade. If the sandy topsoil fill is placed during wet weather and proper compaction cannot be obtained, then the onsite sand and gravel should be used. Free-draining fill consists of non-organic soil with the amount of fine-grained material limited to 5 percent by weight when measured on the minus U.S. number 4 sieve fraction. 7.1 Construction Monitorin¢ A representative from our firm should inspec[ the stripped subgrade and be present during placement of structural fill to observe the work and perform a representative number of in- place density tests. In this way, the adequacy of the earthwork may be evaluated as filling progresses and any problem areas may be corrected at that time. It is important to understand that taking random compaction tests on a part-time basis will not ensure uniformity or March 2, LOAD AS50CIATED EARTH SCIENCES. 1NC. SRH/j6 - K£-0O107G1 - IAD~llNi1~00 - WTK Page 8 Snbsnyace Espbrarion and Yelm 6-Plu Movie 77eeater Georechnica! Engirteerfng Report ' Yelm. Woshingron Design Recommendations acceptable performance of a fill. As such, we are available to aid the owner in developing a suitable monitoring and testing program. 8.0 FOUNDATIONS Spread footings may be used for building support when founded upon the natural sand and gravel sediments recompacted to a firm and unyielding condition, or on structural fill placed over these materials. Compaction should be completed using a 20-ton, vibratory roller or a backhce-mounted, vibratory plate compactor (hcepac) and observed by a representative from AESI. A representative of AESI must be on-site during the compaction process to observe the work and verify that the proper compaction has been achieved. Once the exposed footing soils have been properly prepared and approved by the geotechnical engineer or his representative, the foundatiotts may be constructed. We recommend that an allowable bearing pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf) be utilized for design purposes, including both dead and live loads. An increase of one-third may be used for shop-term wind or seismic loading. Perimeter footings should be buried at least 18 inches into the surrounding soil for frost protection. However, all footings must penetrate to the prescribed bearing stratum and no footing should be founded in or above loose or organic soils. All footings should have a min;n+um width of 20 inches for the 30 to 40 foot-high S[rUC[Ure. Anticipated settlement of footings founded on the natural, recompacted sediments or structural fill should be less than 1 inch. However, disturbed soil not removed from footing excavations immediately prior to footing placement, could result in increased settlements. All footing areas should be inspected by AES[ prior to placing concrete, to verify that the design bearing capacity of the soils has been attained and that construction conforms to the recommendations contained in this report. Such inspectioru may be required by the governing municipality. Perimeter footing drains should be provided as discussed under the section on Drainage Considerations. 9.0 FLOOR SUPPORT For the slab-on-grade floor, we recommend that the upper twelve (12) inches of natural soil beneath the slab be recompacted to a firm, unyielding condition and to a density of at least 90 percent of the modified Proctor maximum density using ASTM:D 1557 as the standard. Any yielding areas should be overexcavated and filled with approved structural fill. As discussed earlier, the sandy topsoil may be left in place under the floor slab if it is capped with at least 2 feet of structural fill consisting of the non-organic, onsite sand and gravel compacted to at least 92 percent of ASTM:D 1557. March 2, 20D0 ASSOCLf7ED EAR7N SCIENCES. INC. sKe/th - KrDO10)GI - tL•D UHU-0D - w:K Page 9 Subrur~cr F~ploration and Yelm 6Plrs Mow 17uoter Geotechnical Enginemng Report YeGn, Washrngran Desrgn Recommendations A capillary break layer consisting of 4 inches of washed pea gravel and a polyethylene plastic vapor barrier should be provided under the floor slab- Based on American Concrete Institute recommendations, we also suggest placing a two to three inch layer of clean sand over the vapor barrier to protect the vapor barrier and to allow some moisture loss through the bottom of the slab to aid in the curing process. Sand should be used to aid in the fine-grading process of the subgrade to provide uniform support under the slab. 10.0 DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS All perimeter footing walls should be provided with a drain at the footing level. Drains should consist of rigid, perforated, PVC pipe surrounded by washed pea gravel. The level of the perforations in the pipe should be set approximately 2 inches below the bottom of the footing at all locatiotts and the drains should be constructed with sufficient gradient to allow gravity discharge away hom the building. Roof and surface runoff should not discharge into the footing drain system but should be handled by a separate, rigid, tightline drain. We understand that all collected storm water will be tightlined to an approved storm water pond system. In planning, exterior grades adjacent to walls should be sloped downward away from the structure to achieve surface drainage. 11.0 PROJECT DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION MONTTORING We recommend that AESI perform a geotechnical review of the plans prior to final design completion. In this way, our earthwork and foundation recommendations may be properly interpreted and implemented in the design. We are also available to provide gcotechnical eagirteering and monitoring services during construction. The integrity of the foundation depends on proper site prepazation and construction procedures. In addition, engineering decisiotts may have to be made in the field in the event that variations in subsurface conditions become apparent. wrrn - rffncroscr - t~-o wrv~oo - wu Page 10 S+rbrurJace Fsploratian and YeLx 6-Pla Movte Theater Georechtical Engineering Report Ytlm, A'ashington Design Rccommtndations We have enjoyed working with you on this study and are confident that these recommendations will aid in the successful completion of your project. If you should have any questions, or require further assistance, please do not hesitate to call. Sincerely, ASSOCIATED EARTH SCIENCES, INC. Kirkland, Washington Scoa R. Hannah Project Geologist ME 4~ ~ '~~ ~~'li ~~ ~1~ oZ y .. ~ cp9~ CtSTt:ti G~~ /~A~~ . EX?IRG6 11 / 20 / Kurt D. Merriman, P.E. Associate Engineer March 2, 1000 dSSOCUTED &4R7N SCIENCES, INC. fRH//~ - XEOUIOJGI - I~D:VNt3-017 - WSX Page 11 w a °~ 4~ ~ ~ r ~ ^~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ a ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~..; ~~ LEGEND F Approximate location of N q EP-1 . exploration pit 8 o m ~o !~ rai g REFERENCE: GGLO Architecture. 8 SITE AND EXPLORATION PLAN "~ e ~~ATED YELM 6-PLEX MOvtE THEATER e~~~TM YELM, WASHINGTON 2 j SpENCES. INC ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 1 1 LOG OF EXPLORATION PIT NO. EP-1 $ TAa kq u pen of Cn report Bred M Aswr~ated Earth Silences, Inc. (AESI) for the named proJsU end Madd De y l a YrterpretaUOn TTn summary a s ony to the bnbbon of lnn Irenai at Cie p lead togetl+er wrtn that for ~m b4 W o r u ali0ons~ineouMered~Y Manta a C+a toation p.ssape or tme. 7Tro data Dreaented are p ~twn a aM a~ k r s r ca DESCRIPTION Loose to medium dense, moist, black, sandy OIL with some gravel. 1 2 Recesalonal Otrtwash Medium dense, moist, tan, gravelly, medium to coarse SAND to sandy GRAVEL. Abundant cobbles. 3 1' diameter boulder (8 4'. Becomes gray (4D, 6' and saturated (S1 10'. 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 Water table ~ 10'. 11 Bouorn of esybreCon pit at depth t t reef 12 Moderate uvYq. 13 14 15 1e 17 18 19 I, I' 1 1 Yelm 6-Plex Movie Theater Yelm, Washington '3 A880CIATEO project No. KE00103G @ Looped uy: stvf ~~ EARTN $ ,~~„~ pY SCIENCE8a IIVC February 18, 2000 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~/ ~ t, LOG OF EXPLORATION PtT NO. EP-2 C Tlw by b parr a ar sport Dam'ertOepDlaytASSOWtsA EaN+ Saenas. Inc (AESq far IM narrrtl prgaa and s1au10 b~ m : ` ~ ~~ ge a ° mu b ~ ry ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ n a tio n. s oondXpns marar c n feon p ij a trn aw aaa a~ aie i rlf a ntion a s mp aetwl conditions encountarW. DESCRIPTION Loose to medium dense, black sandy OPSOIL with trace gravel. 1 2 3 Recessional Outwash Medium dense, mast, tan, medium to coarse SAND with some gravel to 8'. Gravelly, medium to coarse SAND below 8'. 4 5 B 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 eoaom a a~bration qt at dean 12 rear N d t o groun wa er seepage. mawr to modsraN ovnp. 14 15 16 17 18 19 ~B Yelm 6-Plex Movie Theater # Yelm, Washington a sl-ssoc~s-~rEo ~ logged by: SRM ~~ EAATH Project No. KE00103G S approved M: SCIENCE9a INC February 18, 2000 tr ~. LOG OF EXPLORATION PIT NO. EP-3 1 ' ~ C This lop is Oert a tr» report M Assodated Earth acrnoss. Inc. (AESq for the named rope ono sltoul0 bs raa0 topsthar w~h that Yibrpr~tation. Thu ~urmary ony to Ms bcayq~ a tlW tArrJ+ at tM ¢ ~A° a e~awoon suDawhoe wnd ons rn,y a+anpe n mn watlon w..ap. a dne. The ou, orasnleo are 6a a fYrtpelptgn a scWal oortditgns srwotmured. DESCRIPTION Dose Oo medium dense, moist, lack sandy IL wtth trace gravel. 1 2 RecessionalOutwash ' 3 Medium dense, moist, gray medium SAND with trace gravel capped by 6" of tan gravelly sand. Decreased gravel content below 7 1R'. Gravelly SAND to sandy GRAVEL below 10'. 4 5 8 7 8 9 10 11 r ,2 13 ooeom a e>mwratan pll at aapn 13 feet 14 Ho Around water oeepepe, minor cMrw. 15 ' 16 ' 17 18 r ,g 3e ' ~ Yelm fi-Plex Movie Theater ~ Yelm, Washington ' A880CIATEO Project No. KE001010 8 `~ ~ SRrf ~~ EARTH B ' c Appro~d by SCIENCESe INC February 18, 2000 LOG OF EXPLORATION PIT NO. EP-4 sc 8 Ths lop is Dert of the report panes tryDy eASSOCabd Earm stxnors. tnc (AESq tar tM nanra p, rged ana shaYd be u~ne orris ti~on. s~uau~a corWi6oru may U~ianp t u~us ioca~uonryp~a~js~o! lo~nfgn~ aw~p inga are a sinpekation of saw conaNlons encountarW. DESCRIPTION Loose to medium dense, moist, black sandy T S IL with some grave , 3' thick @ S end of pit 1 2 Recessional Outwash 3 Medium dense, moist, tan, gravelty, medium to coarse SAND bo sandy GRAVEL Cobbles common. 4 5 6 7 8 9 Water table ~ 9 112'. 10 11 eoaom of saploration pit at depth t 0 teat Minor nvinp. 12 13 14 15 ,e ,~ ,8 19 1 1 1 r ~ Yelm 6-Plex Movie Theater Yelm, Washington 3 ASSOCIATED protect No. KE001oS0 6 Logged by: SRH ~~ EAATH B tappnrovee py SCIENCES. INC February 18, 2000 r_ LOG OF EXPLORATION PIT NO. EP-5 1 ~ f Thb lop b pram or tM ropon Dy Assocbted Earth Saenoss, Inc (AESI) br the named proisU arW sMuq be road OopMMr wKh that re for interpretation. TTrw summary appYSe only to the lonfbn~ of tlw trancn rt tM mr01 oru mry Wnpe et thw button with Ne paasapa of time The oats prefented are tine of aioCavaWn SutnuAa 6Y . . n a simWar:atlon of srtwt tonoalorw a+trntawsred. DESCRIPTION Loose to medium, moist, black sandy T IL with some gravel. 1 Rocsaslonal Outwattlt 2 Medium denx, moist, tan, gravelly, medium to coarse SAND Do sandy GRAVEL. Cobbles common. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Water table ~ 11 1!2'. 12 Bottom d a~iwatlon pR rt depM 121set 13 Minor to modante aNny. 14 15 16 17 18 19 x Yelm 6-Plex Movie Theater Yelm, Washington ~ ~~ ASSOCIATEC ProJoct No. [{E00103G $ Loflpea uy star EAF~77-t 8 ,rppro~ by; BCIENCEBa INC February 18, 2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS NUMBER OF PAGES DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions 16 15015 - Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work 3 15020 - Scope of Work 3 15060 - Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 12 15100 - Valves 3 15120 - Piping Accessories 4 15140 - Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Anchors 4 15240 - Sound Isolation 2 15250 - System Insulation 5 15300 - Fire Protection Systems 5 15430 - Floor Drains, Floor Sinks & Roof Drains 2 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 3 15450 - Water Heaters 2 15451 - Hot Water Temperature Maintenance System 3 15859 - Packaged Air Conditioning Units 6 15860 - Fans 3 15885 - Filters and Accessories 2 15890 - Ductwork g 15910 - Ductwork Accessories 5 15930 - Air Distribution Devices 3 15970 - Automatic Temperature Control System 3 15990 - HVAC Operational Test-Adjust-Balance 3 END OF TABLE OF CONTEN'?'S Prairie Park Cinema Table of Contents 5-25-00 Division 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 lq 15 16 17 18 19 2U 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2$ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 35 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL GSNBRAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK General: This Section specifies several categories of provisions for mechanical work, including: 1) Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 1; 2) General performance requirements within the mechanical systems as a whole; and 3) General work to be performed as mechanical work, because of its close association. Drawings: Refer to the Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings for graphic representations, schedules, and notations showing mechanical and plumbing work. Specifications: Refer to this Division 15 for the primary technical specifications of mechanical and plumbing work. Work Included: This Work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, apparatus, and appurtenances required for complete installation of operating heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing systems as indicated and specified, in place and ready for service. Work of Other Sections: Requirements given within this Section apply to the Work of all Sections of this Division. The actual performance of the Work stays within the Section in which it occurs; but subject to the requirements of this Section to the extent applicable. Finish painting is specified in Division 9. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. All black iron and steel piping, fittings, and accessories exposed to outside conditions shall be painted with an epoxy chromate primer. All equipment furnished under this Division shall be factory-finished. Any damage to this finish during shipment, storage, and installation shall be repainted, both prime and finish, with the same paint as used by the equipment supplier. Concrete housekeEping pads and supporting structures are specified under Division 3. Provide pads under each piece of floor-mounted mechanical. equipment, and size so that pad extends 4 inches beyond each edge in plan. Final dimensional requirements will be determined by the equipment furnished. Pads shall be a minimum of 4 inches high. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.1 1 DESIGN CONDITIONS: 2 3 General: Components of the heating and air conditioning 4 systems have been designed and selected according to the 5 following design conditions: 6 7 Indoor Conditions: 3t~er Winter 8 9 Theaters and Lobby 75° F 72° F 10 11 Outdoor Conditions: l2 13 3uamier: 81° Fdb and 64° Fwb 14 Winter: 28° Fdb 15 16 COORDINATION OF MECHANICAL WORK: 17 18 General: Refer to Division 1 for general coordination 19 requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized 20 that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain 21 physical relationships which must be established within the 22 mechanical work, and in its interface with other work including 23 utilities and electrical work, and thaC such establishment is 24 the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 25 26 Arrange mechanical work in a neat, well organized manner with 27 services running parallel with primary lines of the building 28 construction, and with a minimum of 7 feet-0 inches overhead 29 clearance where possible. 30 31 Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy 32 access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access 33 for operation and maintenance, and for proper Code clearances. 34 35 Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the 36 subsequent move-in of large units of mechanical work 37 (equipment). 3B 39 Coordination Drawings: For location where several elements cf 40 mechanical (or combined mechanical and electrical) work must be 41 sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into 42 the available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop 43 drawings} showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate 44 scale) required far the installation. Coordination Drawings 45 shall include but not be limited to AHU rooms, Fire Pump room, 46 Emergency Generator rooms, Central Plante, Elevator Equipment 47 rooms, Ceiling Plenums, and additional areas as required. 48 Ceiling Plenums shall define planes of work and clearly 49 indicate alloted space for light fixtures. Prepare and submit 50 coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication 51 installation of any of the elements involved in the 52 coordination. Mechanical equipment shown on the drawing shall 53 be the same equipment and size as shown on equipmenr_ shop 54 drawings. Any sleeves and major piping Yuns shall be shown on 55 the drawings. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.2 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 CODES, PERMITS, AND FEES General: Comply with the moat recently revised versions of all applicable laws, rules, regulations, and ordinances of Federal, State, and Local Authorities. Modifications required by the above said Authorities shall be made without additional charge to the owner. Where alterations to and deviations from the Contract Documents are required by said Authority, report the requirements and secure approval before starting work. Precedence: Where Contract Document requirements are in excess of Code requirements and are permitted under the Code, the Contract Documents shall govern. FEES AND PERMITS: This Contractor shall secure all permits, licenses and inspections required for his work, and shall pay all fees in accordance with such permits, licenses, and inspections. SEISMIC CONSIDERATION8: Anchor and support all items of equipment and piping in compliance with local codes and standards. SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION General: Become familiar with the Drawings and Specifications, examine the premises, and understand the conditions under which the Contract shall be performed. Site: Be informed of the existing conditions, verify locations of existing equipment, and determine exact requirements and provisions for connection. DRAWING3: General: The Drawings are schematic in nature and indicate approximate locations of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and plumbing equipment, fixtures, and piping systems, except where specific locations are noted and dimensioned on the Drawings. All items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated into the building construction. Locate all items by on-the-job measurements, conformance with drawings and code requirements. Cooperate with other trades to ensure project completion as indicated. Location: Prior to locating diffusers, grilles, and other exposed air devices, and plumbing fixtures, and plumbing items, obtair, approval as to exact location. Locations shall not be determined by scaling drawings. Plumbing fixtures shall be mounted at the heights directed by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for costa of redoing work of trades necessitated by failure to comply with this requirement. DISCRSPANCISS: Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 96 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Clarification: Clarification shall be obtained before submitting a proposal for the Work under this Division as to discrepancies or omissions from the Contract Documents, or questions as to the intent thereof. Contractor Agreement: Consideration will not be granted for misunderstanding of the amount of work to be performed. Tender of a proposal conveys full Contractor agreement of the items and conditions specified, shown on the drawings, scheduled, and/or required by the nature of the project. Conference: Upon the award of this Contract, and prior to commencing any work, the Contractor and his designated major subcontractors, shall confer with the Architect and Engineer concerning the Work under this Contract. The conference shall be at a mutually agreeable place and time. General: Maintain project record documents at the site as specified in Division 1. Site Prints: Maintain one net of the Contract Documents at the job site which shall be used for recording the final size, location, interrelation, and similar items of all work under this Division. This set of Documents shall be corrected daily as the Work progresses. "Ae Built" Record Drawings: The Record Drawing shall indicate exact "as built" locations of all concealed piping, valves, and other equipment and devices. Record dimensions shall clearly and accurately delineate the work as installed; locations shall be suitable identified by at least two dimensions to permanent structures. Prior to final acceptance of the work of this Division, the Contractor shall submit properly certified "Record Drawings" to the Architect for review and shall make changes, corrections, or additions as the Architect may require to the "Record Drawings". Upon approval, the Contractor shall have all data transferred to record sepias, which shall be submitted to the Architect for final review. Accuracy: The project record documents shall indicate exact locations of all concealed and visible piping, valves, ductwork, and equipment that are not installed at locations shown. QIIALITY A33IIRANCB AND STANDARDS: General: Refer to Division 1 for general administrative and procedural requirements related to compliance with codes and standards. 3tandarda: This work shall meet the standards set forth in the applicable portions of the following recognized codes and Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.4 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 49 45 46 47 48 99 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 standards: American Standard Codes, ASME, AGA, AMCA, ASA, ANSI, ASHRAE, and ARI. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Factory Mutual (FM). Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). National Electrical Code (NEC). National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA). National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). National Plumbing Code (NPC). Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Uniform Building Code, Latest Edition. Uniform Mechanical Code, Latest Edition. Uniform Plumbing Code, Latest Edition. BOCA National Building Code, Latest Edition. BOCA Plumbing Code, Latest Edition. BOCA Mechanical Code, Latest Edition 1997 Standard Building Code 1994 Standard Mechanical Code 1997 Uniform Plumbing Code 1997 Standard Fire Code County Building Code SMACNA State of Washington City of Yelm SUBMITTALS General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements concerning work-related submittals (refer to other Division -Sections for administrative submittals). Shop drawings shall have the Engineer's final review prior to equipment ordering or fabrication. All reports or infozmation requiring certification shall be certified by an authorized officer of the manufacturer, or testing agency. Obtain, check, certify, and submit complete Shop Drawings and product data for all materials and equipment specified herein. Furnish certified shop drawings showing dimensions, loading details, anchor bolt locations, and all inserts required for each piece of equipment set on concrete in sufficient time to cause no delay in the Work. Certify that data and details set forth on each shop drawing complies with the Contract Documents for this Project. Unless certified, shop drawings will not be reviewed, and will be returned unchecked to the Contractor. Check all materials and equipment after their arrival on the job site and verify their compliance with the Contract Documents. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of transmittal time, Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.5 i 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 will be required in the Engineer's office each time a shop drawing, product data, and/or samples are submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling his Work. The Engineer's review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for dimensions or errors that may be contained therein, or for deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents. Noting some errors, but overlooking others, does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the shop drawings, the Contract Documents shall govern the work. Electronic Media: Electronic Media for the project is available in AutoCadd version 14 format. Copies of the Electronic Media will be made available to the contractor on MEJ & Associates, Inc. FTP Internet site. Contact MEJ & Associates, Inc. for retrieval instructions. The Electronic Media is for the intended use of this project only and shall not be used by any party, in whole or in part, for any other project. Contractor shall have an acceptance period of 10 working days to review and accept CADD files delivered. The Electronic Media is intended to assist the Contractor in the preparation of shop drawings for this project and is to be considered as guide only. The Electronic Media as provided does not relieve the Contractor of any contract responsibilities as defined in the contract documents and specifications. The Electronic Media provided shall be modified as required by the Contractor to reflect only the items being submitted and shall be the Contractors responsibilities for completeness and coordination as defined by the contract documents and specifications. The Contractor agrees to provide the Owner and Architect/Engineer an Electronic Media copy of the approved shop drawings in the same format as indicated above. The Contractor agrees to warrant the CADD files as submitted for a 60 day acceptance period, and any CADD files not accepted shall be re-submitted. If the contractor wants the Electronic Media on a CD, the contractor agrees to compensate the Engineer for time and materials associated with preparing the disk for the contractor. The Contractor shall submit all requests in writing to the Engineer for Electronic Media. Shop Drawings and Product Data Brochures: Submittals shall contain all necessary information for review, including additional information when requested. Product Data Brochures shall contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. Unless all irrelevant information is deleted or unless relevant information is clearly marked, including all performances curves, sound data, recommended installation details, accessories, ratings, appurtenances, and sufficient data to indicate complete Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.6 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 90 41 92 43 44 45 96 97 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 compliance with the Contract Documents, including proper sizes, clearances, dimensions, capacities, materials, and finishes as required, submittals will be returned marked "Revised and Re- submit". Verify that the equipment will fit the available space. List on all submittals any deviations from equipment or materials specified. Where more than two reviews are required for a given submittal (i.e. two rejections), the submitting contractor will be invoiced for extra services at a rate of $100.00 per hour for the review of the third and subsequent submittals. Shop drawings will not be released by the Engineer until the invoice for extra services has been paid. Submittals for the work shall include, but not be limited to: Fans: Include dimensioned drawings of fans showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, filter requirements, weights, and curb or mounting requirements. Packaged heating/cooling units and all accessories: Include dimensioned drawings of units and accessories showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all fan curves, electrical characteristics, filter requirements, coils, weights, mounting requirements, and accessories. Air filters. Piping materials. Valves and fittings. Pipe hangers and supports. Piping flexible joints. Gages, thermometers, and meters. Pressure and temperature taps. Ductwork and plenums (fabrication drawings): Include dimensioned drawings for fabrication drawings accurately showing scaled ductwork and plenums, their layout, and relation to associated equipment or systems. Include verification that the ductwork and plenums have been coordinated with other systems. Access doors. Fire dampers. Smoke dampers Domestic hot water equipment: include dimensioned drawings of domestic hot water equipment showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all capacities, electrical and/or gas characteristics, weights, and pad/mounting requirements. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.7 1 Electric water coolers. 2 3 Grilles, diffusers, registers, and similar air distribution 4 devices: Include dimensioned drawings of grilles, diffusers, 5 registers, and similar air distribution devices and accessories 6 showing accurately scaled layout of equipment. Submit all air 7 and sound criteria, finish, mounting requirements, and 8 acceasoriea. 9 10 Ductwork flexible joints. 11 12 Flexible ductwork. 13 14 Thermal insulation. 15 16 Automatic temperature controls and interlock wiring diagrams: 17 Include shop drawings showing automatic temperature controls 18 and interlock wiring diagrams. Include certification that this 19 Division has fully coordinated all automatic temperature 20 controls and interlock wiring to work of other Divisions. 21 Submit all temperature control components and acceasoriea, 22 system operation, hardware, software, wiring diagrams, 23 electrical requirements, dimensioned drawings of equipment, 24 equipment locations, and equipment mounting requirements. 25 26 Vibration isolation. 27 28 Sound isolation. 29 30 Plumbing fixtures and trim. 31 32 Roof and floor drains. 33 34 Motor furnished with equipment or as separate items 35 36 Coordination Drawings: As required by Section 15010. 37 38 Housekeeping Pads: Include location and dimensions of 39 housekeeping pads, including blockouta and anchor bolts. 40 41 Firestops: Include all firestop materials for the project, 42 indicating intended use and UL fire rating where applicable. 43 44 Certifications and Test Reports: Submit 7 copies of all 45 certifications and test reports adequately in advance of 46 completion of the work to allow for remedial action as required 47 to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. 48 Prior to conducting tests and certifications, submit proposed 49 test procedures and reccrding forms for review by the 50 Architect. Necessary teat and certifications are described 51 under the appropriate section of this Division 15 unless set 52 forth hereinbelow. Certifications and teat reports to be 53 submitted shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: 54 55 Air Balance 56 Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 S1 52 53 54 55 56 Plumbing systems Warranties (Guarantees): Submit 7 copies of all warranties and guarantees for systems, equipment, devices, and materials (this includes 2 copies for maintenance manuals). Extended Warranty: when the manufacturer offers an extended warranty for an item or system, this warranty, and all benefits accruing thereunder, shall be transferred to, or written in the name of the Owner. Maintenance Manuals: Submit 4 copies; including complete description of each system, item of equipment, and apparatus provided under this Division, including ratings, capacities, performances, data and curves, characteristics identifying name and number, locations, and wiring diagrams; temperature control wiring diagrams complete with instructions outlining each sequential step in the start-up and shutdown of the heating/cooling system, and include precautions and instructions for servicing each item of the system; maintenance and operating instructions; fully detailed parts lists, including all numbered parts, of each item of equipment and apparatus provided under this Division; manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, service, maintenance, and repair of each item of equipment and apparatus; typewritten record of all tests made of materials, equipment, and systems included under this Division and such records shall state the dates the tests were conducted, name(s) of person(s) making witnessing the tests, and citing any unusual conditions relevant to the teats; and copies of all other submittals required by this Division 15. Organize each maintenance manual with Table of Contents, Index, and thumb-tab marked for each section of information. Bind in 2-inch, 3-ring binders, vinyl covered, with pockets to contain folded sheets. Properly label contents on spine and face of binder. samples: Submit 2 samples, upon request, of mechanical items and materials for review by the Architect. Samples will be returned upon written request of the Contractor. Approval: Materials installed or work performed without approval of materials shall be done at the risk of the Contractor and the cost of removal of such material or work which is judged unsatisfactory for any reason, shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Tools: Provide and deliver to the Owner's authorized representative any special tools required for maintenance of systems, equipment, and apparatus installed under this Division prior to requesting final acceptance of the installation. General: Refer to Division 1 for general requirements on temporary facilities. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 MECHANICAL PRODUCTS: General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general requirements on products, materials, equipment, and substitutions. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products of the mechanical work, and with other work requiring interface with the mechanical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed mechanical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work. Determine in advance of purchase that equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearance as required by applicable codes, and for adjustment, repair, or replacement. Substitutions: Materials and products of manufacturers other than those listed in this Specification require approval of the Architect in writing prior to submittal of shop drawings and product data. SCOPE SPECIFICATIONS: These Specifications are issued in conjunction with the Drawings which indicate that general scope of the Project in terms of the architectural design concept, the dimensions of the building, the type of structural, mechanical, electrical, and utility systems, and outline notes of major architectural elements of construction. As "Scope" documents, the Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily indicate or describe all work required for the full performance and completion of the Work. Contracts may be let on the basis of such documents, only if approved by the Architect, with the understanding that the Contractor is to furnish all items required for proper completion of the Work without adjustment to Contract Price. It is intended that the Work be of sound and quality construction and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the inclusion of adequate amounts to cover installation of all items indicated, described, or reasonably implied. Decisions of the Architect as to the items of work reasonably included within the "scope" of these Specifications shall be final and binding on the Contractor. PART 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION SPACE REQUIREMENTS: General: Determine in advance of purchase that the equipment and materials proposed for installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearances for adjustment, repair, or replacement. Clearance: Allow adequate space for clearance in accordance Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.10 1 with the Code requirements, and the requirements of the local inspection department. Responsibility: Since space requirements and equipment arrangement vary for each manufacturer, the responsibility for initial access and proper fit rests with the Contractor. Review: Final arrangements of equipment to be installed shall be subject to the Architect's review. MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP General: All materials and equipment shall be new and of best grade and quality, and standard products of reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Workmanship: Work shall be executed and all materials installed in accordance with the best practice of the trades in a thorough, substantial, workmanlike manner by competent workmen, presenting a neat appearance when completed. Manufacturer's Recommendations: With excepti and/cr indicated on the Drawings or in the apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean manufactured articles, materials, and manufacturer's current printed recommendations such printed recommendations at job site, available as required. >ns as specified Specifications, and condition equipment per Keep copies of and make them General: The design is based on the equipment scheduled; therefore, equipment furnished by other manufacturers named in the Specifications shall have prior approval of the Engineer. Materials and equipment shall be new and in good condition. The commercially standard items of equipment, and the specified names mentioned hereir. are intended to identify standards of quality and performance necessary for the proper functioning of the work. Since manufacturing methods vary, reasonable minor variations are expected; however, performance and material requirements are the minimum standard selections other than those scheduled, the Contractor shall bear all costs for any structural and/or Architectural modifications required for substituted equipment. IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING: Piping General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color-coded, plastic-sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. Markers shall indicate service or system according to the symbols, or as directed. Markers shall incorporate flow directional arrows. Letters and arrows shall be black on color-coded background conforming to Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2a 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 ANSI A13.1. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inches including insulation (if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each lecation, fastened with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inches. ihatallatioa: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting, or other covering or finish, including finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting and prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. Location: Locate pipe markers and color bands near each major control device, on 20-foot centers on straight pipe runs, at entries to walls and floors, and where pipe enters an accessible area. IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT E~cuipment: Provide plastic laminate nameplates, or stenciled lettering, on all items of heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing equipment such as water heaters, fans, air handling units, and similar items. Size shall be 1/16-inch thick by width (minimum 3 inches) and height (minimum 1 inch) necessary for identification wording and number. Lettering shall be 1/2-inch high for double line and 7/8-inch high for single line. Nameplate shall have black letters (core) engraved in a white background (face). Nameplates shall include the name and item number for each piece of equipment. Permanently attach nameplate to equipment in conspicuous places with self-tapping stainless steel screws, or contact adhesive where screws cannot be used. Valves: Install aluminum or plastic tags on all valves. Tags shall be a minimum of 1-1/2 inches in diameter and securely attached to stems with "S" books. Standard Symbols and Words: Symbols and abbreviations shall be those shown on the Contract Drawings. Acceptable Manufacturers: Seton Nameplate Corp., W.H. Brady Co., or Westline Co. warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of mechanical facilities. Provide text of Sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.12 I~ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Operational Taga: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of mechanical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either pre-printed or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING". PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING General: Ensure that all mechanical equipment, devices, and materials arrive at the site in good condition, intact in factory package or crate. Any equipment found to be damaged shall be removed from the project site. Storage: Store all mechanical equipment and materials in factory containers or package until ready for use. Storage facility shall be a clean, dry, indoor space which provides protection against weather. Avoid damage by condensation by providing temporary heating when required. Handling: Handle all mechanical equipment and materials carefully to prevent breakage, denting, or scoring of the finish. Damaged materials shall be removed from the project site. CUTTING AND PATCHING General: Place all equipment in time to avoid cutting new construction. If cutting and patching is required, comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Except as individually authorized by the Architect/Engineer, cutting-and-patching of mechanical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted. Approval: If holes or sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes necessary, it shall be done at no additional expense to the Owner. Undertake no cutting or patching without first securing approval. All patching shall create a surface which is structurally and aesthetically equal to the surface surrounding the area patched. EXCAVATING FOR MECHANICAL WORK: General: The work hereunder includes whatever excavating and backfilling is necessary to install the mechanical work. Coordinate the mechanical work with other work in the same area, including excavating and backfilling, dewatering, flood protection provisions, other temporary facilities, other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling. 3tandarda: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the applicable provisions of Division 2 for mechanical work Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 93 44 45 46 47 4fi 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 excavating and backfilling. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding with the Work. Replacement of Other Work: Where it is necessary to remove and replace landscape work, pavement, flooring, and similar exposed finish work, engage the original Installer to install the replacement work. If the work existed prior to the work of this Contract, engage only experienced and expert firms and tradespersons to replace the work. ROTATING SHAFTS: General: Shafts for rotating equipment, such as fans, shall be designed, sized, and fabricated so that the shaft will not pass through the first critical speed when accelerating from rest to normal operating speed. This provision shall include the effect of the driven equipment, such as fan blades and related appurtenances, that may influence performance. BELT AND COUPLING GUARDS: General: Provide metal belt guards for all belt-driven equipment. Guards shall be constructed sufficiently rigid to provide the required protection and shall be noise free when the equipment is in operation. Provide coupling guards for all flexible couplings. Coupling guarde and belt guards may be perforated metal to allow visual inspection. Belt guards shall have openings to allow measurement of pulley RPM without removal of the guard. NOISE AND VIBRATION: General: Warrant the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and their component parts to operate without objectionable noise or vibration. Noise from systems or equipment which results in noise within occupied spaces above the recommended noise criteria (NC) curves (refer to ASHRAE Handbook) shall be considered objectionable. Vibration shall not be apparent to the senses in occupied areas of the building. Objectionable noise, vibration, or transmission thereof to the building shall be corrected. Noise Level: Except in special areas listed separately, the noise level in occupied spaces shall be equal to, or less than, the "highest value in the range" of the noise criteria curves for the particular space in accordance with Table 19, Chapter 32 of the 1984 "Systems" Edition of the ASHRAE Guide and Data Book. The noise criteria values shall be based on ANSI Standard 51.6-1967 octave bands, and a sound pressure level in decibels referenced to 0.002 microbars. Sound levels within the occupied spaces must meet the criteria described above with all building, wall partition, floor and ceiling construction in place. The attenuation through boundary construction of equipment rooms must be considered in selecting equipment for acceptable noise level. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.14 1 i f. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 SS 56 MECHANICAL WORK CLOSBOUT General: Refer to Division 1 for general closeout requirements. Maintain a daily log of operational data on mechanical equipment and systems through the closeout period; record hours of operation, assigned personnel, power consumption, and similar information; submit copy to Owner. Coordination with Electrical work: Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of electrical systems, elevators, and other power-consuming equipment. Support Services: Test run mechanical equipment in coordination with test runs of electrical systems. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance, and safety/emergency provisions of the mechanical systems. Turn over the operations to Owner's perscnnel at the time (s} of substantial completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total Work of the Contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist Owner's personnel with operation of mechanical system. CLEANING, ADNSTING, AND START-IIP: Start-Up Services: Where specified for any individual item of heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing equipment, provide a factory authorized representative for testing, start-up of equipment, and instruction of Owner's operating personnel. Certify that these services have been performed by including a properly executed invoice for these services or a letter from the manufacturer. Lubrication: Provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. Extend a lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably identify it where lubrication fittings are concealed or inaccessible. Lubricate all parts requiring lubrication until final acceptance by the Owner. FINAL RBVISW: General: Upon completion of the Work, perform a final test of the entire system. The system shall be operating properly with all water and air volumes balanced and all temperature controls adjusted. After the final test, any changes or corrections noted as necessary for the work to comply with these Specifications and/or the Drawings, shall be accomplished without delay in order to secure final acceptance of the Work. The date for the final test shall be sufficiently in advance of the Contract completion date to permit execution, before expiration of the Contract, of any adjustments or alterations Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 which the final acceptance tests indicate as necessary for the proper functioning of all equipment. Any such modifications shall be completed within the number of days allotted for completion and shall be of such time duration as necessary to ensure proper functioning of adjusted and altered items. Re- tests shall not relieve the Contractor of completion date responsibility. Certificates, including certificates of occupancy from local authorities, and documents required herein, shall be completely in order and presented to the Engineer at least 1 week prior to the review. The final review is not intended to be a completion list for the contractor. The systems shall be complete and tested by the contractor and city prior to Engineers review. If the systems are not complete, and the contractor requires more than two reviews for a given system or area (i.e. two rejections), then the requesting contractor will be invoiced for extra services at a rate of $100.00 per hour and reimbursable expenses for the review of the third and subsequent field visits. Finial review reports will not be released by the Engineer until the invoice for extra services has been paid. Qualified Persoa: Individuals knowledgeable of the systems and persons approved by the Engineer, shall be present at this final inspection to demonstrate the system and prove the performance of the equipment. END OF SECTION 15010 i Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical General Provisions 5-25-00 15010.16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 to 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 SECTION 15015 - ELECTRIC?L ~P.OVISICNS OF MECHPSIICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ELECTRIC MOTORS: General: Motor voltages shall be ae follows, unless specified otherwise: 3/4 HP and larger - 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Smaller than 3/4 HP - 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hz. Start-up: All motors shall be started across-the-line, unless specified otherwise. All motors shall have copper windings. Motors shall be selected with low starting current and shall be designed for continuous duty to attain the running torque and pull-in torque required to suit the load. All motors shall be energy saver type in compliance with IEEE test method 113B. All motors shall be single speed of speed scheduled on drawings, and shall have standard dripproof enclosures, unless otherwise specified. All motors exposed to the weather shall be of the totally enclosed, fan cooled, or totally enclosed, air-over type. All motors shall be rated at 1.15 service factor. Motor shall have sealed-type ball bearings, unless noted otherwise. Field-lubricated motors shall have grease fittings. A field-lubricated motor is one with the bearing cage drilled and tapped with a plug to accommodate a grease fitting. All dripproof motors shall conform to NEMA dimensional Standards, Type B, 40 degree C insulation. TEFL, TEAO, and TENV shall conform to NEMA dimensional standards, Type F, 40 degree C insulation. Motor main frame and end bells shall be constructed of cast-iron on ploy-phase motors. Nameplate: A motor nameplate shall be securely affixed to each motor, and shall clearly indicate the class of insulation, winding material, and service factor, in addition to the usual electrical data. Motor Requirements: Refer to various Sections of this Division for additional motor requirements. Single Phaee Motors: Single phase motors shall be capacitor start with starting, pull-in, and running characteristics selected to suit the load served. Motors except TEFC and TENV types, shall have class "A" insulation which limits the temperature rise to 60 degree C with a service factor of 1.15 Prairie Park Cinema Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work 5-25-00 15015.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 l0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 when temperature is determined by the thermometer measuring method or 90 degree C with class "B" insulation and a service factor of 1.15 as determined by the resistance measuring method. All Totally enclosed fan-cooled and totally enclosed air-over single and three-phase motors shall have a service factor of 1.0, class "F" insulation, epoxy coated, cadmium plated hardware and cast iron housings. Manufacturers: Provide motors manufactured by the following: Baldor Century/Gould General Electric Louis Allis Reliance U.S. Westinghouse Energy Efficient Motors: All motors over 5 H.P. shall be premium energy efficient type. Motors shall have a minimum efficiency as follows: Horsepower Efficiency 5 90$ 7.5 - 10 91$ 15 92$ 20 - 25 93$ 30 - 40 94$ 50 - 100 95$ Motor efficiency shall be based upon dynamometer testing per IEEE 112 Test Standard, Method B, as set forth by NEMA MG 1- 12.53 standard for efficiency testing. Motors shall be Baldor Super-E motors or an approved equal. Motor Controllers: Motor controllers shall be furnished and installed under Division 16, except controllers furnished as an integral part of a piece of equipment. All starters shall conform to the requirements of Division 16. Controllers furnished as an integral part of equipment shall be rigidly mounted on steel members. PART 3 - EXECUTION GENERAL General: Motors shall be leveled, set in true angular and concentric alignment with driven equipment, and bolted firmly to the motor base, if not mounted on equipment. Motors factory-mounted on equipment shall be checked for alignment to Prairie Park Cinema Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work 5-25-00 15015.2 ' 1 driven equipment, and mounting bolts shall be checked to ensure 2 bolts are tightly fastened. 3 ' 4 END OF SECTION 15015 5 r i i r Prairie Park Cinema Electrical Provisions of Mechanical work 5-25-00 15015.3 ~ ~ r r ~ ~ . a~ . r +rs it as ~ rs a . ~ ^~ 1 SECTION 15020 - SCOPE OF WORK 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENT3: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 General: Provide all labor, materials, tools, machinery, 15 equipment, appliances, and services necessary to complete the 16 specified mechanical work of this Division. Coordinate Work 17 with other trades to prevent conflicts without impeding job 18 progress. 19 20 Utility Char ea: The Contractor shall pay all fees, tap 21 charges, meter charges, and special fees assessed by the local 22 utilities or local authorities. 23 24 Work Included: The Work includes, but is not limited to, the 25 following systems, equipment, and services: 26 27 Air Conditioning and heating system consis[ing of: 28 29 Self contained air conditioning units with gas heat. 30 31 Air distribution systems: 32 33 Sheet metal ductwork 34 35 Fiberglass ductwork 36 37 Fire dampers 38 39 Smoke/Fire dampers 40 41 Grilles, registers, and ceiling outlets 42 43 Insulation 44 45 Acoustical treatment of ducts 46 47 Sound attenuating equipment 48 49 Automatic temperature controls systems: 50 51 Building Automatic Temperature Control System 52 53 Electric control devices 54 55 Various relays. 56 Prairie Park Cinema Scope of Work 5-25-00 15020.1 1 Ventilating systems: 2 3 Exhaust fans 4 5 Dampers and similar items 6 7 Plumbing system: 8 9 Plumbing fixtures and trim 10 11 Domestic hot water supply piping 12 13 Domestic cold water supply piping 14 15 Domestic electric hot water heater 16 17 Electric water coolers 18 19 Sanitary waste piping, including connection to existing 20 sanitary sewer system 21 22 Vent piping 23 24 Floor drains 25 26 Insulation ~~ ~~ 28 Gas piping, including extending service from the gas meter 29 30 Connection of all equipment furnished under other Divisions. 31 32 Connection of equipment furnished by the Owner and 33 indicated on the Plans. 34 35 All water services. 36 37 All sewer services. 38 39 All water treatment. 40 41 Balancing and adjusting of mechanical systems as specified 42 herein. 43 44 45 PART 2 - PRODIICT3 46 47 GENERAL; 48 49 Refer to specific sections of the Specifications for equipment. 50 51 52 PART 3 - EXECDTION: 53 54 GEN$RAL: 55 56 Installation shall be in accordance with the Specification Prairie Park Cinema Scope of Work 5-25-00 15020.2 ' i section pertaining to the individual equipment. 2 3 END OF SECTION 15020 1 Prairie Park Cinema Scope of Work s-2s-oo lsozo.3 ~ ~ ~~ r^ie r ~ ~ ~ ~ ~e a~ ~r a~ a~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1 r 1 SECTION 15060 - MECHANICAL AND PLIIMBING PIPING 3Y3TEM3 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENT3: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide complete operating mechanical and 15 plumbiczg piping systems including all pipe, tube, fittings, and 16 appurtenances, as indicated and in compliance with these 17 Specifications. 18 19 Applications: Applications of piping systems include, but are 20 not limited to, the systems as listed below: 21 22 Working Operating 23 S_yatem* Pressure Temperatures 24 25 Domestic Cold Water 150 55 to 80 26 27 Domestic Hot Water 150 90 to 120 28 29 Fire Protection 150 55 to 80 30 31 Condensate Drainage -- 40 to 60 32 33 Sanitary Drainage -- -- 34 35 Storm Drainage -- -- 36 37 Natural Gas 50 -- 38 39 QUALITY ASSIIRANCE: 40 41 Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders, and operators in 42 accordance with ANSI B3.1.1, Paragraph 127.5, for shop and job 43 site welding of piping work. Make welded joints on the piping 44 system with continuous welds, without backing rings, and with 45 pipe ends beveled before welding. Gas cuts shall be true and 46 free from burned metal. Before welding, surfaces shall be 47 thoroughly cleaned. The piping shall be carefully aligned and 48 no weld metal shall project inside the pipe. 49 50 51 PART 2 - PRODIICTS 52 53 PIPING MATERIALS: 54 55 General: Provide pipe and tube of type, joint, grade, size, Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 35 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 and weight (wall thickness, schedule, or class) indicated for each service. Comply with applicable governing regulations and industry standards. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 or A 106 black or hot dipped galvanized as specified. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type "K", "L", or "M" copper water tube as defined by the Copper and Brass Research Association. Ductile-Iroa Pi e: ANSI A21.51, Class 150 with bell and spigot ends for push-on joints. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, standard weight, hub and spigot type. Hublesa Cast-Iroa Pipe: CISPI 301-78, standard weight with spigot bead ends for coupling assembly. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM D-2665 DWV pipe. PIPE/TUBE FITTINGS: General: Provide faetorp•-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class, and pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching pipe, tube, valve, and equipment connections. Where not otherwise indicated, comply with governing regulations, industry standards, and, where applicable, with pipe manufacturer's instructions for selections. Cast-Iron Flan ed Fittin s: ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or 250, black or galvanized as specified, including bolting and gasketing. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittin s: ANSI B16.4 or ASTM A126, Class 125 or 250, black galvanized as specified. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittin a: ANSI Bi6.3, Class 150 or Class 300, black or galvanized as specified. Malleable Iroa Threaded IIniona: ANSI B16.39; select for proper piping fabrication and service requirements including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze, or brass), plain or galvanized as specified. Threaded Pi a Plu s: ANSI B16.14. Steel Flan ea/Fittin s: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing, buttweld end connections and raised-face. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittin a: ANSI B16.11, rated to match schedule of connected pipe. Wrou ht-Steel Butt weldin Fittin s: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.2 1 B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match 2 connected pipe. 3 4 Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.22 galvanized with 5 pitched threaded ends. 6 7 PVC Fittings: Schedule 40, ASTM D-2665 DWV fittings. 8 9 Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected 10 pipe, except do not use less than Schedule 80 pipe where length 11 remaining unthreaded is less than 1/2-inch. Do not thread 12 nipples full length (no all-thread nipples). 13 14 Wrought-Copper/Bronze Solder-Joint Fittings: CISPI 301-78 and 15 comply with governing regulations. 16 17 Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 74. 18 19 Compression Gaskets: CISPZ HSN-75. 20 21 Lead/Oakum Joint Materials: Comply with governing regulations 22 for service use indicated. 23 24 Grooved-End Fittings: Fitting housings shall be cast of 25 malleable iron conforming to ASTM-A47 or ductile iron 26 conforming to ASTM-A536. Gaskets shall be EPDM grade "E" with 27 green color code identification, conforming to ASTM-D2000 28 designation for water service to 230F. Bolts and nuts shall be 29 heat treated carbon steel conforming to ASTM-A183, minimum 30 tensile 110,000 psi. Hinge pins/locking pins shall be cold 31 rolled steel conforming to AISI-1212. Couplings style 77 and 32 791, elbows, tees, reducing tees, strainers, butterfly valves, 33 and check valves are acceptable. Reducing couplings will NOT 34 be accepted. Fittings shall be equal to those produced by 35 Victaulic. 36 37 Flanged Fittings: Comply with ANSI B16.15 for bolt-hole 38 dimensioning, materials, and flange-thickness. 39 40 Flange Bolts: Bolts shall be carbon steel ASTM A-307 Grade A 41 hexagon head bolts and hexagonal nuts. Where one or both 42 flanges are cast-iron, furnish Grade B bolts. Cap screws 43 utilized with flanged butterfly valves shall be ASTM A-307 44 Grade B with hexagon heads. 45 46 Flange Bolt Thread Lubricant: Lubricant shall be an anti-seize 47 compound designed for temperatures up to 1000 degree F, and 48 shall be Crane Anti-Seize Thread Compound, or approved equal. 49 50 Miscellaneous Piping Materials/Products: 51 52 Welding Materials: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure 53 Vessels Code, Section II, Part C, for welding materials. 54 55 Soldering Materials: 95-5 Tin-Antimony solder, ASTM B32. Alloy Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Grade 95 TA. Brazing Materials: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, Section 9, for brazing materials. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: 1/16-inch thick for all pipe size 10 inches and smaller, and 1/8-inch thick for all pipe size 12 inches and larger. Ring type shall be used between raised face flanges and full face type between flat face flanges with punched bolt holes and pipe opening. Gaskets shall be equivalent to Johns-Manville Style 52 compressed asbestos with a non-stick clean surface lubricant coating applied to both sides of the gasket. Acceptable manufacturers are Crane, Johns-Mansville, or Garlock. Insulating (Dielectric) Unions: Provide dielectric unions at all pipe connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Unions shall be "Delwin" as made by Pipeline Seal and Insulator Co. or "EPCO" as made by Epco Sales, Inc., and shall have nylon insulation. Gasket for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C564, neoprene, compression type. Push-on-Joints: ANSI A21.11, rubber compression type, "Tyton Joint" as manufactured by U.S. Pipe o r equal. Hublesa Caet-Iron Joints: CISPI 310, stainless steel corrugated shield and clamp assembly over one piece neoprene sealing sleeve. PART 3 - EXECUTION PIPS INSTALLATION: General• Industry Practices: Install pipe, tube, and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without failure or degradation of service. Install each run with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions or flanged connections to permit disassembly for maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16-inch misalignment tolerance. Coordinate piping locations with other trades to avoid conflict. Give ductwork preference unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. System: Install all piping parallel or perpendicular to lines of building, true to line and grade, and with sufficient hangers to prevent sags between hangers. Provide fittings at all changes in direction. Piping in finished areas shall be Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 concealed, except in mechanical rooms. Where pipes of different sizes join, provide reducing elbows, tees, or couplings. Bushings will not be acceptable. Sxpanaion and Contraction: Install loops, offsets, sizing joints, and expansion joints, as necessary, to avoid strain resulting from expansion and contraction of piping systems on fixtures and equipment. Sxpanaion Loops and Offsets: Provide expansion loops and offsets in piping systems for not less than 1-inch expansion or contraction per 100 feet of pipe. Victaulic Couplings: Provide Victaulic connections where indicated on the Drawings and Specifications to reduce vibration at equipment connections. Provide expansion joints in piping systems by Victaulic connections where specifically indicated on the Drawings. Steel Pipe: Ream steel pipe after cutting and before threading. Thread with clean-cut taper threads of length to engage all threads in fittings and leave no full-cut threads exposed after make-up. Use John Crane, or approved equal, or Teflon-thread tape applied only to male threads to make-up joints. Copper Pipe: Cut copper pipe square and ream to remove burrs. Clean fitting socket and pipe ends with sand cloth, No. 00 cleaning pads, or wire brush. Coat socket inside and pipe end with flux containing zinc and ammonium chlorides prior to soldering. PVC Pipe: Cut PVC pipe square and remove all burrs. Clean fittings and pipe butt prior to installation. Install all PVC piping in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Final Connections to Equipment Furnished by Owner or IInder Other Divisions of these Specifications: Where Drawings show equipment to be furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications or by the Owner, such equipment will be delivered to the site, uncrated, assembled, and set in-place under those other Divisions of these Specifications or under the separate contracts. Any required automatic control valves shall also be provided under those other Divisions of these Specifications or other separate contracts. Make all final connections of gas, domestic water, waste, and vent as shown. Provide valves, unions, strainers, check valves, and traps as required for proper operation of systems and equipment. Equipment not shown or noted on the piping drawings shall not be included in the scope of this requirement. Excavation, Installation, and Backfill for Underground Pipe: Layout: Pipes shall be laid and pipe joints made in presence of the Architect and field measurements, layouts, batterboard alignment, grade establishments, and similar locations, shall Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 be performed by a Professional Engineer in the employ of the Contractor. The Contractor's Engineer shall be on-the-job during all underground Work. A "Bench-Mark" reference for use by the Contractor shall be provided by the Architect. Piping Grading: Lay and maintain all pipes at required lines and grades during the course of the Work to comply with the Drawings. Trench: Excavate the trench to the depth required. Properly brace and dewater the trenches and keep it free of water during installation, testing pipe, and backfilling. No water shall be discharged onto the street or freeway without approval by the Architect. Excavation: The trench shall be at least 18 inches wider than the maximum diameter of the pipe, or largest bell, and the pipe shall be laid in the center of the trench. The trench shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide for pipe cushions or supports as specified herein. Trench width may be increased as required, and piling left in place until sufficient compacted backfill is in place. Properly sheet and brace all open trenches to render them secure and remove all such sheeting and bracing before completing the backfill. Comply with local regulations or, in the absence thereof, with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. The quality of excavation required to install sheeting, and the installation and removal of sheetings and bracings will not be regarded as extra work, and all coats incurred for this excavation, and the installation of sheeting, shall be included in the Contract Price. Grading: Upon completion of excavation, and prior to the laying of the Wipe, the trench bottom shall be brought up to the required elevation with a pipe cushion, except where the cushion has been eliminated by the Architect. Pipe cushions shall be select material deposited in the trench, and shall be a compacted, leveled off, and shaped to obtain a smooth compacted bed along the laying length of the pipe. Pipe cushion material shall be as follows: Domestic Water Pities: Material for pipe cushion shall comply with local codes. In absence of local code requirements, the cushion shall be bank sand or select backfill material approved by the Architect. Any material used shall pass a 1-inch screen. Sanitary Sewers: Same as "Domestic water Pipes". Anchors: Cast-iron pipes shall have concrete anchors at each change in direction, and/or as directed. Any change in direction exceeding 15 degree shall be anchored. Concrete anchors shall rest against solid (virgin) ground with the required area of bearing on pipe and ground to provide suitable anchoring. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.6 i~ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 91 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Hackfill: Trenches shall be backfilled only after piping has been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect.All backfill material shall be placed in the trench either by hand, or approved mechanical methods. The compaction of backfill material shall be accomplished by tamping with hand tools or approved pneumatic tampers, by using vibratory compactors, by puddling, or by any combination of the three. The method of compaction shall be approved and all compaction shall be done to [he satisfaction of the Architect. Hackfill completely around pipe, including 18 inches above the pipe, with suitable bank sand, tamped in 4-inch layers under, around, and over pipe. Water down backfill as required. The remainder of the backfill for all pipes shall be select backfill material tamped at intervals of no more than 12-inch depths, to attain a 95~ Proctor Compaction Density. All materials to be used as selected material backfill shall be approved by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the excavated material does not meet the requirements of selected material, the Contractor shall be required to screen the material prior to its use as selected material backfill. Material used in the upper portion of the backfill, or subgrade, shall not contain stone, rock, or other material larger than 6-inches in its longest dimension. No wood, vegetable matter, or other material, which in the opinion of the Architect, is unsuitable shall be included in the backfill. The upper 24 inches of backfill may be water jetted, if desired. Backfill shall be brought up to finish grade identified on the Architectural Drawings, including additional backfill required to offset settlement during consolidation. When removal of unsuitable, excavated material creates a shortage of backfill material, the Contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, furnish material as specified in this Section in the amount required to complete the backfill. Existing Surfaces: Existing streets, driveways, and sidewalks damaged during the excavating work shall be restored to acceptable condition, subject to approval by the Architect. Safety: Provide all streets and sidewalks excavations with approved barricades, warning lights, and coverplatea ae required by City. PLUMBING SERVZCHS: General: Install the various piping systems as described hereinafter, and as required by the local plumbing inspection department. Slope domestic hot and cold water piping to drain and provide with hose valves (drain valves) at low points. Install soil, waste, and vent piping with horizontal lines pitched in accordance with local codes, but in no case leas than 1/4-inch per foot for pipe 3 inches smaller and 1/8-inch per foot for pipe 4 inches and larger. install soil, waste, and vent piping with hubs of each length of piping in the Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 upstream position Make-up lead and oakum joints with molten lead run into hubs in one continuous pour, to a minimum depth of 1 inch. Make-up "Ty-Seal" or "Dual-Tire" gasketed joints using lubrication and joining tools as instructed by the manufacturers. Base of stacks, horizontal runs under pressure, and all gasketed pipe 5 inches and larger shall be made up using "Lubrifast" joining material. Torque "No-Hub" joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not install "No-Hub" joints below ground. Provide chrome-plated piping at each fixture installed in a finished space. Install with proper strap wrenches to avoid marking or defacing. Provide proper restraints on all riser and stack offsets Plumbing Connections to Fixtures and 6guipment General: Provide necessary pipe and fittings. Make final connections to provide cold water make-up and natural gas supply to mechanical equipment. Locate cold water make-up and gas supply where shown and connect with suitable stop valves. Gas Supply: Provide gas supply to air conditioning/heating equipment as indicated on Drawings. DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SYSTEMS: Interior Hot and Cold -oater Piping: Piping 3 inches and smaller, Type L copper tubing with wrought copper solder end fittings. Provide isolation fitting whenever dissimilar materials are used. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide piping runouts to fixtures sized to comply with governing regulations. Where not otherNise indicated, provide runouts sized to comply with the following: lavatories - 1/2-inch hot, 1/2-inch cold; water closet flush valves - 1-inch cold; urinal flush valves - 1-inch cold; drinking fountains - 3/8-inch cold. Each fixture shall be provided with a shut-off valve for each supply line. All exposed lines shall be chromium-plated. Air Chambers Riser Air Chambers: At the top of each main hot and cold water riser, provide an air chamber two pipe sizes larger than riser pipe and 24 inches high. Fixture Air Chambers: At each hot and cold water supply pipe at Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 each fixture, provide an air chamber the same size as the fixture branch and not less than 18 inches high. Shoktrole: Shock absorbers equal to Josam ^Abaorbotron" bellows type absorbers, specifically sized for the application, may be used in lieu of the specified air chambers. O-ring type absorbers are not acceptable. If shock absorbers are used instead of air chambers the contractor shall submit calculations for the sizing and selection of the unite. They shall also submit a revised riser diagram showing the location of all absorbers. wall access panels shall be installed at all absorbers for access to the units. UNDERGROUND DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE AND FIRE PROTECTION PZPING Piping 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: Type "K", copper tubing with wrought copper solder end fittings. Piping 3 inch and Larger: Ductile iron bell and spigot, push-on joint, pressure water pipe. Joints shall be of the push-on type employing a molded rubber gasket retained in a ring recessed into the inside of the bell. Pipe and joints shall be manufactured by Tyler Pipe and Foundry Company, or equal. Coat pipe and fittings inside and outside with the mamlfacturer's standard coal tar enamel suitable fcr dcmest_c •eater serv__e. STORM AND SANITARY DRAINAGE SYSTEM: Soil, Waste and Vent Pining Underground: Schedule 40 PVC DWV pipe joined with Schedule 40 PVC DWV glued fittings. Storm Drainage Piping Underground: Same as soil, waste and vent piping underground. Soil, Waste and Vent Piping Above Ground: Service weight cast-iron sell pipe and fittings with neoprene gasket joints or hubless cast-iron pipe fittings with coupling assembly. tion: At the Contractors option, for branch piping only, galvanized malleable iron fittings for vent piping and galvanized cast-iron drainage fitting for soil and waste piping may be used in lieu of the above. Storm Piping Above Ground: Same as soil, waste and vent piping above ground. Cleanouta Finished Floor: Zurn Z-1400, cast-iron adjustable assembly with nickel bronze cover and tapered thread bronze plug. Provide clamping collar when installed in floors having waterproofing membrane. Provide carpet ring for installation in floors with carpet. IInfiniehed Areas: Zurn No. 21440 cleanout with bronze plug. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Syatema 5-25-00 15060.9 i Nalls: Zurn Z-1443, cast iron with bronze plug, square 2 stainless access cover and frame with vandalproof screws. 3 4 Outside: Zurn Z-1400, non-slip, vandalproof cover with 5 anchoring lugs. Provide bronze plug. 6 7 Locatioas: In each change of direction of soils and wastes, 8 each 90-foot length of horizontal straight run, and where 9 shown. 10 11 Fixture Connections: 12 13 oPater Closets: ASS nipples. 14 15 Urinals: Copper or cast-iron nipples with suitable adapters. 16 17 Lavatories: Copper or cast-iron nipples with suitable 18 adapters. 19 20 Service Sinks: Braes or cast-iron nipples with suitable 21 adapters. 22 23 Drinking Pountains: Copper or cast-iron nipples with suitable 24 adapters. 25 26 NATUunr• CiA9 PIPINQ SYSTEM: 27 28 Coda-Compliance Products: Comply with City of Yelm, County and 29 NFPA regulations which require the products used for gas piping 30 work to be selected from lists in certain published standards 31 or coded as indicated therein. 32 33 Oas Pipiag: All gas piping, 2-1/2-inch and smaller, intended 34 for operation at pressures 5 prig or greater shall be ASTM A 35 53, Schedule 90, black steel joined by Class 150 pound, banded, 36 black malleable iron, threaded fittings. All gas piping, 37 3-inch pipe size and larger, intended for operation at 38 pressures of 5 psig or greater shall be ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, 39 black steel joined by Schedule 40, black welding fittings. 40 41 Concealed Pipiag sad Protection: All gas piping run concealed 92 in walls, chases, or above ceilings shall be installed in 43 chases ventilated to the outside atmosphere at top and bottom, 44 or in metal sleeves or conduit vented to the outside 45 atmosphere. Inaccessible piping shall be all welded. 46 47 IInderground Piping: Gas piping installed below grade shall be 48 coated with Republic Steel Corporation (US) "X-Tru-Coat" high 49 density polyethylene extruded coating, factory-applied with a 50 fluid mastic to a minimum thickness of 0.040-inch. Field 51 welds, joints, and fittings shall be protected with mastic 52 undercoat and by wrapping at least two layers of "X-Tru-Tape" 53 installed as instructed by manufacturer. 59 55 Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.10 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2a 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 a3 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 General: Provide a condensate drain pipe to connect each cooling unit drain pan to extend to and discharge into a roof drain Assembly: Use- Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with matching fittings. Assemble fittings to form a trap with depth equal to or greater than operating pressure of the unit served. Drains shall be of the sizes indicated, but not less than the full size of the drain pan connection. CLEANING, FLUSHING, TESTING, AND INSPECTING: Cleaning: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems and prepare surface for application of any required coatings. Flushing: Flush piping systems with clean water prior to performing any required tests. PiDina Testa General: Equipment shall be blanked off during tests. Tests shall be performed before piping is enclosed in walls, floors, partitions, or in any other way concealed from view. Teats may be performed in sections. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and local inspectors and results presented to the Engineer for acceptance and approval prior to concealing piping from view. Provide all necessary equipment for testing, including pumps and gages. Domestic Water Systems: Test hot and cold water systems hydrostatically to a pressure of 100 psig or 1-1/2 times working pressure, whichever is greater, far a period of 4 hours. Repair all leaks, replacing materials as necessary, and repeat tests until systems are proven tight. Soil, Waste, and Veat Piping System: Test soil waste dnd vent piping by plugging all openings and filling system to height required by City Plumbing Inspector, but not less than 20 feet. Inspect all joints for leaks, repair any leaks found, and retest until piping is demonstrated to be free from leaks. In addition to water test, apply peppermint or smoke tests, if required by local code. Storm Drainage Piping System: Test storm drainage piping same as specified foz Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System. Natural Gas Piping System: Test natural gas piping with compressed air or nitrogen to a pressure at 5 times the expected service pressure, but not less than 50 psig, for a period of one (1) hour. Repair all leaks, replacing materials as necessary, and repeat test until systems are proven tight. Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems 5-25-00 15060.11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Disinfection of Plater S stems: Disinfect hot and cold water systems as follows: Fill systems with water solution containing 50 ppm available chlorine; allow to stand for 4 hours, opening and closing all valves several times during this period; thoroughly flush; refill and place system in service; ensure a residual chlorine content of 2.5 ppm. Cleanin and Ad'ustin Thoroughly clean and disinfect all plumbing fixtures, including all exposed trim. Adjust all flush valves for proper flushing, but without excess use of water. Demonstrate to the Engineer that the entire plumbing system and all components thereof are functioning properly. inspecting: Visually inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, adequate hangers and supports, and inclusion of accessories and appurtenances. END OF SECTION 15060 Prairie Park Cinema Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems , 5-25-00 15060.12 ~' 1 i 1 1 1 SBCTION 15100 - VALVES 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide valves as specified and indicated. 15 16 17 PART 2 - PRODIICTS 18 19 MATERIALS: 20 21 General: All valves shall be similar and approved equal to 22 numbers listed. Approved equal valves by Jenkins, Crane, 23 Fairbanks, Lunkenheimer, Nibso, Powell, Norris, Denco, Weco, 24 Stockham, Walworth, or Hammond, will be acceptable. All 25 similar type and size valves shall be products of one 26 manufacturer. Ball valves shall be by Jenkins, Jamesbury, 27 Hills-McCanna, or Powell. 28 29 Sall Valves: All ball valves shall be designed to permit 30 repacking while valve is in line. Valve shall be furnished 31 with blowout-proof stems. All ball valves shall be full-lined 32 size to prevent flow restriction through the ball. 33 34 Gate Valves: All bronze gate valves shall have packing boxes 35 with adequate depth to allow space for sufficient amounts of 36 stem packing. Malleable iron handwheels and gland followers 37 shall be furnished on all bronze gate valves. All gage valves 38 shall have braided asbestos Teflon stem packing. OSY, IBBM 39 gate valves shall be furnished with a stem lubrication fitting 40 on all sizes. All gate valves shall be designed to permit 41 repacking while the valve is in line. 42 43 Marking of Valves: Comply with MSS SP-25. 44 45 Valve Dimensions: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions 46 of flanged or welding-end valve bodies, comply with ANSI 47 B16.10. 48 49 VALVES: 50 51 Block (Stop) Valves: 2 inches and smaller ball valves, shall be 52 red brass, cast bronze, or yellow forged bronze with brass, 53 stainless steel, or bronze ball and stem, 150 prig non-shock 54 WOG at 200 degree F, Jenkins Fig. No. 900T. Valves 2-1/2 55 inches and larger shall be butterfly type, 150 psig non-shock Prairie Park Cinema Valves 5-25-00 15100.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 WOG at 200 degree F, ANSI Class 150 with ductile iron lug body. The replaceable resilient elastomer seat shall be Buna N or EPDM. The disc shall be silicon or aluminum bronze, and shaft shall be 316 or 416 stainless steel. Secondary O-ring seals shall be provided at the top and bottom of the upper and lower shafts to guarantee zero leakage to the shaft, Jenkins Fig. No. 232E or 232E. Balancing Valves: Valves shall comply with the general requirements specified for block valves. Valves used for balancing shall have adjustable memory stops or position indicators, Jenkins Fig. No. 900TE. Gate Valves: 2-1/2 inches and smaller, Jenkins Fig. 47, 300 psig water, oil, gas (WOG) bronze body with screwed bonnet and ends. 3 inches and larger, Jenkins Fig. 651-A, 200 psig WOG. Globe Valves: 2 inches and smaller, Jenkins Fig. 746 or Fig. 1200, bronze body, bronze rising stem, screw-in bonnet, renewable seat, and screwed or solder ends. 2-1/2 inches and larger, Jenkins Fig. 613, 200 psig WOG, outside screw and yoke (OSY), iron body, bronze trimmed, renewable seat, Class 125, ANSI B16.1 flanged ends. Relief Valve: Temperature and pressure, self-closing, lever operated with thermo-bulb extensions, 3/4-inch, ANSI B2.1 taper thread male inlet connection, 210 degree F (98.8 degree C) and 125 psig setting, ANSI 21.22, Type No. 40XL Watts Regulator Company. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer: Backflow preventer shall be Watts SS009 Stainless Steel reduced pressure type for sizes 1 inch and smaller. Sizes 1-1/4 inches through 2 inches shall be Watts Series 909. Sizes 2-i/2 inches and 3 inches shall be Watts Series 009. Sizes 4 inches through 10 inches shall be Watts Series 992. Preventera shall be rated for pressure up to 150 psig working pressure at 140 degree F (60 degree C). Domestic Water Pressure Reducin Valves: Watts 223S or Clayton 90G-O1. Pressure and flow schedule as indicated on the Drawings. Valves for Gas Connections: 2 inches and smaller, Nordstrom Fig. 114. 2-1/2 inches to 4 inches, Nordstrom Fig. 115. 6 inches to 12 inches, Nordstrom Fig. 1169. Regulators for Gas Service: Equimeter 043 rated for a inlet pressure of 5 psig and a outlet pressure of between 6" W.C. to 14" W.C. CFH capacity shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. PART 3 - $XECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the Prairie Park Cinema Valves 5-25-00 15100.2 1 following requirements. 2 3 Valve 3tema: Install valves with stems pointed up, in the 4 vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems 5 pointed downward from a horizontal plane. 6 7 Swing Check Valves: Swing check valves shall be installed in 8 horizontal piping only. 9 10 IIniona and Companion Flanges: Provide unions or companion 11 flanges where required to facilitate dismantling of valves and 12 equipment. 13 14 END OF SECTION 15100 15 Prairie Park Cinema Valves 5-25-00 15100.3 r r r r r r s ~s r~ r r ~^ r r r~ +~ r~ . r 1 SECTION 15120 - PIPING ACCESSORIES 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENBRAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification 10 section, apply to work of this section as well as Section 11 15010. 12 13 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 14 15 Work Included: Provide all piping accessories as specified and 16 indicated. 17 18 19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 20 21 STRAINERS: 22 23 General: Water strainers shall be approved equal to the 24 following Mueller Steam Specialty Company Model numbers listed. 25 26 150 paig Working Pressure: 150 working pressure, 2 inches 27 smaller shall be Muessco No. 11, 400# WOG, iron body with 28 perforated 20 mesh monel screen with cleanout and screwed ends. 29 2-1/2 inches through 24 inches shall be Muessco No. 751, 150# 30 WOG, perforated monel screen with 1/16-inch perforations for 31 sizes through 4 inches, and 5/32-inch perforations for 5 inches 32 and above, with blowdown connection, and Class 125 ANSI 616.1 33 flanged ends. 34 35 Manufacturers: The above model number establish a level of 36 quality and material. Strainers by Crane, Muessco, Zurn, or 37 Keckley shall be considered where they equal, or, are superior 38 to the above standard. 39 40 ESCUTCHEON PLATES: 41 42 General: Provide escutcheon plates on all exposed piping where 43 piping penetrates the walls, floors, or ceilings of finished or 44 semi-finished rooms. A semi-finished room shall be defined as 45 a room having any floor covering, paint or any other finish on 46 walls, or has a ceiling. A finished room shall be defined as 47 a room which has any floor covering, paint or other finish on 48 walls, and a ceiling. 49 50 T e: Escutcheon plates shall be Dearborn Brass Company Fig. 51 No. 1149 through 1152. 52 53 54 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS IN PIPING: 55 Prairie Park Cinema Piping Accessories 5-25-00 15120.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 General: Provide flexible connections in piping where shown on the Drawings or specified under Division 15. es: For piping 2 inches and smaller, flexible pipe connections at pumps and other equipment, where shown, shall be Metal-Flex or Flexonics double-braided, stainless steel flexible connections with screwed connections. For larger pipe sizes, flexible connections at pumps and other equipment where shown, shall be Keflex Type 151-TR-1215, or equal flexible connections with control units. Victaulic couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connections where specifically indicated on the Drawings. SLEEVES General: Provide sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors, and roofs. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to permit pipe, or pipe and insulation, to pass through and leave an annular space for caulking. Sleeves through concrete construction, interior partitions, and ceilings shall be 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. Masonry construction and exterior penetrations both above and below grade shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Floor sleeves shall extend 2 inches above floor. Outside Walls Below Grade: Where pipes pass through outside walls which are below grade, provide galvanized steel pipe with water stop. When pipe is in place, seal with "Link-Seal" Unit with EPDM links as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan, or approved equivalent. Fire-Rated Floor and Wall Penetration: Provide fire rated thermal shields on all pipe passing through fire walls or floors. Shields shall be as manufactured by Pipe Shields, Inc., San Jose, California, or approved equal by Insul-Shield or Uni-Grip. The Contractor may utilize alternate methods of fire stopping where specific details have been approved by all reviewing agencies, and the details provide air and noise isolation equal to the units specified. Pipe Pipe Shields, Inc. Model Bare Pipe WFB Chilled Water, Heating Water, WFB-CS-CW and Chilled Drinking Water Pipe Other Insulated Pipe WFB-CS FLASHING: Flashing shall be provided under other Divisions of this Specification. DRIP PANS: General: Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal, 20 gage or heavier, all welded seams and joints, Prairie Park Cinema Piping Accessories 5-25-00 15120.2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 edges turned up 2-1/2-inches. Reinforce top edge with lxlx3/16 structural angle or by rolling top over a 1/4-inch rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at the low point for watertight joint and 1 inch drainline connection. Trap Primers: Provide trap primers at all floor drains and floor sinks a shown on the drawings or required by local code. The primer shall be equal to Precision Plumbing Products Inc. "New" Prime-Rite Trap Primer Valve. For primer valves serving more than one drain use a Precision Plumbing Products "Trap Primer Distribution Unit" to distribute the water to the drains. Access Doors and Panels: Verify the location and quantity of access doors or panels required to provide full valve access. Doors shall be as specified in Division 8. If no doors are specified in this section the doors installed in non-rated gypsum board shall be a non-rated door and frame, formed steel type, equal to Model "DW Access Door"manufactured by Milcor Limited Partnership, or approved. Fire rated doors and frames in fire rated gypsum board shall be: Formed steel type; 1-hour, Class B fire rating; Model "Fire Rated Door" manufactured by Milcor Limited Partnership, or approved. Formed steel type; 1-1/2-hour, Class B fire rating, prime painted finish with an insulated door, and with flush key operated cylinder locks, key all locks the same. Model "VFR" by Milcor Limited Partnership, Model "L-Trap" by Larsens Manufacturing Company, Model "KPR-150FR" by Karp Associates, Inc, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Pipe Sleeves: Size and install sleeves so that piping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in the sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except as noted in "SLEEVES" section stated above. Pack and caulk or otherwise seal between pipes and sleeves as specified under "SLEEVES'. Thermal Shields: On insulated lines, butt end of adjoining insulation with vapor barrier mastic and seal joint with 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape. Drip Pane: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3 feet horizontally of electrical equipment. Hang from structure with rods. Brace to prevent sagging, or swaying. Connect 1 inch drain line to drain connection and run to Prairie Park Cinema Piping Accessories 5-25-00 15120.3 nearest floor drain or elsewhere as indicated. Trap Primers: Install a shut off valve on the line serving the primer unit, ahead of the unit, so it can be serviced by turning off the water. END OF SECTION 15120 Prairie Park Cinema Piping Accessories 5-25-00 15120.4 1 SECTION 15140 - PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 8 and Supplementary Conditions, Divisipn 1 Specificaticn section, 9 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 12 13 Work Included: Provide all pipe hangers, supports, and 14 required appurtenances as specified and indicated. 15 16 M33 Standard Compliance: 17 18 Provide pipe hangers and supports of which material, design dnd 19 manufacturer comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58, SP-69, SP-89, and 20 SP-90. 21 22 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 23 24 General: Provide pipe hangers and supports as shown or 25 specified, or both, herein. Comply with local codes and 26 standards for pipe and equipment support and anchorage. Pipe 27 supports shall be of material that will prevent electrolytic 28 action. 29 30 Inaerte: Provide Grinnell No. 282 inserts for concrete 31 construction. 32 33 Pi in in Multi le Parallel Runa: Provide Grinnell No. 95 or 34 50 with Grinnell No. 137 U-bolt pipe clamps or structural 35 channels or angles with U-bolt clamps, supported as trapeze 36 hangers where multiple parallel runs of piping are shown. 37 Select and size all members for weights to be carried and span 38 dimensions between supports. 39 4G Piping in Single Runa: Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 239 or 41 Grinnell No. 260 clevis hanger. 42 43 Hangar Rod: Provide cadmium coated, or galvanized hanger rods 44 of length required. Rod diameters shall be as follows: 45 46 Pipe Sizes in Inches Rod Diameter in Inches 47 48 3/4 through 2 3/S 49 2-1/2 through 3 1/2 50 4 through 5 5/8 51 6 3/4 52 8 through 12 7/8 53 14 through 18 1 54 Riser Clamps: Provide Fee and Mason Fig. 241 riser clamps. 55 Riser clamps for copper tube shall be copper-plated. Prairie Park Cinema Pipe Hangers, Supports and Anchors 5-25-00 15140.1 1 a 3 4 5 6 7 8 a 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 36 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Saddles and Shields: Saddles for Horizontal Insulated Piping without Vapor Barrier: At each hanger or support on horizontal runs, provide Grinnell ' No. 150 or Fee and Mason Fig. 171, 1710, 1712, or 172 saddles, as applicable. Shields as described below may be used in lieu of the saddles. On heating water systems below 140 degree F (60 degree C), hangers may be sized for the pipe size, and of ' a material compatible with the pipe. Where dissimilar materials are used, provide dielectric separation. Carry insulation over the hanger and seal where hanger is sized for ' pipe. Shield for Horizontal Insulated Water Piping with Vapor ' Barrier: At each hanger or support for water piping, provide a half section of preformed 6 PCF density fiberglass or rigid calcium silicate, with jacket of adjacent insulation brought ' across unbroken, supported on semi-circular 16-gage shields. Shields for pipe 4 inches and smaller shall be 12 inches long; shields for pipe 5 inches to 8 inches shall be 168 inches long; and shields for largez pipe shall be 24 inches long. PART 3 - $3CECDTION Provisions for Movement: Movement: Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and Similar units. Load Distribution: In5ta11 hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to any pipe or connected equipment. Pipe supports shall properly transmiC the weight of the pipe and its contents to the building structure, or to independent posts, piers or foundations. Pipe Slopea:Instail hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installatior. requirements. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through the insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. Shields: Where low-compressive-strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold water piping, install coated protective shields. Spacing: Install hangers and supports in piping systems to Prairie Park Cinema Pipe Hangers, Supports and Anchors 5-25-00 15140.2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 remove stress from equipment flanges and rotating equipment. 2 Space hangers and supports as follows: 3 4 Trade Pipe Size Maximum Spacing $ linches) (feet) 6 7 1/2 5 B 3/4 6 9 1 and 1-1/4 7 1G 1-1/2 9 11 2 10 12 2-1/2 11 13 3 12 14 4 14 15 16 Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, I7 install protection saddles, or use hangers ae indicated in lg "SADDLES AND SHIELDS" above. 19 20 Guides: Install pipe guides complying with the manufacturer's 21 published product literature. where not otherwise indicated, 22 install pipe guides near expansion loops, expansion joints, and 23 ball joints. 24 25 Anchors: install anchors at the propex locations to prevent 26 stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, and to 27 prevent the transfer of loading and stresses to connected 28 equipment. Anchors shall include vibration isolation in 29 accordance with the pipe support system specified. Where the 30 piping system is floating, the anchors shall be termed 31 restraints or braces. 32 33 Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in 34 accordance with the expansion unit manufacturer's written 35 instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to the 36 maximums recommended by the manufacturer of each unit. 37 38 Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at the ends cf 39 principal pipe runs, and at intermediate points in pipe runs 40 between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset 41 of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and 42 contraction of piping. 43 44 Leveling: Adjust hangers and supports and place grout as 45 required under supports to bring piping to proper levels and 46 elevations. 47 48 Hangers: Pipe hangers made of wood, wire, or sheet iron shall 49 not be permitted. 50 51 Riser Supports: Vertical piping shall be secured at sufficient 52 close irtertra?s to keep the pipe in alignment and carry the 53 weight cf the pipe and contents. 54 55 Cast-iron soil pipe shall be supported at the base and at each 56 story level, but in no case at intervals greater than 20 feet. Prairie Park Cinema Pipe Hangers, Supports and Anchors 5-25-00 15140.3 1 Steel pipe shall be supported at the base and at not less than 2 every other story level, but in no case at interva ls greater 3 than 28 feet. 4 5 Copper tube shall be supported at each level, but in no case at 6 intervals greater than 12 feet. 7 8 Plastic pipe shall be supported a t mid point between floors and 9 at ceiling to prevent movement, but in no case at intervals to greater than 8 feet. 11 12 END OF SECTION 15140 13 Prairie Park Cinema Pipe Hangers, Supports and Anchors 5-25-00 15140.4 1 SECTION 15240 - SOUND ISOLATION 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENBRAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Divisipn 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to wprk of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OIP VPORR: 13 14 4Pork Included: Provide and install pre-fabricated silencers in 15 the duct system of the size and performance shown on the duct 16 attenuator schedule. 17 18 I9 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 20 21 Manufacturers: Provide duct attenuator units manufactured by 22 the following: 23 24 Commercial Acoustics 25 Dynasonic 26 Industrial Acoustics Co. 27 Environmental Elements Corporation 28 29 3UHMITTAL3: 30 31 Manufacturer's Data: The contractor shall select one 32 marufaeturer to provide all duct silencers. The submittal data 33 shall indicate the size, type, performance and certified test 34 reports from a nationally know qualified, independent 35 laboratory corroborating the catalogue performance. Test 36 reports shall be based on 24" x 24" cross sectional area of 37 each type and model required for this project. Further, the 38 submittal data shall indicate clearly, outlined procedures 39 for installing the duct silencers. 40 41 The duct silencers supplier or hia qualified representative 42 shall be responsible for providing such supervision as may be 43 required to assure correct and complete installation of the 44 duct silencers. 45 46 PART 2 - PRODIICTS 47 48 DUCT SOUND SILENCERS: 49 50 General: The outer casing of all rectangular duct silencers 51 shall be of not less than 22 gauge galvanized steel 52 construction and external seams shall be lock formed and filled 53 with mastic or continuously welded and shall be airtight up to 54 8" water gauge pressure differential. Casings shall be suitably 55 stiffened to prevent permanent deformation when tested a 8" 56 pressure differential. Prairie Park Cinema Sound Isolation 5-25-00 15240.1 1 Interior partitions shall be of not less than 24 gauge 2 galvanized perforated steel. 3 4 The acoustical filler material shall consist of inorganic 5 mineral or glass fiber of a density required to obtain the 6 specified acoustic performance and packed under not less than 7 5~ compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and B settling. Materials shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof, 9 and impart no odor into the air. The incombustible acoustical 10 filler material shall exhibit not more than the following fire 11 hazard classification values when tested in accordance with 12 standard ASTM-E84, NFPA-255, or (JL-723 test methods. 13 14 Flame Spread 15 15 Fuel Contribution 15 16 Smoke Development 0 17 18 Acoustic and Aerodynamic Performance: Acoustical testing shall 19 conform to ASTM E477-73 standard method of testing duct liner 20 materials and prefabricated silencers for acoustical and air 21 flow performance. Tests shall be run both with and without air 22 flowing through the silencer at not less than three (3) 23 different flow rates. All ratings shall be based on test data 24 from a nationally know qualified independent laboratory. Test 25 methods shall eliminate effects due to end reflection, 26 vibration flanking tzansmission and standing waves in the 27 reverberant room. Air flow and pressure loss data taken in 28 accordance with the AMCA procedures shall be obtained from the 29 same silencer used for acoustical performance test. 30 31 Static pressure loss of silencers shall not exceed those listed 32 in the silencer schedule at the indicated air flow. 33 34 The silencers shall provide the minimum attenuation values in 35 terms of dynamic insertion loss as scheduled at the design air 36 velocities. 37 38 39 PART 3 - EXECUTION 40 41 INSTALLATION: 42 43 General: Provide inleC and outlet transition3 at duct sound 44 attenuators with 15-degree angles where space permits, but in 45 no case more than 30-degree angles on the inlet side and 45- 46 degree angles on the outlet side. 47 48 END OF SECTION 15240 49 Prairie Park Cinema Sound Isolation 5-25-00 15240.2 1 SECTION 15250 - SYSTEM INSULATION 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL S 6 RELATED DOCIIMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide piping, ductwork, and equipment system 15 insulation as specified and indicated. 16 17 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 18 19 Manufacturers: The following listed manufacturer's products 20 are acceptable subject to compliance with the requirements of 21 these Specifications: 22 23 Armstrong Cork Co. 24 Certain-Teed Corp. 25 Insulation Materials Corp. of America 26 Schuller 27 Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. 28 29 30 PART 2 - PRODIICTS 31 32 MATERIALS: 33 34 Quality: The type of insulation and its installation in 35 accordance with this Section of the Specifications for each 36 service and the application technique shall be as recommended 37 by the manufacturer. 38 39 Fire Rating: All insulation shall have a composite (insulation, 40 jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere facing or jacket 41 to insulation) fire and smoke hazard, as tested by ASTM E 84, 42 NFPA 255, and UL 723, which does not exceed: 43 44 Flame Spread - 25 45 Smoke Developed - 50 46 47 Accessories: Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, tapes, and 48 cements shall have the same component ratings as listed 49 hereinabove. 50 51 Labels: All products and their shipping cartons shall have a 52 label affixed indicating that flame spread and smoke developed 53 ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 54 55 Prairie Park Cinema System Insulation 5-25-00 15250.1 1 INSULATION THICKNESS: 2 3 Minimum: Insulation thickness shall not be less than the 4 following: 5 6 2hiClvlee8* 7 Piping Surface Inches 8 9 10 Condensate drains (above finished ceilings and 1/2 11 in occupied areas) 12 13 Domestic hot water lines 14 Main feed line 1 15 Runouts (not over 12'-0" long) 1/2 16 17 Domestic cold water lines** 1 18 19 Roof drains (underside), downspouts (horizontial 1/2 20 & vertical) and underside of drains receiving 21 cooling coil condensate 22 23 Ductwork Surface 24 25 Low velocity sheetmetal ductwork, external 1-1/2 26 (where not lined) 27 28 Low velocity sheetmetal ductwork, 1 29 acoustical lining (unless noted 30 otherwise) 31 32 *4Jhere exposed to outdoor ambient temperature, increase 33 insulation thickness by 1(2 inch for each ser•aice exposed. 34 35 ** Where exposed to outdoor ambient temperature subject to 36 freezing and chases on exterior walls. 37 38 39 Domestic Water Heater: Factory-insulated. 40 41 42 PIPING: 43 44 Condensate Drains: Insulate piping with Schuller Micro-Lok 45 AP-T Plus fiberglass insulation of thickness shown above with 46 kraft-scrim-foil vapor barrier jacket, or Armstrong "ACCOtherm" 47 of equivalent thickness. K factor shall be 0.23 Btu/inch degree 48 F-per hour. Provide jacket complete with lap with 49 factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive protected by strip 50 of release tape. Insulate valves, including bonnets, and 51 fittings, including unions and flanges, with premolded or shop 52 fabricated fiberglass insulatio» covered with premolded 53 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jackets by Zeston or approved equal. 54 55 Roof drains and Downspouts: Insulate piping with Schuller 56 Micro-LOk 650AP or AP-T fiberglass insulation of thickness Prairie Park Cinema System Insulation 5-25-00 15250.2 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 4b 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 shown above with kraft-scrim-foil vapor barrier jacket. Provide insulation with butt strip with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive protected by strip of release tape. Insulate fittings, including unions and flanges, with premolded or shop fabricated fiberglass insulation covered with premolded PVC jackets by Zeston or approved equal. Domestic Hot Water Linea: Insulate same as noted for roof drains and horizontal leaders. Insulate all hot water lines. DUCTWORK Exterior Insulation for Low Velocity Ductwork: Externally insulate all round ducts supplying conditioned air, and other systems shown on the Drawings, or specified herein to be externally insulated, with Schuller, R-Series, 1.0 pcf density "Microlite" flexible fiberglass duct wrap with kraft-scrim-foil vapor barrier jacket [k-0..31 at 75° F mean temperature. Acoustical Duct Linin for Low Velocit Ductwork: Provide all interior rectangular supply and return air ductwork with 1.0 inch thick acoustical duct lining, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein, 1.5 pcf density Schuller "Permacote Linacoustic Standard" fiberglass duct liner. Airstream surface coating shall contain a immobilized, EPA- registered, anti-microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth, as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22 [C-0.25 at 75 degree F(24 degree C)]. All orizontial exhaust ducts above toilet room ceilings shall be lined with 1-inch thick, 1-1/2 pcf duct liner. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION: General: Install insulation products in accordance with the manufactu rer's written instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure that the insulation serves its intended purpose. All surfaces to be insulated shall be th oroughly cleaned, and all tests completed prior to insulation. PIPING APPLICATION: Piping: Apply insulation to clean, dry pipes after all pressure tests have been completed. Firmly butt all joints of insulation. Where insulation is interrupted by fittings, unions, flanges, valves, or hangers, and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet on straight runs, form an insulating seal between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe by liberal applications of Insul-Coustic No. 215 vapor barrier adhesive to the exposed joint faces of the insulation carried down to and along 4 inches of the pipe and up to and along 2 inches of the insulation jacket. Seal laps with Insul-Coustic No. 215 vapor barrier adhesive, and cover butt joints with 3-inch wide strips Prairie Park Cinema System Insulation 5-25-00 15250.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 za 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 a7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 of vapor barrier jacket material sealed with Insul-Coustic No. 215 vapor barrier adhesive. Coordiante the installation of insulation on hot water piping with the installation of the hot water temperature maintenance cable. Flanges and Unions: Insulate flanges and unions with premolded or shop fabricated insulation of same thickness as specified for adjacent piping. Cover with premolded PVC covers by Zeston or approved equal held in place with 0.016-inch wide aluminum bands, or Zeston "Z-tape". Ensure covers for flanges and unions are removable without damage to insulation or jackets. Valves and Fittings: Insulate and cover valves, tees, elbows, and other fittings the same as flanges and unions except secure covers in place by Zeston "Z-tape" or approved equal. DUCTWORK APPLICATION: Exterior Insulation On Low Velocity Ductwork: After preliminary air tests, cover ductwork where required. On ducts over 18-inches wide, apply weldclips or stickclips, to bottom of duct, spaced 18-inches on center each way, maximum. Seal all longitudinal and transverse seams and all punctures caused by weldclips or stickclips with 2-inch wide SMACNA-labeled duct tape and mastic. Acoustical Duct Liaing For Low Velocity Ductwork: Before sheet metal is broken, apply duct liner to sheet metal in a continuous layer of insulation cement, and, in addition, on ducts over 18-inches wide, apply weldclips or stickclips, spaced 18 inches each way, maximum. Allow 1/8-inch excess duct liner at each end of each section of ductwork. Just before sections of ductwork are hung, coat end laps of duct liner with insulation cement and hang immediately. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles, cement adhesives, pounds as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated. Surfaces: Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Butt Joints: Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure Complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. Vapor-Barrier: Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect barrier to prevent puncture and other damage. Penetrations: Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. Prairie Park Cinema System Insulation 5-25-00 15250.4 1 Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of ' 2 insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before 3 covering with jacketing. 4 ' S END OF SECTION 15250 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' Prairie Park Cinema System insulation 5-25-00 15250.5 1 38CTION 15300 - FIRS PROTECTION SYSTEMS 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCIIMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide a complete fire protection wet 15 standpipe system, and sprinkler system, including all pipe, 16 tube fittings, and appurtenances as indicated, and in 17 compliance with these Specifications. 18 19 Applications: Application of the fire protection system shall 20 include, but are not limited to, the systems as listed below. 21 22 Supply mains, risers, valves, and drains. 23 Flow switches. 24 wet pipe hydraulically designed sprinkler system. 25 26 Quality Assurance: 27 28 Refer to Section 15060. 29 30 Comply with all State, County and City requirements. Submit 31 drawings and calculations to all agency's that require 32 approval. 33 34 All materials shall be installed in accordance with NFPA No. 13 35 and NFPA No. 14. All valves, fittings, hose, sprinkler heads, 36 and equipment shall be UL and/or FM labeled. All necessary 37 points of city connections shall be matched to city equipment. 38 39 All hose threads shall conform to local Eire Department 40 requirements. 41 42 Pipe Hangers and Supports: Support all fire protection pipe 43 with UL listed and approved hangers and support devices. 44 Provide any special hangers or supports that may be required. 45 The design, selection, spacing, and application of horizontal 46 pipe hangers, supports, restraints, anchors, and guides shall 47 be in accordance with the NFPA No. 13 and NFPA No. 14. 48 Vertical pipes shall be supported at least every other floor 49 with approved riser clamps. 50 51 Sprinkler System: 52 53 The entire building shall be completely sprinkled by a wet 54 system. The system shall be designed for expansion and 55 extension into future auditoriums. See architectural plans for 56 size and location of future area. Prairie Park Cinema Fire Protection Systems 5-25-00 15300.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 93 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 59 SS 56 System piping shall be hydraulically designed throughout all areas in accordance with the rules and regulations of NFPA No. 13, using the design densities light hazard occupancy. Sprinkler piping shall be installed and coordinated with the ductwork and other mechanical and electrical services in the ceiling cavities by the Contractor, to provide the clearances for lighting fixtures as indicated on the Drawings. If any departures from the Drawings are necessary to comply with any NFPA requirements, or the authority having jurisdiction, such revisions and/or departures shall be detailed and submitted for approval. All such revisions shall be made and the sprinkler systems installed in accordance therewith, without increased expense to the Owner. Departures shall not be made without prior written approval by the Engineer. The Drawings are preliminary, and do not indicate inferred details. This installation shall also meet the approval of the local Fire Marshal's Office. System shall include required drain lines, test connections, spare heads, tools, fire department inlet connections, water motor alarm, circuit closers, monitor switches, alarm valves, isolation valves, and similar items. Sprinkler heads, valves, alarms, and similar items shall be as manufactured by Viking, Grinnell, Reliable or other approved manufacturer. All material and equipment used in the installation of the sprinkler systems and standpipes shall be listed and approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Znc., and shall be the latest design of the manufacturer. Riser control valves and sprinkler floor control valves shall be provided with valve tamper switches. Location shall be coordinated with Division 16. Valves: Valves shall be UL listed and approved for the pressures at which they are installed. Check valves shall be swing-type with iron body, bronze trim, cast-iron disc, bolted cover, and screwed or flanged ends. Swing check valves may be installed in hori2ontal pipe only. Gate valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze body, OS AND Y, and screwed ends. 150 psig valves shall have bronze trim, single disc, screwed bonnet, and bronze seats. 300 and 400 psig valves shall have bronze wedge disc, union bonnet, and bronze body seat rings. Gate valves over 2 inches shall be iron body, OS ADIII Y, bolted bonnet, bronze seats, ANSZ 16.1, flanged ends. 150 psig valves shall have double or single disc, and bronze trim. 300 and 400 psig valves shall have wedge disc and brass stem. Supervised valves shall include valve tamper switches. Valve tamper switches shall be double-pcle, single throw type with cast-aluminum housing and tamper-proof cover. Switch rating Prairie Park Cinema Fire Protection Systems 5-25-00 15300.2 1 shall be at least 7 amperes at 125/250 volts. 2 3 In lieu of OS AND Y supervised valves, sizes 1 inch through 4 2-1/2 inches, called out in paragraph 4, slow-close butterfly 5 valves with "built-in" supervisory switch, "UL" and "FM" 6 approved as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve Company (or 7 approved equal) may be substituted. 8 9 10 PART 2 - PRODIICTS 11 12 PIPING: 13 14 Service Connection to Inside Suildin Wall: Refer to Section 15 15060. 16 17 Pipe: Standpipe and sprinkler piping shall be ASTM A-135, 18 Schedule 40 black steel. Thinwall pipe ASTM A-795 may be used 19 where permitted by local codes. 20 21 Fittings: Fittings shall be cast-iron threaded sprinkler 22 fittings ANSI B16.4 or grooved ends fittings joined by 23 Victaulic Style 77 couplings with Grade "E" gaskets or welded 29 fittings, ANSI B16.9. Flanges shall be screwed or welded 25 neck-type ANSI B16.25. Victaulic flanges and reducer couplings 26 shall not be permitted. 27 28 SQUIPMSNT: 29 30 Alarm Valve: Grinnell Model F2001 alarm valve with Model F211 31 retard chamber. 32 33 Sight Flow Connection: Sight flow connection in all test 34 lines. 35 36 Pressure Alarm Switch: Reliable Model J88X 5355 37 38 Water Motor Alarm: Grinnell Model F630 39 40 Fire Department Connection: Potter-Roemer Model 5116, polished 41 chrome plated finish. 42 43 Flow Switch: Reliable Model A with optional Tamperswitch kit. 44 45 Sprinkler Heads: Upright or pendant heads as required with 46 ordinary temperature rating, except in specially designated 47 areas of high temperature where heads shall be rated per 48 NFPA-13. Heads in the lobby area with ceilings, concession 49 area, concession support room toilet rooms and public corridors 50 leading to the auditoriums shall be Reliable Model G1. Heads in 51 open frame area of the lobby and mezzanine areas without 52 ceilings shall be Reliable Model G pendent type. Any other area 53 without ceilings shall also have Reliable Model G pendent type 54 heads installed. The cover plate finish for G1 type heads shall 55 be white for white lay-in ceilings and black for black lay-in Prairie Park Cinema Fire Protection Systems 5-25-00 15300.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 ceilings. Exposed heads in the auditoriums shall be Reliable Model G1 with black coverplates. Heads in the mezzanine areas with ceilings, storage rooms and other non-public areas shall be Reliable Model G Recessed, chrome finish. Sidewall heads at the concession area shall be Reliable Model G/F1 Recessed. Furnish 12 spare heads. The spare heads shall be representative of, and in proportion to the number of each type and temperature rating of heads installed. Furnish spare head cabinet and wrench for each riser. Furnish 4 spare cover plates for each color of plates installed in the project. PART 3 - S%ECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEM: General: Comply with the requirements of the NFPA No. 13 and 14 for installation and testing of piping system. No piping mains or branch piping shall be installed that penetrates any common wall between auditoriums. All piping mains, except for incoming service, shall be installed above the mezzanine ceiling. Only one branch line per auditorium shall penetrate the wall between the mezzanine and auditorium. All auditorium heads shall be fed from this branch line. Exposed piping shall be installed parallel to, or at right angles to the column lines of the building wherever possible. Cold springing piping will not be permitted unless specifically called for. Install piping with adequate s~zpport to prevent strain on the equipment. All piping shall be concealed, except in mechanical equipment rooms, stairwells, or where otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Grade all piping to eliminate traps and pockets. where air pockets or water traps cannot be avoided, provide hose bibbs for drainage. i Install unions or flanges at equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated on the Drawings. Welded joints on pipe runs shall be made with continuous welds, without backing rings, and with pipe ends beveled before fabrication. Piping shall be carefully aligned prior to welding, and no metal shall project within the pipe. Heads in public areas shall be installed in locations as shcwn on the architectural reflected ceiling plans. Piping shall be sized as required by applicable codes, and as indicated on the Drawings. Field grooving of pipe for Victaulic fittings shall use Prairie Park Cinema Fire Protection Systems 5-25-00 15300.4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3L 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 40' 47 Victaulic groove depth control tool, and a hole cutting tool shall be used in lieu of burning a hole in the piping. Victaulic flanges, reducing couplings, and outlet couplings shall not be installed. Victaulic gaskets shall be UL approved for the serrice, and working pressure of the systems. Protection During Construction: Provide necessary fire protection during construction in accordance with NFPA and Local Codes, Inspection and Teats: All inspections, examinations, and tests required by the authorities and/or agencies specified hereinbefore shall be arranged and paid for by the Automatic Sprinkler Subcontractor, as necessary, to obtain complete and final acceptance of the system as installed. The certificates of inspection shall be in quadruplicate, and shall be delivered to the Architect for distribution. Periodic Ina action Service: After completion of the automatic sprinkler system, and at the beginning of the guarantee period, the Automatic Sprinkler Subcontractor shall execute the National Automatic Sprinkler and Fire Control Association, Inc., Standard Form of "Inspection Agreement", without charge to the Owner, calling for four (4) inspections of the sprinkler system during the warranty period. boring the warranty period, inspections shall be as per the Inspection Agreement, plus the following maintenance to be performed during the course cf the fourth inspection: Operation of all control valves. Lubrication of operating stems of all interior valves. Operation of water gong, electric alarms, supervisory panels, alarm trip switches, flow switches, and similar items. Cleaning of alarm valves. Lubrication of Fire Department hose connection inlet. Inspection Report: The standard form of the National Automatic Sprinkler and Fire Control Association, Inc., "Report of Inspection", shall be filled out in triplicate after each inspection, and the copies sent to the Architect. END OF SECTION 15300 Prairie Pazk Cinema Fire Protection Systems 5-25-00 15300.5 ~ /~ ~ ~ r a~ rt ~t fit it (r1 1~ ~.~ !- ~ ~ ~ ~ a~^r 1 38CTION 15430 - FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINRS & ROOF DRAINS 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. it 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide floor drains and floor sinks as 15 specified and indicated. 16 17 work of Other Sections: 18 19 Division 7 Sections for flashings at floor drains and floor 20 sinks. 21 22 Section 15060, "Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems". 23 24 QIIALITY ASSURANCE: 25 26 Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the 27 following: 28 29 Jonespec 30 Josam Mfg. Co. 31 J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. 32 Tyler Pipe Co. (Wade) 33 Zurn Industries 34 35 36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 FLOOR DRAINS: 39 40 Floor Drain, FD-A: Josam Series 30000-5-50, cast-iron body, 41 polished nickel bronze 6-inch x 6-inch Type "65" strainer, and 42 deep-seal "P" trap. 43 49 Floor Drain, FD-B: Josam Series 30000-5-50, cast-iron body, 45 bronze 6-inch x 6-inch Type "6S" strainer, and deep seal "P" 46 trap. 47 48 FLOOR SZNKS: 49 50 Floor Sink, FS-A: Josam series 49003-3-55, 3" outlet, 51 8-1/2" x 8-1/2" top. Provide 34 grate top. 52 53 Floor Sink, FS-B: Josam series 49323-3-55, 3" outlet, it-1/2" 54 square top. Provide 1/2 grate top. 55 Prairie Park Cinema Floor Drains, Floor Sinks & Roof Drains 5-25-00 15430.1 1 ROOF DRAIN3: 2 3 Roof Drain, RD: Josam series 21500, cast iron body with 4 flashing collar, gravel stop, aluminum dome, extension, sump 5 receiver and underdeck clamp as required. 6 7 Overflow Roof Drain, ORD: Same as roof drain. 8 9 PART 3 - EBECUTION 10 11 INSTALLATION: 12 13 Coordination: Coordinate flashing work with work of other 14 trades. 15 16 Setting Locations: Install floor drains and sinks in the low 17 points of the surface areas to be drained. Set tops of drains 18 flush with finished floor. 19 20 Watertightness: Install drain flashing collar or flange so 21 that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. 22 Maintain watertight integrity of penetrated waterproof 23 membranes. 24 25 Accessibility: Position drains so that installed drains are 26 accessible and easy to maintain. 27 28 END OF SECTION 15430 29 Prairie Park Cinema Floor Drains, Floor Sinks & Roof Drains 5-25-00 15430.2 1 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FISTURES AND TRIM 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 8 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 9 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 10 11 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 12 13 Work Included: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified and 14 indicated. 15 16 Work of Other Sections: Section 15060, "Mechanical and 17 Plumbing Piping Syskems". 18 19 QUALITY ASSURANCB: 20 21 Manufacturers: Provide products produced by one of the 22 following: 23 24 American Standard 25 Crane 26 Eljer 27 Kohler 28 29 PART 2 - PRODIICTS 30 31 WATER CLOSETS: 32 33 Water Closet, WC-A: 34 35 Fixture: Kohler K~9330 "Kingston Lite" vitreous china, 1.5 36 gallon flush, 1-1/2-inch top inlet, siphon jet, elongated bowl, 37 wall hung. 38 39 Seat: Lusts No. K-4670-C white, open front. 40 41 Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 111. Provide trap primer connection on 42 flush valves as required. See riser diagram for valves that 43 require primer connections. 44 45 Carrier: Smith series 200, as required, with M12 flush valve 46 support for copper pipe. 47 48 Water Closet, WC-S: 49 SO Fixture: Same as WC-A. 51 Seat: Same aS WC-A. 52 Flush Valve: Same as WC-A. 53 Carrier: Smith series 115 with M12 flush valve supply 54 support for copper pipe. 55 Prairie Park Cinema Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 5-25-00 15440.1 1 LAVATORIES: 2 3 Lavatory, L-A: 4 5 Fixture: Kohler "Caxton", 17-inch x 14-inch, No. K-2212, white 6 vitreous china with glazed rim fox installation with metal 7 frame for plastic laminate countertop. Provide K-6681 metal 8 frame. 9 10 Faucet: Symmons 5-60-G metering faucet with a .5 gpm vandal it proof aerator and grid drain assembly. 12 13 3uppliea & Trap: Kohler K-7605 & K-8998. 14 15 Lavatory, L-S: 16 17 Fixture: Same as L-A. 18 Faucet: Symmons 5-60-G-H 19 Supplies & Trap: Same as L-A with Truebro model no. 101 G 20 vinly insulation kit for "P" trap and water supply. 21 22 Lavatory, L-C: 23 24 Fixture: Kohler "Greenwich", 20-inch x 18-inch, No. K-2032, 25 white vitreous china wall hung fixture. Provide Josam model 26 17380 floor mounted carrier. 27 28 Faucet: Same as L-B 29 Supplies & Trap: Same as L-B 30 31 URINALS: 32 33 IIrinal, U-A: 34 35 Fixture: Kohler K-4972-T, wall hung, 1-1/4" top inlet, vitreous 36 china, blowout. 37 38 Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 180-1. 39 40 Cazrier: Smith series 635. 41 42 Urinal, II-B: 43 44 Fixture: Kohler K-5016-T, wall hung, 3/4" top inlet, vitreous 45 china, siphon jet. 46 47 Flush Valve: Sloan 186-1 Royal. 48 49 Carz'ier: Smith series 635. 50 51 52 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER: 53 54 EWC: Halsey-Taylor model HT-ESR, stainless steel cabinet. 55 Provide Kohler K-8998 P-traps and K-7605 supplies. Unit shall Prairie Park Cinema Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 5-25-00 15440.2 1 cool 8.8 gph to 50°F with 80°F ambient air temperature and 80°F 2 entering water temperature at 1/5 H.P., 120 volt, single phase. 3 Equal units manufactured by 61kay or Haws will be acceptable. 4 5 MOP SINK: 6 7 MS-l: Stern-Williams model SBC-1750BP terrazzo mop sink with 8 stainless steel cap and back panels. Verify if tiling flanges 9 will be required. 10 11 Faucet: Stern-Williams T-10-VB sink fitting with integral 12 stops. Spout with bucket hook, 3/4" hose thread end. Vacuum 13 breaker; adjustable top brace. Inlets 8" on centers. Polished 14 chrome finish. Also furnish T-4o mop hanger and T-35 hose and 15 hose rack. 16 17 HOSE BIBBS/BOX HYDRANTS/WALL HYDRANTS: 18 19 Yard Hydrant, YH: Woodford No. W34 automatic draining freezless 20 yard hydrant. Provide model 34HD vacuum breaker-backflow 21 preventer. 22 23 Wall Hydrant, WH-A: Zurn Z-1305, non-freeze, 3/4-inch 24 connection with vacuum breaker. 25 26 27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 28 29 INSTALLATION: 30 31 Heights: Set fixtures at heights as directed and approved by 32 the Architect. 33 34 Caulking: Where fixtures mount against wall or floor surfaces, 35 caulk between the fixture and surface with white silicone 36 sealer. 37 38 ENII OF SECTION 25440 39 40 Prairie Park Cinema Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 5-25-00 15440.3 ~.r ~^- ~.. a^^~ +^~ ~ .~ ~.. .^~ '7r art ~ ~ r ~c ~ ~ r^n pis 1 1 SECTION 15450 - WATER HEATERS 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work of Other 3ectiona: The following Section applies tc the 15 work of this Section. 16 17 Section 15060, "Mechanical and Plumbing Piping Systems". 18 19 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 20 21 Manufacturers: Provide products of the following: 22 23 National 24 Rheem Water Heating Div. 25 A.O. Smith, Inc. 26 Ruud 27 28 Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have 29 been tested, listed, and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories 30 (UL) and which comply with National Electrical Manufacturers' 31 Association (NEMA) standards. 32 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 EL$CTRIC WATER HEATERS: 36 37 Electric water heaters shall be of the duty, size, and capacity 38 shown on the Drawings. Provide a combination pressure and 39 temperature relief valve compJ.ying with ANSI 21.22 with full 40 size discharge pipe. 41 42 PART 3 - EXECUTION 43 44 INSTALLATION OF WATER HBATSR3: 45 46 Installation of electric water heaters shall be in accordance 47 with manufacturer's written instructions. 4& 49 DISCHARGE PIPING: 50 51 A discharge pipirg from water heater relief valve shall be run 52 to the nearest floor drain or other approved point of safe 53 discharge. 54 55 COORDINATION: Prairie Park Cinema Water Heaters 5-25-00 15450.1 1 2 Coordinate with electrical. work as necessary. 3 4 END OF SECTION 15450 5 r Prairie Park Cinema Water Heaters y-25-00 15450.2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 SECTION 15451 - HOT WATER TEMPERATURE MAINTENANCE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCIIMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work Included: Furnish and install a UL-listed system of electric self-regulating heating cable and components for maintaining the water temperature in the domestic hot water lines. The cable shall utilize a radiation-crosslinked conductive polymer as the heating element, and the cable shall be specifically designed, manufactured, and UL listed for domestic hot water temperature maintenance. The cable shall be installed on all vertical and horizontal hot water piping from the outlet of the water heater to within 50 feet (total developed length) of the inlet of the furthest fixture served, typical for each branch. SUBMITTALS Copy of UL file indicating the heating cable is specifically listed to provide supplementary heating to hot water service supply systems utilizing thermally insulated metal or plastic pipe. Manufacturers catalog cuts showing materials and performance data, and a project list of at least 20 projects, installed for at least 5 years, with at lest 2000 feet of heating cable in each project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: General: The self-regulating heating cable shall consist of two (2) 16-AWG nickel-coated copper bus wires embedded in a radiation-crosslinked conductive polymer core. It shall be covered by a radiation-crosslinked, polyolefin, dielectric jacket surrounded by a polymer-coated aluminum wrap, and enclosed in a tinned copper braid of 14 AWG equivalent wire size. The braid shall be covered with a 40-mil polyolefin outer jacket, color-coded for easy identification. Mechanical: The cable shall have a minimum cut-through resistance of 600 lb. per CSA 22.2 0.3 Cutting Test 4.14. The cable shall have a minimum impact resistance of 25 ft-lb per UL 1588.11. The cable shall withstand a glancing impact of 22 ft- lb per UL 1581.590. The cable shall have a minimum abrasion Prairie Park Cinema Hot Water Temperature Maintenance System 5-25-00 15451.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 resistance of 7000 cycles per UL 719.19. The cable shall withstand a crush resistance of 4500 N per IEEE 515 Deformation Test 5.15• PERFORMANCE: Operating Temperature: The system shall maintain a nominal temperature of 115°F at 208 volts. Maintenance Temperature: Each hot water system temperature shall be maintained using only one product. Temperature shall be maintained with straight runs of heating cable on the pipe. Power Control (self-regulating index): The slope of the power/temperature curve shall be such that the power of the heating cable shall increase with decreasing temperature at a rate of at least 0.028 watts/foot/°F from 50°F to 212°F. Long-Term thermal Stability (as determined by accelerated testing): The power retention of the heating cable shall be at least 90~ after 300 cycles between 50°F and 212°F. High Temperature Withstand: The heater shall not decrease in resistance, overheat, or burn when powered at 208 volts and exposed to 400°F in an oven for 30 minutes. MANIIFACTIIRER: Experience: The manufacturer shall have more than ten years experience with self-regulating heating cables for temperature maintenance of domestic hot water. Acceptable Manufacturer: Raychem Corporation and Nelson PART 3 - EXECi]TION The system shall be installed according to the drawings and the manufacturers instructions. The installer shall be responsible for providing a functional system installed in accordance with applicable national and local code requirements. Each circuit shall be protected with a 30-mA ground-fault protection device. Procedure: Measure the heater circuit continuity and the insulation resistance between the braid and bus wires with a 2500 VDC megohmeter (megger). Timing: The tests should be performed after the pipe insulation has been installed and prior to installation of wall or ceiling panels, and 5ha11 be witnessed by the general contractor and Prairie Park Cinema Hot Water Temperature Maintenance System 5-25-00 15451.2 i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 the manufacturer or the manufacturers representative. Acce table Reaulta: The heater circuit shall be continuous and megger readings shall be at least 20 megohms regardless of heater length. Circuits yielding unacceptable readings must be repaired or replaced. Submittal of results: Submit records of the test data to the general contractor. END OFF SECTION 15451 Prairie Park Cinema Hot water Temperature Maintenance System 5-25-00 15451.3 ~s ~ r~- ~^c +~ ~ ~ ~r s ~ s ~ ~ r wr a^r ~ ~ ~ 1 SECTION 15859 - PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 4 5 RELATED DOCUMENT3: 6 7 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General B and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specifications 9 section, and Section 1501G, Shall apply to work of this l0 section. 11 12 Work Included: Provide facr_ory-assembled packaged air 13 conditioning units, and all necessary components, built 14 specifically for outdoor installation. 15 16 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 17 18 Units shall be dedicated downflow or horizontal airflow. 19 Operating range shall be between 115°F and 0°F cooling as 20 standard from the factory for all units. Cooling performance 21 shall be rated in accordance with DOE and/or ARI testing 22 procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally 23 wired, fully charged with R-22 and 100 run tested before 24 leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be 25 colored and numbered for simplified identification. Units shall 26 be UL listed and labeled, classified in accordance to ANSI 27 221.47 for gas fired central furnaces and UL 1995. 28 29 Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA 90A requirements for 30 flame spread and smoke generation. 31 32 Additional standards and references shall be: 33 39 NFPA 90 A & B - Installation of Air Conditioning and 35 Ventilation Systems and Installation of vJarm Air Heating 36 and Air Conditioning Systems. 37 38 ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 39 40 ARI 210, 240, 340 and 360 - Commercial and Industrial 41 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment testing and rating 42 standard as applicable. !above and below 135,000 Btuh) 43 94 ANSI/ASHRAE 37 - Testing Unitary Air Conditioning and heat 45 Pump Equipment. 46 47 ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conversation in New Building 48 Design Standard. 49 California Energy Commission Administration Code - Title 50 20/24 - Establishes the minimum efficiency requirements 51 for HVAC equipment installed in new buildings in the State 52 of California. 53 59 ARI 270 and 370 - Sound rating of Outdoor Unitary 55 Equipment. (above and below 135,000) Prairie Park Cinema Packaged Air Conditioning Units 5-25-00 15859.1 1 ANSI/NFPA 70-1995 - National Electric Code. 2 3 Conform to Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA- 4 2.3/CAN/CSA C22.2 #236) for construction of packaged air 5 conditioners. 6 7 Manufacturer: Provide products produced by ene of the 8 following: 4 10 Carrier it Lennox 12 Trane 13 York 14 15 SUBMITTALS: 16 17 Manufacturer's Data: Include certified drawings showing overall 18 dimensions of complete assembly, weights, support requirements, 19 sizes and location of connections, accessories, and parts 20 lists. Include the following information: 21 22 Performance certification (based on ARI Standards), fan curves, 23 and test reports. 24 25 Product warranties and guarantees. 26 Wiring diagrams. 27 28 Written instructions for installation including assembly where 29 not factory-assembled. 30 31 Manufacture's recommendation on stocking of spare parts. 32 33 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 34 35 Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for 36 rigging, unloading and transporting units. 37 3 8 WARRA23TY 39 40 Provide parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 41 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. 42 43 Provide five year extended warranty for compressors. 44 45 Provide ten year heat exchanger limited warranty as 46 applicable. 47 48 49 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 50 51 GENERAL: 52 53 Packaged Air Conditioning IInita: 54 Prairie Park Cinema Packaged Air Conditioning Units 5-25-00 15859.2 i ~' ~' 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Description: Units shall be factory assembled, single piece, heating and cooling constant volume units. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-22), and special features required prior to field start-up. Casing Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized and finished with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish. Units surface shall be tested 500 hours in a salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet constructicn shall allow for all mairterance on one side of the unit. Service panels shall have lifting handles and be removed and reinstalled by removing only a single fastener or not more than three screws while providing a water and air tight seal. The base of the unit shall have provisions for forklift and crane lifting. Unit Top: The top cover shall be one piece or where seams exist, it shall be double hemmed and gasket sealed to prevent water leakage. Filters: Two inch filters shall be factory supplied on all units. Compressors All 3 - 17-1/2 ton units shall have direct drive hermetic, reciprocating type compressor(s) with centrifugal oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. Crankcase heater, internal temperature and current-sensing motor overloads shall be included for maximum protection. Compressors shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration transmission and noise. External high pressure cutout shall be provided on 15 and 17-1/2 ton models. All 20 and 25 ton units shall have direct drive, hermetic, scroll type compressors with gear type oil pump providing positive lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall be suction gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or minus 10 percent of unit nameplate voltage. Internal temperature and current sensitive motor overloads shall be included for maximum protection. Shall have internal spring isolation and sound muffling to minimize vibration transmission and noise. External discharge temperature limit, winding temperature limit and compressor overload shall be provided. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to o deg F as standard. Prairie Park Cinema Packaged Air Conditioning Units 5-25-00 15859.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 90 41 42 43 44 45 96 97 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Refrigerant Circuits Each refrigerant circuit shall have independent fixed orifice expansion devices, service pressure ports and refrigerant line filter driers factory installed as standard. Ar. area shall be provided for replacement suction line driers. Evaporator and Condenser Coils Internally finned 3/B" copper tubes mechanically bonded to Configured aluminum plate fin shall be standard. Coils shall be leak tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The evaporator coil and condenser coil shall be leaked tested to 200 psig and pressure tested to 450 psig. Provide Black Epoxy Coil Protection where appropriate for coastal locations. Gas Heating Section The heating section shall have a drum and tube heat exchanger design using corrosion resistant steel components. A forced combustion blower shall supply premixed fuel to a single burner ignited by a pilotless hot surface ignition system. In order to provide reliable operation, a negative gas valve shall be used that requires blower operation to initiate gas flow. On an initial call for heat, the combustion blower shall purge the heat exchanger 45 seconds before ignition attempts, the entire heating system shall be locked out until manually reset at the thermostat. Units shall be suitable for use with natural gas. Units shall have two stage heating. Outdoor Fana: The outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position. The fan motor(s) shall be permanently lubricated and have build-in thermal overload protection. Indoor Fan: The units shall have belt driven, forward curve fans with adjustable motor sheaves and adjustable idler-arm assembly for adjustment to fan belts and motor Sheaves. The motors shall be thermally protected. Units shall be capable of providing 1" ESP at nominal unit cfm(400 cfm/ton). Controls Unit shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Micro-processor controls shall be provided for all 24 volt control func~io:~s. Provide Differential Enthalpy controls consisting of two Prairie Park Cinema Packaged Air Conditioning Units 5-25-00 15859.4 i r r I j i r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 19 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 enthalpy sensors that compare total heat content of the indoor air and outdoor to determine-the most efficient air source. Accessories: Sound Attenuating Roof Curb: The roof curb shall be designed to mate with the unit and provide support and a watertight installation when installed properly. The curb shall be single piece, welded, sloped roof curbs provided as part of the Trans National Account bill of material. The curb will contain Gypsum Board and Duct Liner sound attenuation factory installed. The curb shall be manufactured by ThyCurb. Curb design shall comply with NRCA requirements. Thermostat and Remote Sensor: Each rooftop unit shall be provided with a programmable electronic manual/automatic changeover thermostat with status indicator LED lights and night set-back capability equal to Trane model BAY SENS 019A and a remote temperature sensor equal to Trane model BAY SENS 017B. The mezzanine rooftop unit does not require a remote sensor. The thermostats and remote temperature sensors shall be furnished by the rooftop HVAC manufacturer so they inter-face with the unite standard controls. Thermostats shall be installed in the mezzanines and the remote temperature sensors installed in the auditoriums or lobby as shown on the plans. The DIP switches on the thermostats shall be set so the outside air damper will close when the unit is in the unoccupied mode. Economizer: This shall be field installed and shall include fully modulating 0-100 motor and dampers, minimum position setting, preset linkage and wiring harness. Coil Guards: Coil guards shall be field installed for condenser coil protection. Through the Hase Blectrical with Disconnect Switch: Each rooftop unit shall have a factory installed 3-pole molded case switch with provisions for through the base electrical connection. The disconnect switch shall be installed in the unit in a water tight enclosure with access through a swinging door. Factory wiring shall be provided from the switch to the unit high voltage terminal block. The switch shall be UL/CSA agency recognized. The disconnect switch shall be sized per NEC and UL guidelines. Differential Pressure Switch: Each rooftop unit shall have a dedicated differential pressure switch factory installed to achieve active fan failure indication and/or clogged filter indication. These indications shall be registered at the rooftop unit thermostat that has status indication lights. Convenience Outlet: Provide 120 volt/15 amp GFI powered receptacle. Receptacle shall be powered via unit mounted transformer and disconnect switch. Prairie Park Cinema Packaged Air Conditioning Units 5-25-00 15859.5 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION: 2 3 Vibration Isolators: Units shall be separated from ductwork 4 with flexible duct connections. 5 6 END OF SECTION 15859 7 Prairie Park Cinema Packaged Air Conditioning Units 5-25-00 15859.6 1 SECTION 15860 - FANS 2 3 4 PART 1 - C3ENERAL 5 6 RBLATBD DOCUMBNT3: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DBSCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work included: Provide fans as shown, scheduled, indicated, and 15 as specified. 16 17 QUALITY ASSLTRANCB: 18 19 Manufacturer: Provide products of the following: 20 21 Acme Fan Company 22 Loren Cook 23 Greenheck 24 Penn Ventilator Company 25 26 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 27 28 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS: 29 30 Ratings: Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA certified 31 ratings seal. Ratings of fans shall be not less than the 32 values shown on the Drawings, based on 69.8 degree F and 33 29.92-inches of Hg atmospheric pressure. 34 35 Construction: Fan construction shall be in accordance with AMCA 36 classes of construction for the intended duty. Fan wheels, 37 shafts, and drives shall be statically and dynamically balanced 38 at the factory as a unit. Balance reports shall be 39 factory-certified to the Engineer. 40 41 Drives: Provide drives with a minimum belt horsepower capacity 42 of 120 percent of the motor nameplate horsepower. All exhaust 43 fans requiting 1-1/2 HP or larger motor shall include the fan 44 drive selection calculations with the submittal. The selection 45 calculations shall include the correction factor for arc of 46 contact. The submittal data shall identify the source of the 47 selection data. 48 49 Motor Sheaves: Motor sheaves shall be Browning Type LVP, MVP, 50 or approved equal, adjustable-type with double locking feature. 51 Motor sheaves shall be selected for the rated fan RPM, and 52 shall be adjustable to as close as 10 percent above and below 53 the rated fan speed. 54 55 Fan 3heavQa: Provide non-adjustable sheaves with removable Prairie Park Cinema Fans 5-25-00 15860.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 SO 51 52 53 54 55 56 machined bushings. Sheaves shall be machined on all surfaces. Sheaves with over three grooves shall be dynamically balanced, and the manufacturer shall so designate on each sheave. Fan sheaves with 3 grooves or less shall be statically balanced, and weights required for balancing shall be welded to the sheaves. Manufacturers shall be Browning, Eaton, Yale, and Towne, Dodge Manufacturing Company, or Fort Worth Steel and Machinery Company. Belts: Provide standard "V-groove" belts suitable for the service intended with the required capacities. The belts shall be closely matched and taoged prior to delivery to the job site. If the belts do not appear to be properly matched during operation, they shall be rechecked and, if necessary, replaced. Belts shall be manufactured by Gates, Durkee-Atwood, Goodyear, Browning, or Uniroyal. Bearings: Provide SKF, Sealmaster, Timken, or Fafnir, externally or internally mounted, grease-lubricated, self-aligning ball bearings. Bearings shall have grease-type zerk fittings. Motor Mount: Motors shall be mounted on an adjustable base rigidly supported on the fan, and shall have extended shaft to accommodate the adjustable pitch sheave. Gen®ral: Provide centrifugal exhausters of the vertical or horizontial discharge design. Housing shall incorporate exterior windbands to enable velocity to discharge exhaust above the roof surface. A drainage area shall be provided at the bottom. Integral intake fan to force cool motor compartment through breather tubes. Motors: Provide standard drip proof motors. Fans: Fans shall be of the air-foil, non-overloading centrifugal type and shall be aluminum. Provide V-belt drive for fan. Housing: Shall be of mill finish spun aluminum construction. Provide integral disconnect, UL rated, switch for fan motor. Provide diamond mesh aluminum expanded metal bird and debris guard. Provide backdraft damper. PART 3 - EXECDTION VENTILATING AND EXHAIIST FANS General: Ventilating vibration isolation s vibration isolators as ductwork is connected Prairie Park Cinema 5-25-00 and exhaust fans not having integral hall be mounted on or suspended by specified under Section 15245. Where to fans, Contractor shall provide UL Fans 15860.2 i i t 1 i 1 r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 labeled flexible duct connections. Curbs: Factory-fabricated roof curbs shall be supplied by Mechanical Contractor to the General Contractor for installation by the General Contractor. END OF SECTION 15860 Prairie Park Cinema 5-25-00 Fans 15860.3 .s rr ~.. aw r +~ t^r ~. . r r . ~r ~r ,~• r ~r err 1 SECTION 15885 - $ILTERS AND ACCESSORIES 2 3 4 PART 1 - GSNSRAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMEN'PS 7 8 D~-awitzgs and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, Shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 work Included: Provide filters and accessories as specified 15 and indicated. 16 17 18 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 19 20 AIR FILTERS: 21 22 Throw-Away Type Filters: Provide 2-inch thick throw-away 23 filters complete. Filters shall be UL labeled with Class II 24 rating, and shall be American Air Filter "Am Air" or Farr 25 30/30. 26 27 28 PART 3 - EXECUTION 29 30 AIR FILTERS: 31 32 Under no circumstances shall any rooftop unit which is shown. or 33 specified to be furnished with filters be operated. without 39 filters in-place. Filters on units used during construction 35, shall be replaced as necessary and as directed by General 36 Contractor. 37 38 In the event that units are operated without filters in-place 39 or with filters which have been damaged so as to allow air to 40 bypass filter, the Contractor shall steam clean all coils and 41 fans in that particular system before balancing the system. 42 43 In all cases, filters shall be of the proper size and installed 44 in filter racks in such a manner that there will be no leakage 45 of air around filters. Filters which have been torn, 46 distorted, or damaged in any other way will not be acceptable. 47 48 All testing and balancing of air-side systems shall be done 49 using clean filters. 50 51 Upon completion of the project and before final acceptance, all 52 disposable media filters shall be replaced with new media. 53 This requirement is in addition to the requirements that a 54 stock of replaceable filter media, sufficient to replace all 55 media in the project one time, be left for the Owner's 56 maintenance use. Prairie Park Cinema Filters and Accessories 5-25-00 15885.1 1 2 3 END OF SECTION 15885 4 r Prairie Park Cinema Filters and Accessories 5-25-00 15885.2 1 SECTION 15890 - DUCTWORK 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide ductwork as hereby defined to include 15 sheet metal ductwork with velocities not exceeding 2500 fpm and 16 static pressures not exceeding 2.5 inches w.g. 17 18 es: The types of ductwork specified in this Section 19 include, but are not limited to the following: 20 21 Air conditioning supply & return air systems 22 (auditoriums) - fiberglass 23 (mezzanine ) - sheetmetal 24 (lobby & corridor) - sheetmetal 25 Mechanical exhaust systems - sheetmetal 26 27 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 28 29 SMACNA Standards: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 30 Contractors National Association (SMACNA), Second Edition, 1995 31 HVAC Commercial Metal and Flexible Duct Construction Standards 32 for fabrication, construction, details, and installation 33 procedures, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in 34 these Specifications for metal and flexible duct. Comply with 35 SMACNA fibrous glass duct construction standard, Sixth Edition, 36 1992 for fiberglass duct construction. 37 38 ASHRAE Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, 39 Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 40 recommendations, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings 41 or in these Specifications. 42 43 NFPA Standards: Comply with ANSI/NFPA 90A "Standard for the 44 Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and 45 ANSI/NFPA 90B "Standard of Installation of Warm Air Heating and 46 Air-Conditioning Systems". 47 48 SUBMITTALS: 49 50 Shop Drawings: Ductwork submittals shall include ductwork 51 fabrication drawings and submittal data on ductwork specialties 52 and construction details. 53 54 Ductwork fabrication drawings shall be drawings to scale on 55 building floor plans and shall indicate duct sizes, locations 56 of traverse joints, fittings, ductwork bottom elevation, Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 offsets, ductwork specialties and all other information , required for coordination with other trades and fabrication of ductwork. Duct specialties and construction details shall include . information on traverse and longitudinal joints, cross-breaking or traverse beading, dampers, flexible connectors, transitions, elbows, fire and fire/smoke damper connections, branch taps, turning vanes, access doors and other required duct specialties and construction details. _ Ductwork fabrication drawings shall be coordinated with other trades and building construction prior to submittal for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide ma*_erials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains, discoloration, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. Gages, Rectangular Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork, (galvanized and stainless, if any) from the minimum gages for sized up to the corresponding maximum long-side dimensions as indicated in SMACNA Duct Manual "Low Velocity Systems". Gages, Round Ductwork: Fabricate steel ductwork (galvanized and stainless, if any) from the minimum gages for diameters up to the corresponding maximum dimensions as indicated in SMACNA Duct Manual "Low Velocity Systems". Sheet Metal: Fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet metal, unless otherwise indicated, complying with ANSI/ASTM A527, Lock forming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A525 G90 zinc coating; mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Fiberglass: Glass fiber duct shall be reinforced transversely and laterally in accordance with the SMACNA Manual for fiberglass ducts. Duct board shall be Schuller "SuperDuct" air duct board types 475 and 800 where required to meet the requirements of these specifications. The ductboard shall have a interior coating that is formulated with an immobilized, EPA approved anti-microbial agent so it will not support the growth of fungus or bacteria. Round, Piberglass Ductwork: Duct may be fabricated from Schuller "SuperRound" internally coated preformed fiberglass duct. The duct shall have a interior coating that is formulated with an immobilized, EPA approved anti-microbial agent so it will not support the growth of fungus or bacteria. ~ Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.2 I i r 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 19 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Round, Exposed, Ductwork: Ductwork shall be a minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel with spiral lock seams. The duct shall be lined with 1" Schuller Spiraacoustic Plus Round Liner Board. The K-value of the insulation at 75°F mean temperature = .230 BTU. The liner shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer including the use of pins and adhesive. All joints and seams in the liner shall be sealed with the manufacturers coating products including Super-Seal Hv, Super-Seal Edge Treatment and Super-Seal Duct Butter. The ductwork shall be joined by the use of a inner male sleeve coupling. Elbows, fittings, transitions, taps, couplings, offsets, etc. shall be factory fabricated by the same manufacturer as the ductwork. Elbows less than 36° shall have 2 gores, elbows between 36° and 71° shall have 3 and 4 gores, and elbows between 72° and 90° shall have 5 gores. Duct shall be factory supplied with a "Paint Grip" finish. MISCELLANEOUS DIICTWORK MATERIALS: General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of the types and sizes indicated, and where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment. Duct sealant: All joints in all sheetmetal ductwork shall be sealed with a water base adhesive sealer designed for use in medium velocity duct systems. Sealer shall be effective against both negative and positive air losses. Sealer shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. Apply un-thinned with brush, trowel or caulking gun as per the manufacturer's recommendations and allow to dry for a minimum of 48 hours before air is applied to the system. Sealer shall be "Iron Grip Water Base Duct Sealant #601" as manufactured by Hardcaet, Inc. or an approved equal. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim, and angles for support of ductwork. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASC-A-7001 by The Adhesive and Sealant Council, Inc. (see SMACNA standards). Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA. Flexible Ductwork: Flexible duct shall be used where shown on the drawings. All flexible duct shall be assumed to be low pressure unless noted as being high pressure. Where flexible duct is used it shall be limited to a maximum length of 8' per run. Where longer runs are required, provide rigid duct work. Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be a factory Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel or spiral aluminum helix. Seamless inner liner shall be composed of: 1, 2, or 3-ply aluminum, coated glass fabric; a combination of aluminum, fiber glass, and aluminized polyester; or "Tedler" film. Insulation shall be nominal 1-inch thick fiberglass with a maximum thermal conductance of 0.23 btu/hr/sf/degree F. The assembly shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket. The flexible duct assembly shall be suitable for a minimum of 4" w.c. working pressure and shall be listed Class I by the Underv.'riter's Laboratory at a flame spread of not over 25 and a smoke developed rate of not over 50. Ducts shall also comply with NFPA Standard 90A. Flexible ducts shall be installed in a fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. Bends in any length of flexible duct shall not exceed a total of 135 degree. Where flexible duct length exceeds 72", horizontal support is required. Duct shall be suspended on 36 inch centers with a minimum 3/4 inch wide flat banding material and a minimum 6" wide sheet metal protecti•ae saddle. All joints and connections shall be made by turning back the insulation and securing the inner liner with 1/2 inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps as manufactured by Panduit Corporation, or approved equal, and sealing with an approved duct tape. The insulation shall then be placed over the joint and sealed on the exterior with an approved duct tape. Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be one of the following: Flexmaster type 2, 3, or 3M G.I. Industries type IHP-25 Clevaflex type 12FV, SVF or SFA Wiremold type 57K or CRK All round take-offs shall be made with a damper extractor spin-collar. Spin-ins shall be installed with a damper axis parallel to air flow. The damper shall be provided with an access door or remote regulator as specified for sheetmetal ductwork volume dampers for spin-ins installed in inaccessible locations. Flex Duct Connections to Air Devices: Connections to air devices with flexible duct shall be made by turning back the insulation and securing the inner liner with 1/2 inch wide positive locking stainless steel or self-locking nylon straps ae manufactured by Panduit Corporation or approved equal and sealing with an approved duct tape. The insulation shall then be placed over the joint and sealed on the exterior with an approved duct tape. Flex Duct for Auditorium Air Devices: All auditorium air devices shall be connected using Flexmaster 8M, acoustically Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.4 1 rated flex duct, or it'e equivalent. 2 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6 FABRICATION: 7 8 Sheetmetal: 9 10 Standards: Round and rectangular sheet metal ductwork shall be 11 constructed in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 12 Contractors Association (SMCNA), Second Edition,1995 HVAC 13 Commercial Metal and Flexible Duct Construction Standards, 14 ASHRAE Guide and Data Book, "Handbook of Fundamentals", latest 15 edition, specifically Chapter 33; and NFPA Standard 90-A, 16 "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and 17 Ventilating Systems". Duct sizes shown are clear inside 18 dimensions. Where duct-liner is required, increase each 19 dimension to accommodate that liner. 20 21 Fiberglass: 22 23 Standards: SMACNA, Sixth Edition, 1992 fibrous glass duct 24 construction standard for Fiberglass Duct Construction. 25 26 Fabrication - Fiberglass: 27 28 Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be stapled securely, 29 as recommended by the manufacturer, and joints shall be heat 30 tape sealed. 31 32 The manufacturer's closure system shall be used, and only the 33 manufacturer's tapes will be acceptable, i.e., Schuller 39 Fortifiber Therm-lock with Automatic Bond Indicator (ABI) dots. 35 36 Construction standards shall be the Schuller Fabrication Manual 37 supplementary Schuller Construction Submittals and reinforcing 38 schedule. 39 40 Tie-rod reinforcing shall be used except where otherwise 41 specified herein. The tie-rod termination shall be the self 42 sealing FASLOOP washer 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 0.020" and a FASLOOP 43 type 180 degree or greater bend in each end of the wire. 12 44 gauge galvanized wire shall be used for the tie-rod. 45 46 The closure shall be one layer of tape. Facing punctures or 47 damage shall be sealed with approved closure material extending 48 at least 1-1/2" in each direction from the damage. 49 50 Duct that has been noticeably bent, leaving an observable 51 crease line shall not be used. 52 53 All fittings shall be reinforced with either tie-rod 54 reinforcing or 18 gauge 1-1/4" x 3" channel on 12" centers and 55 adhered to the duct with screws and washers on 16" centers. 56 Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Fiberglass fittings shall not be installed closer to a fan than four duct diameters or four lineal feet whichever is greater. Any interior surface that is damaged shall be replaced or shall be heavily buttered with an approved duct liner adhesive. Equipment connection or connections to upstream metal ducts shall be accomplished with a continuous channel over the duct board and screwed to the equipment on 10" centers or less. All air distribution devices with operators and all equipment mounted internally to the ductwork, shall be mounted in a suitable gauge sheetmetal sleeve or housing fastened to the ductwork in an approved manner with brads or screws and washers and external frame. Branch connections in the ductwork shall be made with sheetmetal tap housings as required to protect the structural integrity of the main duct; all radial branch duct connections shall be made with Schuller radial sheetmetal branch connection fittings. All rectangular ductwork shall be supported at not more than 4'-0" on centers or less if required, to accomplish a proper and workmanlike installation. DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS: Rectangular Ductwork: Joints and seams in ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with Table 1-4 for 1-inch w.g. pressure and 1-5 for 2-inch w.g., SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards". Drive slips for rectangular ductwork may be used on short side only, up to 18 inches maximum. Gage of drive slips shall be at least as heavy as ductwork on which they are installed. Bend drive slips over at least 3/4 inch at corners. At the Contractor's option, ductwork may be joined with "Ductmate" connections as manufactured by Ductmate Industries of Pittsburgh, PA. Round Ductwork: Transverse joints for round ductwork shall be slip-type properly secured and sealed. Draw bands shall not be used on "spiral" ductwork. All Transverse Joints: Seal all transverse joints using SMACNA-approved mastic or non-hardening sealant. BRANCH CONNECTIONS AND TAKE-OFFS: General: Where square take-offs to diffuser within 18 inches are shown, provide extractors with external adjustment, Titus AG-45 with No. 2 operator or approved equal. ELBOWS AND TEES General: Where radius elbows on rectangular ductwork are shown on ducts, centerline radius shall be 1-1/2 times duct width and radius of throats shall be equal to duct width. Square throats Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.6 1 1 2 3 9 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 36 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 5q 55 56 for radius elbows will not be acceptable. Where square elbows on rectangular ductwork are shown, provide single-thickness, turning vanes constructed in accordance with Fig.2-3, Fifth Edition of SMACNA, "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards". Trailing edge single thickness vanes shall not be used. In duct over 36 inches high, multiple sections on single thickness vanes shall be used. Elbows in round ductwork shall be constructed with not less than the number of sections stipulated in SMACNA "Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards". Turning vanes used in transition elbows shall be installed to cut smoothly into the air stream and direct air out of the elbow parallel to the sides of the duct. Use adjustable vanes where required. TRANSFORMATIONS: General: Where duct width increases, maximum angle of slope shall be 20 degrees (1 inch in 2.7 inches). Where duct width decreases, maximum angle of slope shall be 30 degrees (1 inch in 1.7 inches). FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK: General: Flexible ductwork shall be provided as shown on Drawings. In no case shall total angularity of turns in any one section of flexible ductwork exceed 135 degrees, and radius of turns shall not exceed that recommended by the flexible ductwork manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the length of any one run of flexible ductwork shall not exceed e feet. FLEXIBLE JOINTS IN DUCTWORK: General: Provide flexible connections where ductwork connects to air-handling units, fans, and similar items, and where required for expansion and contraction of the ductwork or the building structure. Flexible connections shall be rigidly connected to metal work on each side and shall be airtight. Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK: General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight and noiseless systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with a minimum of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of the type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and prevent buckling. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 coordination with formwork, as required to avoid delays in the work. Completion: Complete fabrication of work at the project as necessary to match stop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements. Run Location: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in the shortest route which does not obstruct usable space, or block access for servicing the building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of the building. Limit clearance to 0.5 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork to assure 1.0 inch clearance of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except ae specifically shown. Coordinate the layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. 8langes: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal the space between the construc*_ion opening and the duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of the same gage as the duct. Overlap the opening on all sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. Coordination: Coordinate duct installation with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls, and other associated work of the ductwork system. Ductwork Support: Support ductwork from building structure as required in SMACNA Duct Manual "Low Velocity Systems". Anchorage and support of all ducts and equipment shall comply with local codes and standards for support. CLEANING AND PROTECTION General: Clean ductwork internally, section-by-section of dust and debris as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of the metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint damage. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at the time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or ocher covering which will prevent the entrance of dust and debris until such time that connections are to be completed. END OF SECTION 15890 Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork 5-25-00 15890.8 1 SSCTZON 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 2 3 PART 1 - GENERAL: 4 5 6 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. it 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 19 Work Included: Provide ductwork accessories as required for 15 the project including tae following: 16 17 Extractors 18 Turning vanes 19 Monitors 20 Splitter dampers 21 Access doors 22 Straightening grids 23 Fire dampers 24 Smoke/Fire Dampers 25 26 QUALITY A33IIRANCE: 27 28 SMACNA Co liance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet 29 Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 30 (SMACNA) "High Pressure" and "I,ow Velocity" Duct Construction 31 Standards. 32 33 ASHRAE Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, 34 Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) 35 recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork 36 accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 37 38 SUBMITTALS: 39 40 Sho Drawin s: Show modifications of indicated requirements, 41 if applicable, made to conform to local shop practice, and show 42 how these modifications ensure that the materials and weights 43 are hot reduced and that the fabricated units are equivalent to 44 the specified requirements in every significant way. 45 46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 47 48 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES, MATERIALS, AND FABRICATION: 49 50 General: Provide ductwork accessories which comply with the 51 Sections 15890 and 15910 for applicable product requirements of 52 ductwork materials. 53 54 55 Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork Accessories 5-25-00 15910.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 FLERIBLE CONNECTIONS General: Flexible connections shall be UL labeled, 30 ounce glass fabric lined with insulation, and coated on both sides with Neoprene, complete with attachment accessories, "VentGlass" by Vent-Fabrics, Inc. or approved equal. DIICTWORR HARDWARE: General: Damper operators for concealed inaccessible ductwork shall be Young Regulator Co. Catalog No. 700 or No. 315 as shown. Non-insulated accessible ductwork shall be Young Regulator Co. Catalog No. 433. Accessible insulation ductwork shall be Young Regulator' Co. Catalog No. 943. Approved equal units by Duo-Dyne or Vent Fabrics, Inc. will be acceptable. DIRECTION AND VOLUME CONTROL AND FIRE DAIdPERS General: Provide all direction and volume control and fire dampers shown or noted on Drawings. All damper control devices shall be installed so as to be fully concealed in finished rooms and spaces. Control Dampers Splitter Dampers: Splitter dampers shall not be less than 16 gage. Splitter dampers shall be 1-1/2 times the width of narrowest duct leaving Split, except not less than 12 inches long, and shall have not more than 1/4 inch less height than duct in which it is installed. Splitter dampers having area less than 2.25 square feet shall be adjusted by means of a locking quadrant mounted on end of shaft. Splitter dampers having larger area shall be adjusted by means of one or more push rods in accordance with SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards". Extractors: Provide extractors of the size and type indicated, with hex-key operated adjustable blades, with gang-operated galvanized steel blades on 1-inch centers. Pressure Tape: Where rectangular take-offs of branches from main ducts are shown with 45 degree entry, provide manual volume regulators with lockable operators, where shown. Round Tapa: Where taps to main ducts or their branches are shown, provide 45 degree angle taps or 90 degree "spin-in" taps with manual volume dampers. Multi-Leaf Dampers: Where multi-leaf dampers are shown, provide opposed blade type in accordance with Fig. 2-15, SMACNA "Duct Construction Standards". Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers at duct penetrations of floors, smoke partitions, fire walls, elsewhere as shown in the Drawings, and where requited by the Uniform Building Code. Fire Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork Accessories 5-25-00 15910.2 dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standards 555. Each fire damper shall have a 212 degrees fusible link and shall include a UL Label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. Manufacturer's Literature submitted for approval prior to installation shall include comprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and shall illustrate pressure drops for all sizes of dampers required at all anticipated air flow rates. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin Type 1BD2, 1BD23, Style B or C as required. Frovide factory furnished sleeves and mounting angles. Provide i-hour-rated dampers where penetrations are in required 1-hour fire-rated assemblies. Provide 1-1/2-hour-rated dampers where penetrations are in required 2-hour fire-rated assemblies. Provide 3-hour-rated dampers where penetrations are in required 4-hour fire-rated assemblies; 4-hour occupancy separating walls are excepted. COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS: Furnish and install combination fire/smcke dampers at locations shown on plans, or as described in schedules and where required by City and County Building Codes. Fire/Smoke Damper shall be 1-1/2 hour rated fire damper under UL standard 555, and shall futher be classified by UL as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems by the latest version of UL 5555 bear a UL label attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification. Testing and qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL 5555 shall be no higher than leakage class II. The dampers and their operators shall be qualified under UL SSSS to a minimum elevated temperature of 250° F. Electric operators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper operators shall be sideplate mounted out of the airstream. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 J 2 53 54 55 56 Each combination Fire/Smoke Damper fusible link which shall melt at le close and lock in a closed position Damper shall be Ruskin Model FSD-36 Prairie Park Cinema 5-25-00 shall be equipped with a 5°F causing the damper to or equal by Air Balance. Ductwork Accessories 15910.3 1 FLASHING AND COUNTHRFLASHING: 2 3 General: Flashing and counterflashing shall be as specified in 4 other Divisions of these Specifications. 5 6 TURNING VANES: 7 8 General: Provide turning vanes in the size and type indicated 9 with the following additional construction features: 10 11 Blades: 2-inch galvanized steel for up to an including 18-inch 12 ducts. 13 14 Blades: 4-1/2-inch galvanized steel for ducts over 18 inches. 15 16 Construction: Single wall blades. 17 18 es: Fixed blades for 90-degree elbows, adjustable for 19 transition elbow3, and fixed for 45 degree elbows where shown. 20 21 DUCT ACCESS DOORS: 22 23 General: Provide hinged duct access doors, gasketed, and with 24 insulation where ductwork is indicated to be insulated. 25 Provide construction per SMACNA Standards. Access doors shall 26 be at least 15-inches x 15-inches. 27 28 Inspection Plates: Provide inspection plates as detailed on 29 the Drawings. If not detailed, provide a minimum opening of 30 4-inches x 4-inches with a 5-inch x 6-inch ecverplate. Tree 31 coverplate shall be one gage heavier than the ductwork, 32 gasketed and secured with a minimum of 8 sheet metal screws. 33 34 MISCSLLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS: 35 36 General: Provide miscellaneous materials for ductwork 37 accessories, including hinges, refrigerator latches, sash 38 locks, bolts and wing nuts, gaskets, and pitot tubes as 39 recommended by the ductwork accessories manufacturer for Che 40 application indicated. 41 02 PART 3 - EXECUTION 43 44 INSTALLATION: 45 46 Access Doors: Install access doors so that the doors open 47 against the system air pressure wherever feasible, and that 48 their latches are operable from either side, except where the 49 duct is too small to be entered. Provide access to each fire 50 and smoke damper link to permit resetting. Comply with City and 51 County Building Codes and NFPA No. 90A. 52 53 Inspection Plates: Install plates aC each zone damper and 54 where otherwise indicated on the Plans. 55 Prairie Park Cinema Ductwork Accessories 5-25-00 15910.4 1 Multi-Leaf Dampers: Install multi-leaf volume dampers in each 2 zone duct and as otherwise required for balancing. 3 4 Sputter Dampers: install sputter dampers at all divisions of 5 ductwork for proper air pattezn control. 6 7 TESTING: 8 9 General: Check installed ductwork accessories for required 10 operation and leakproof performance during the system's 11 operational test. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as 12 required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. 13 14 END OF SECTION 15910 15 prairie Park Cinema Ductwork Accessories 5-25-00 15910.5 1 SECTION 15930 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCIIMENT3: 7 B Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 13 14 work Included: Provide air distribution devices as required 15 for the project including the following: 16 17 Ceiling air diffusers 16 Grilles and registers 19 20 QIIALZTY ASSURANCE: 21 22 Manufacturers: Devices manufactured by Metalaire, Titus, 23 Krueger, Anemostat/Waterloo, Aeronca, Carnes, or Barber-Colman 24 will be acceptable if the devices furnished comply with these 25 Specifications, the conditions scheduled, and are similar in 26 appearance to the units scheduled. 27 28 NFPA Compliance: Comply with National Fire Protection 29 Association (NFPA) Standard No. 90, as applicable to air 30 diffuser construction and installation. 31 32 Design Compliance: If so directed by the Engineer, test air 33 outlets to determine compliance with these Specifications. 34 Perform all revisions required to comply with terminal 35 velocity, noise level, or maximum temperature variation 36 requirements at no cost to the Owner. 37 38 Air Distribution Equipment: Maximum space temperature 39 variation shall not exceed 2 degree F through the conditioned 40 area from 2 feet - 0 inches above the floor, to 7 feet 0 inches 41 above the floor. The air outlets shall be selected by the 42 manufacturer to suit the volume, throw, and noise level 43 scheduled or shown on the Drawings, and maintain maximum 44 terminal velocities of 50 FPM, unless otherwise indicated. 95 46 SIIBMITTALS: 47 48 Manufacturer~a Test Data: Include test data and results as 49 specified herein. 50 51 BALANCING ACCESSORIES: 52 53 General: Provide factory-calibrated balancing cones for use in 54 air balancing all types of ceiling outlets, linear diffusers, 55 or any other special outlet. All cones shall be calibrated for Prairie Park Cinema Air Distribution Devices 5-25-00 15930.1 1 use with Alnor velometer, and identified with air-flow factors 2 permanently indicated on the-sides of the cones. 3 4 5 PART 2 - PRODIICT3 6 7 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEt7ICES: 8 9 General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide air 10 distribution devices of the size, shape, and type, constructed 11 of materials and components, and with finishes as indicated in 12 the schedule on the Drawings. Apply corrosion-resistant 13 treatment to all surfaces prior to applying prime coat. 14 15 Ceiling Diffusers: Provide diffusers with corrosion resistant 16 treated surfaces, and finished in off-white baked enamel unless 17 indicated otherwise on Drawings. Provide volume control 18 dampers with each supply air diffuser. where applicable, 19 provide adapters with diffusers to permit connection to round 20 supply duct. 21 22 Register and Grilles: 23 24 General: Provide registers which contain a key-operated 25 multi-louvered opposed blade damper operable from the face 26 side. 27 28 Supply Air Register: Provide all supply air registers of the 29 double deflection type. 30 31 Finishes: Anodize devices constructed of aluminum. Submit color 32 selection to Architect for approval. 33 34 Return Air Grilles and Return Air Registers: Provide grilles 35 and registers which have fixed face blades and match the face 36 of the supply air registers, unless indicated otherwise on 37 Drawings. 38 39 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION 41 42 INSTALLATION: 43 44 General: Install air distribution devices in accordance with 45 manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry 46 practices to ensure that products serve intended functions. 47 48 Coordination: Coordinate with other trades, including ductwork 49 and ductwork accessories, as necessary to interface air 50 distribution devices properly with other work. 51 52 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 53 54 Test: Test installed devices to demonstrate satisfactory 55 compliance with specified and indicated requirements. Prairie Park Cinema Air Distribution Devices 5-25-00 15930.2 1 2 END OF SECTION 15930 3 Prairie Park Cinema Air Distribution Devices 5-25-00 15930.3 r . . . . . a . . r. ~ . . . . . .~ . r. 1 SECTION 15970 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM 2 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 5 6 RELATED DOCUMELIT3: 7 8 Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General 9 and Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 Specification section, 10 and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. 11 12 DSSCRIPTION O1? WORK: 13 14 Work Included: Provide an automatic electric temperature 15 control system complete and ready for service, as indicated or 16 specified. Provide all equipment, materials, and incidentals 17 needed for the system to achieve all functions and results 18 specified in this Section under "Operating Sequences". Perfoxm 19 all low voltage wiring in connection with the automatic 20 electric temperature control system, regardless of whether 21 shown on the mechanical or electrical Drawings, including 22 interlock wiring. 23 24 Work of Other Sections: 25 26 Mechanical Contractor shall install duct-mounted devices 27 control devices furnished by this Section. 28 29 Refer to Division 16 sections for power wiring to line voltage 30 devices; not work of this section. 31 32 Control wiring, except for power wiring, necessary for 33 automatic electric control systems, is work of this section. 34 35 QIIALITY ASSURANCE: 36 37 Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in manufacturing of 38 electronic temperature control equipment, of types and sizes 39 which are similar to required equipment, and which have been in 40 satisfactory use for not less than 3 years, in similar service. 41 42 Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have 43 been tested, listed, and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories 44 (UL), and which comply with Diational Electrical Manufacturers 45 Association (NEMA) standards. 46 47 SUBMITTALS: 48 49 General: Refer to Division 1 and Section 1501C for general 50 submittal requirements. Submit automatic electric temperature 51 control system shop drawings, manufacturer's data, operating 52 instructions, maintenance manuals, wiring diagrams, interlock 53 diagrams, control wiring diagrams, system guarantee, and 54 product warranties. SS 56 Prairie Park Cinema Automatic Temperature Control System 5-25-00 15970.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Wiring Diagrams Prepare and submit to the Architect a composite wiring diagram which shows all wiring and connections necessary for the complete interlocking of mechanical equipment as required under this Section. Incorporate approved wiring diagrams for such equipment as motor controllers, coils, and similar items in a complete interlock wiring diagram. Include all line and low voltage wiring between temperature control equipment, motor controllers, fans, and similar items, wired to obtain the sequences described within this Section, in the interlock wiring diagram. Detail all internal wiring of panels and other packaged equipment in the composite wiring diagram. Prepare a written description of the interlock sequence of operation on the composite wiring diagram. Include complete identification of each item described and shown (relays, motor controller, and similar items). Relate each item's exact operation to the interlock sequence. Forward six copies of the completed composite wiring diagram to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS General: All temperature control equipment furnished sizall be standard catalog products. The contractor shall furnish all accessory devices such as fittings, relays, enclosures, etc., as required to provide a complete and workable system as herein specified. Identification of all items shall conform to the specified requirements of "Identification" in Section 15010. Smoke Detectors: Smoke detectors in the supply and return of each rooftop unit shall be furnished and installed by Division 16. Detectors shall stop the associated fan when smoke is detected in the return air. Coordinate all interlocking requirements with the Division 16 contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION Rooftop HVAC Vnits: The Rooftop HVAC units shall be controlled by their thermostat ds specified in Section 15859. The toilet rooms and concession area exhaust fans shall be interlocked with the lobby area HVAC units auxiliary relay to run anytime the units run. The fans shall stop anytime the units are off. The DIP switches on the thermostats shall be set so the outside air damper wi21 close and the indoor fan operation will be automatic, regardless of fan switch position, when the unit is in the unoccupied mode. Prairie Park Cinema Automatic Temperature Control System 5-25-00 15970.2 1 Installation: 2 3 All wiring required for the installation of the temperature 4 control system shall be furnished and installed by the 5 mechanical contractor, in conduit, and in accordance with all 6 applicable codes. Power wiring shall be furnished under 7 Division 16 of these specifications, by the Electrical 8 Contractor. 9 10 Operational Check and Iastructions to Owner: 11 12 Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall 13 completely check out all new interface circuity, and instruct 14 the Owner's operating personnel in the function of the system. 15 16 Service and Guarantee: 17 18 The entire control system, herein specified, shall be 19 guaranteed against defects in material and/or workmanship. If 20 within twelve months from completion of installation, any new 21 system component is found to be defective, it shall be replaced 22 or repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. During system 23 installation, the contractor shall supply the necessary field 24 supervision of the installation trades, and upon completion of 25 the installation, completely check out and calibrate all new 26 system components and instruct the operating personnel as to 27 system operation and maintenance. 28 29 30 END OF SECTION 15970 31 Prairie Park Cinema Automatic Temperature Control System 5-25-00 15970.3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 i8 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 c3 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 S1 52 53 54 55 cE SECTION 15990 - HVAC OPERATIONAL TEST-ADJUST-BALANCE PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCIIMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Division i Specification section, and Section 15010, shall apply to work of this section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Work included: Fully examine the Drawings and Specifications for this project and determine whether or not sufficient volume dampers, thermometers, gages, pressure and temperature taps, means of reading static and total pressure in duct systems, and other means of taking data needed for proper air balancing are shown or specified. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, any items have been omitted, notify the Architect in writing and receive clarification before submitting a proposal for this project. Tender of a proposal conveys full agreement to the system as designed and the balancing means provided. Provide all items required, but not shown, at no additional coat to the Owner. Test, adjust, and balance systems to optimize operating and comfort conditions. Record test data as outlined hereinafter and submit for review and approval. Systems shall be fully tested prior to Building acceptance. Conduct all tests as specified herein, and as required by authorities having jurisdiction, including Local Inspection Department, Owner, Architect, or Engineer. Repair or replace all defects discovered or resulting from the required tests to a like new condition. QIIALITY A33IIRANCS: Personnel: Submit evidence to show that the personnel who will actually balance the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NESS) will be sufficient. The Architect reserves the right to require that the originally approved personnel be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in his opinion, the original personnel are not qualified or are noti properly conducting the system balancing. PART 2 - PRODIICTS No products are required. Prairie Park Cinema HVAC Operational Test-Adjust-Balance 5-25-00 15990.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 PART 3 - EXECUTION VEST DATA: General: Record test data after all balancing has been completed, and deliver recorded data to the Architect for review and evaluation. Should deficiencies or discrepancies be found, repeat balancing procedures to achieve correct test data results. Certify the test and balancing data as being true and correct over the Contractor's signature. Execute the Certification by an authorized officer if the contracting firm is a corporation, by a partner if the firm is a partnership, by the firm's owner if the firm is a sole proprietorship, or by the authorized representative if the firm is a joint venture. Include a copy of the approved test and balancing data in the Owner's Manual. Test Forma: Record and submit teat and balancing data on forms similar to those of the AA$C or NEBB. CALIBRATION LIST: Submit to the Architect for approval a list of the gages, thermometers, velometer, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. Submit evidence to show that the balancing devices are properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. PRELIMINARY AIR TESTS General: Preliminary air tests using smoke candles shall be performed before ductwork or equipment is enclosed in walls, floors, ceilings, chases, or in any other way concealed from view. Tests may be conducted on individual systems. Submit notification when systems are ready for preliminary air teats. Make all necessary arrangements to energize fan motors for the tests. Conduct the tests before the application of exterior duct insulation and installation of grilles or diffusers. Remove section of duct to allow design air flow at design static pressure where necessary. Testa: Demonstrate that there is no excessive leakage of the ductwork by visual inspection, that fans are operating at essentially the correct speed, that motors will not overload, and that equipment delivers design CFM. Correct any deficiencies found. Repeat preliminary air tests until testa have proven satisfactory. Inspection: Inspection and acceptance of the Work shall, in addition to the foregoing requirements, be subject to the following conditions: Instruments: All test instruments, devices, and similar items, their accuracy and the methods by which instruments are employed, shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use at the Prairie Park Cinema HVAC Operational Test-Adjust-Balance 5-25-00 15990.2 1 job site. 2 3 FINAL AIR BALANCE: 4 5 C3eneral: When all tests have been completed, and systems are 6 complete and ready for operation, perform the following steps 7 of final air balance and record the results. 8 9 Motors: Verify correct roCation of all rotating equipment. l0 Verify that properly sized thermal heater elements are 11 installed in all starters. Verify that properly sized 12 dual-element fusee, where specified, are installed in 13 disconnect switches. 14 15 Filters: Check air filters or filter media. Balance system 16 only with essentially clean filters or filter media. 17 18 Slower Speed: Read and adjust RPM at each fan or blower to 19 design requirements. 20 21 Ampere Readings: Read and record full load amperes for motors. 22 23 Static Pressures: Read and record static pressure at each fan 24 and blower suction and discharge. 25 26 Air Flow at Each Unit: Read and record return, outside, and 27 supply air CFM and temperature at each fan and blower. 28 29 Coil Temperatures: Set thermostat for full cooling acid for 30 full heating loads. Read and record entering and leaving dry 31 bulb and wet bulb temperatures at each cooling and heating 32 coil. 33 34 Outlet Air Flow: Adjust each air exhaust inlet and supply 35 diffuser, register, and grille to within plus or minus 10 36 percent of design air CFM. Dampers in diffusers may be used 37 for only 10 percent adjustment from full open air flow. 38 Include a12 terminal points of air supply, and all points of 39 exhaust. 40 41 42 END OF SECTION 15990 43 Prairie Park Cinema HVAC Operational Test-Adjust-Balance 5-25-00 15990.3